Electrical Sector Solutions Volume 11: Vehicle and Commercial Controls Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Control Tab 1--Electronic Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-1 Tab 2--Rockers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-1 Tab 3--Special Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T3-1 Tab 4--Toggle Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-1 Tab 5--Dimmers and Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T5-1 Tab 6--Pushbuttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-1 Tab 7--Definitions and Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T7-1 11 Copyright Dimensions, Weights and Ratings Dimensions, weights and ratings given in this catalog are approximate and should not be used for construction purposes. Drawings containing exact dimensions are available upon request. All listed product specifications and ratings are subject to change without notice. Photographs are representative of production units. Terms and Conditions All prices and discounts are subject to change without notice. When price changes occur, they are published in Eaton's Price and Availability Digest (PAD). All orders accepted by Eaton's Electrical Sector are subject to the general terms and conditions as set forth in Appendix 1--Eaton Terms & Conditions. Technical and Descriptive Publications This catalog contains brief technical data for proper selection of products. Further information is available in the form of technical information publications and illustrated brochures. If additional product information is required, contact your local Eaton Products Distributor, call 1-800-525-2000 or visit our website at www.eaton.com. Compliance with Nuclear Regulation 10 CFR 21 Eaton products are sold as commercial grade products not intended for application in facilities or activities licensed by the United States Nuclear Regulatory Commission for atomic purposes, under 10 CFR 21. Further certification will be required for use of these products in a safety-related application in any nuclear facility licensed by the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission. WARNING The installation and use of Eaton products should be in accordance with the provisions of the U.S. National Electrical Code(R) and/or other local codes or industry standards that are pertinent to the particular end use. Installation or use not in accordance with these codes and standards could be hazardous to personnel and/or equipment. These catalog pages do not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment, nor to provide for every possible contingency to be met in connection with installation, operation or maintenance. Should further information be desired or should particular problems arise which are not covered sufficiently for the purchaser's purposes, the matter should be referred to the local Eaton Products Distributor or Sales Office. The contents of this catalog shall not become part of or modify any prior or existing agreement, commitment or relationship. The sales contract contains the entire obligation of Eaton's Electrical Sector. The warranty contained in the contract between the parties is the sole warranty of Eaton. Any statements contained herein do not create new warranties or modify the existing warranty. Copyright (c)2015 Eaton, All Rights Reserved. Introduction Eaton is a global leader in power distribution, power quality, control and automation, and monitoring products. At Eaton, we believe a reliable, efficient and safe power system is the foundation of every successful enterprise. Through innovative technologies, cutting-edge products and our highly skilled services team, we empower businesses around the world to achieve a powerful advantage. In addition, Eaton is committed to creating and maintaining powerful customer relationships built on a foundation of excellence. From the products we manufacture to our dedicated customer service and support, we know what's important to you. Solutions Eaton takes the complexity out of power systems management with a holistic and strategic approach, leveraging our industry-leading technology, solutions and services. We focus on the following three areas in all we do: Reliability--maintain the appropriate level of power continuity without disruption or unexpected downtime Efficiency--minimize energy usage, operating costs, equipment footprint and environmental impact Safety--identify and mitigate electrical hazards to protect what you value most Using the Eaton Catalog Library As we grow, it becomes increasingly difficult to include all products in one or two comprehensive catalogs. Knowing that each user has their specific needs, we have created a library of catalogs for our products that when complete, will contain 15 volumes. Since the volumes will continuously be a work in progress and updated, each volume will stand alone. Refer to our volume directory, MZ08100001E, for a quick glance of where to look for the products you need. The 15 volumes include: Volume 1--Residential and Light Commercial (CA08100002E) Volume 2--Commercial Distribution (CA08100003E) Volume 3--Power Distribution and Control Assemblies (CA08100004E) Volume 4--Circuit Protection (CA08100005E) Volume 5--Motor Control and Protection (CA08100006E) Volume 6--Solid-State Motor Control (CA08100007E) Volume 7--Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions (CA08100008E) Volume 8--Sensing Solutions (CA08100010E) Volume 9--Original Equipment Manufacturer (CA08100011E) Volume 10--Enclosed Control (CA08100012E) Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls (CA08100013E) Volume 12--Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions (CA08100014E) Volume 13--Counters, Timers and Tachometers (CA08100015E)--Available in electronic format only Volume 14--Fuses (CA08100016E)--Available in electronic format only Volume 15--Solar Inverters and Electrical Balance of System (CA08100018E) These volumes are not all-inclusive of every product, but they are meant to be an overview of our product lines. For our full range of product solutions and additional product information, consult Eaton.com/electrical and other catalogs and product guides in our literature library. These references include: The Consulting Application Guide (CA08104001E) The Eaton Power Quality Product Guide (COR01FYA) If you don't have the volume that contains the product or information that you are looking for, not to worry. You can access every volume of the catalog library at Eaton.com/electrical in the Literature Library. By installing our Automatic Tab Updater (ATU), you can be sure you always have the most recent version of each volume and tab. Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com i Introduction Contact Us If you need additional help, you can find contact information under the Customer Care heading of Eaton.com/electrical. Product Selection Guide TAB 1--Electronic Products Description Page E31 eSM V11-T1-2 E30 eSM V11-T1-7 E32 eSM V11-T1-10 E33 eSM V11-T1-14 eVu V11-T1-17 TAB 2--Rockers Description Page Introduction V11-T2-2 NGR V11-T2-8 SVR V11-T2-32 Dual Motion Safety Switch V11-T2-43 1500/2500 V11-T2-45 1600/2600 V11-T2-49 Rockette V11-T2-56 8006/8007--EURO SR V11-T2-64 8004/8005 Euro Full-Size V11-T2-67 X Series V11-T2-70 8064/8065 ESPORT V11-T2-74 Accessories V11-T2-78 Technical Data V11-T2-80 Symbol Library V11-T2-82 TAB 3--Special Devices ii Description Page High Capacity Switches V11-T3-2 Panelboard Switches V11-T3-3 Keylock Switches, General Purpose/Heavy Duty--AC/DC Rated V11-T3-5 Locking Rocker V11-T3-9 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com Introduction TAB 4--Toggle Switches Description Page Introduction V11-T4-2 Military Purpose Toggles V11-T4-3 Illuminated AC Rated Toggles V11-T4-9 General Purpose Toggles--AC Rated V11-T4-11 General Purpose Toggles--AC/DC Rated V11-T4-20 X Series Toggles V11-T4-24 Heavy Duty Hesitation Switches V11-T4-27 Accessories V11-T4-31 Technical Data V11-T4-35 TAB 5--Dimmers and Wipers Description Page Paddle and Slide Controls V11-T5-2 Rotary Wipers V11-T5-4 TAB 6--Pushbuttons Description Page AC Rated V11-T6-2 Illuminated AC/DC Rated V11-T6-8 XP Series Sealed Pushbutton V11-T6-21 TAB 7--Definitions and Index Description Page Definitions V11-T7-1 Index V11-T7-2 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com iii Electronic Products E31 eSM--Multiplexed Keypad 1.1 E31 eSM--Keypad Multiplexed Switch Module Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Application Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Features and Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 E30 eSM--Multiplexed Rockers E32 eSM--Multiplexed Rockers E33 eSM--Sealed Multiplex Rocker Switch Units eVu--Electronic Vehicle Display V11-T1-3 V11-T1-4 V11-T1-5 V11-T1-5 V11-T1-7 V11-T1-7 V11-T1-7 V11-T1-8 V11-T1-9 V11-T1-9 V11-T1-10 V11-T1-10 V11-T1-10 V11-T1-11 V11-T1-11 V11-T1-12 V11-T1-13 E33 eSM--Sealed Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Application Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Features and Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5 V11-T1-2 E32 eSM--Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Application Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Features and Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4 V11-T1-2 E30 eSM--Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Application Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3 V11-T1-2 V11-T1-14 V11-T1-14 V11-T1-14 V11-T1-15 V11-T1-15 V11-T1-15 V11-T1-16 eVu--Electronic Vehicle Display Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Application Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-17 V11-T1-17 V11-T1-17 V11-T1-17 V11-T1-17 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--March 2014 www.eaton.com V11-T1-1 1.1 1 Electronic Products E31 eSM--Keypad Multiplexed Switch Module E31 eSM--Keypad Multiplexed Switch Module Contents Description E31 eSM--Keypad Multiplexed Switch Module Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 1 Page V11-T1-3 V11-T1-4 V11-T1-5 V11-T1-5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Product Description Application Description Features and Benefits Because your vehicle is continuously exposed to nature's elements, we offer the latest in Eaton's multiplexed line of switch product, the E31 Keypad eSM. Eaton's E31 Keypad eSM multiplex switch module offers a flexible and sealed solution for high-density switch requirements in severe environments. The keypad can be configured with any graphic/switch, as well as with customerdefined illumination. For customers requiring additional switches, expansion modules can be used with no requirement for additional CAN nodes. For additional product flexibility and differentiated operator control, the E31 Keypad eSM is designed to communicate with Eaton's E32 and E33 sealed rocker expansion modules. Great for specialty vehicle, construction, and agricultural equipment markets. The eSM product is especially suitable for severe environmental applications and where there is a desire to move to a multiplexed solution to simplify wiring and control requirements. Typical applications are: Key Features 1 Target Market Segments: Tractors Wheel loaders Refuse vehicles Concrete mixers Street sweepers Mining equipment Emergency vehicles Transit buses 1 1 1 Fully compliant with J1939/CAN 2.0b messaging IP68 degree of protection from front and rear of module Rocker and keypad expansion module capability Exceptional illumination characteristics LED backlighting of icons Four color daylightvisible indicators per switch Message-controlled dimming and flash rates Large switch surface area and alignment ridges for ease of gloved hand use Exceptional tactile and audible feedback of switch actuation Electrical/mechanical life to over 1,000,000 cycles 9-32 Vdc operating voltage Immunity per SAE J1455/1113 Power disturbance Radiated immunity Radiated emissions 1 1 V11-T1-2 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--March 2014 www.eaton.com Advantages Reduced assembly labor due to ease of installation, allowing for mounting and connection of eight switches at one time as opposed to individually Reduced wire harness complexity; uses one harness to a controller, reducing wiring, connection point, and controller requirements Reduced harness size offers an overall reduction in weight, improving operational efficiency of the equipment Increase in life-cycle over traditional electromechanical switches Front, rear, and panel sealing for harsh environments 1.1 Electronic Products E31 eSM--Keypad Multiplexed Switch Module Catalog Number Selection 1 How To Order--E31 eSM--Keypad Multiplexed Switch Module, 2x4 To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers. Example: Series E31 = Keypad Rows 2 = 2 rows E31 2 4 M Communication M = Master (J1939 CAN 2.0b) E = Expansion (LIN) 4 W 1 Indicators 4 = Red, amber, green, blue G = Green O = Orange CV 1 1 Backlighting W = White G = Green A = Amber Indicators 1 = Indicators 2 = No indicators Address 2 1 = Address 1 2 = Address 2 FF = Expansion Icons 1 CV = Circle XX = No icon Columns 4 = 4 columns Series E31 = Keypad Rows 4 = 4 rows 4 1 1 1 1 To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers. E31 1 1 How To Order--E31 eSM--Keypad Master Module, 4x3 Example: 1 3 Communication M = Master (J1939 CAN 2.0b) M 4 W Indicators 4 = Red, amber, green, blue CV 1 Backlighting W = White 1 1 Icons 1 CV = Circle XX = No icon 1 Address 2 = Address 1 Columns 3 = 3 columns 1 1 1 1 How To Order--E31 eSM--Keypad Master Module, 3x5 To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers. Example: Series E31 = Keypad Rows 3 = 3 rows E31 3 Communication M = Master (J1939 CAN 2.0b) 5 M 4 W Indicators 4 = Red, amber, green, blue CV 1 Backlighting W = White Icons 1 CV = Circle XX = No icon Address 2 1 = Address 1 1 1 1 1 1 Columns 5 = 5 columns 1 Notes 1 Contact Eaton sales for custom graphics. See V11-T2-80-V11-T2-84 and V11-T2-95-V11-T2-102, symbols library, for available graphics. 2 For use of multiple masters on one system. (Address 3-8 available as special order.) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--March 2014 www.eaton.com V11-T1-3 1.1 Electronic Products E31 eSM--Keypad Multiplexed Switch Module 1 Product Selection 1 Master 1 E3124M4W1CV1 1 E31 Keypad eSM Master Module, 2x4 Basic Part Indicator Colors Backlighting Icon Graphic Address Catalog Number E3124M Red, amber, green, blue White Circle 1 E3124M4W1CV1 2 E3124M4W1CV2 1 E3124M4W1XX1 2 E3124M4W1XX2 1 E3124MGG1CV1 2 E3124MGG1CV2 1 E3124MGG1XX1 2 E3124MGG1XX2 1 E3124MOA1CV1 2 E3124MOA1CV2 1 E3124MOA1XX1 2 E3124MOA1XX2 1 None 1 Green Green 1 Circle None 1 Orange Amber 1 Circle None 1 1 1 E3143M--Custom 1 E31 Keypad eSM Master Module, 4x3 Basic Part Indicator Colors Backlighting Icon Graphic Address Catalog Number E3143M Red, amber, green, blue White Circle 1 E3143M4W1CV1 2 E3143M4W1CV2 1 E3143M4W1XX1 2 E3143M4W1XX2 1 None 1 1 1 E3135M--Custom 1 E31 Keypad eSM Master Module, 3x5 Basic Part Indicator Colors Backlighting Icon Graphic Address Catalog Number E3135M Red, amber, green, blue White Circle 1 E3135M4W1CV1 2 E3135M4W1CV2 1 None 1 1 1 1 E3124EGG1XXFF 1 E3135M4W1XX2 E31 Keypad eSM Expansion Module, 2x4 1 Basic Part Indicator Colors Backlighting Icon Graphic Address Catalog Number E3124E Red, amber, green, blue White Circle FF E3124E4W1CVFF None FF E3124E4W1XXFF Circle FF E3124EGG1CVFF None FF E3124EGG1XXFF Circle FF E3124EOA1CVFF None FF E3124EOA1XXFF Green 1 1 E3135M4W1XX1 Expansion 1 1 1 2 Orange Green Amber Note 1 Expansion keypad module is available in 2x4 configuration only. 1 1 V11-T1-4 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--March 2014 www.eaton.com 1.1 Electronic Products E31 eSM--Keypad Multiplexed Switch Module Technical Data and Specifications Environmental and Electronic Specifications The interconnection between the master module and the controller uses a minimum four-wire harness with an additional two pins associated to expansion module interconnection. Wire sizes of 16-20 AWG can be accommodated with the Deutsch connector shown in the mating connector information. Wiring Harness PIN Master Expansion Vbat Vbat 2 Common Common 3 CAN (+) LIN 4 CAN (-) LIN 5 Common Common 6 LIN Vbat E32 and E33 Rocker Expansion Modules Deutsch DT Series connector The Keypad eSM master module is capable of supporting Eaton's E32 and E33 product line of rocker eSMs. The E32 and E33 product line is an abovepanel-style rocker switch module that contains any combination of rocker or indicator functionality with no additional CAN node requirement to the system. Similar to the keypad, the rocker module offers icon graphic illumination with up to four center indicator bar LEDs for status or mode. This product is also fully functional to support dimming and flashing capabilities through software command. 6-pin connector: DT06-6S EP11 (Black-Master) E008 (Gray-Expansion) 6-pin wedge lock: W6S Female terminal: 0462-201-16141 (16-18-20 AWG) Hole plug: 0413-217-1605 Crimper: HDT-48-00 E QU 1 3 2 1 30 I 4 5 6 (3.4 N-m) LB N- 1 Operational temperature: -40 to +85C Storage temperature: -40 to +95C Operational voltage: 9-32 Vdc Degree of protection: IP68 Mechanical shock: 30g for 11 msec Handling drop: 1m Electrical/mechanical life: 1M cycles Load dump SAE J1455: 100V/12V systems SAE J1113/11: 174V for 24V systems 1 Mating Connector Information XIMUM T MA OR Master Module Wiring Harness 6 XXXX XXXXXXXX MADE IN MEXICO 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Dimensions 1 Approximate Dimensions in mm [in] 2x4 Mounting Dimensions O 50.8 [2.00] O 5.54 [0.218] 2X 34.70 [1.37] 1 E31 Keypad Master or Expansion Module Backlit Daylight White Graphics Area--8X 15.5 [0.61] 1 18.5 [0.73] Lighted Indicators Optional as Required 1 15.5 [0.61] 1 1 66.2 [2.61] 69.40 [2.73] 1 16.0 [0.63] 1 1 97.2 [3.83] 15.2 [0.60] 1 17.1 [0.67] 1 1 17.7 [0.70] 32.2 [1.27] Max. 1 M5 x 0.8 Nut and Lock Washer 2X (Included) Maximum Torque: 30 in-lbs (3.4 Nm) 1 1 1 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--March 2014 www.eaton.com V11-T1-5 1.1 1 1 Electronic Products E31 eSM--Keypad Multiplexed Switch Module Approximate Dimensions in mm [in] 4x3 Mounting Dimensions 1 1 O31.75 [1.25] 1 Backlit Daylight White Graphics Area--12X 15.5 [0.61] Lighted Indicators Optional as Required 18.5 [0.73] 15.5 [0.61] 95.25 [3.75] 50.80 [2.00] 1 1 E31 Keypad Master Module O5.54 [0.218] 4X 30.83 [1.21] 16.0 [0.63] 38.10 [1.50] Recommended Panel Opening 1 32.2 [1.27] Max. 127.5 [5.02] Depth with Mating 15.2 Connector [0.60] 1 17.1 [0.67] 1 1 1 74.0 [2.91] 1 17.7 [0.70] 1 M5 x 0.8 Nut and Lock Washer 4X (Included) Maximum Torque: 30 in-lbs (3.4 Nm) 1 1 1 3x5 Mounting Dimensions 1 1 63.50 [2.50] 1 O32.50 [1.280] O5.54 [0.218] Backlit Daylight White Graphics Area--15X 15.5 [0.61] 18.5 [0.73] Lighted Indicators Optional as Required 15.5 [0.61] 56.23 [2.21] 1 1 20.50 [0.81] E31 Keypad Master Module 88.90 [3.50] Recommended Panel Opening 1 97.0 [3.82] 16.0 [0.63] 32.2 [1.27] Max. Depth with Mating Connector 1 1 1 121.1 [4.77] 1 15.2 [0.60] 17.1 [0.67] 17.7 [0.70] 1 M5 x 0.8 Nut and Lock Washer 4X (Included) Maximum Torque: 30 in-lbs (3.4 Nm) 1 1 V11-T1-6 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--March 2014 www.eaton.com Electronic Products E30 eSM--Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units 1.2 Contents E30 eSM--Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units Description E30 eSM--Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page V11-T1-8 V11-T1-9 V11-T1-10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Product Description Tailored to meet the same look and feel of Eaton's NGR product line, the E30 eSM offers the added benefits of multiplexed control and system simplification. The E30 eSM is a below-panel styled multiplexed rocker module capable of communicating via SAE J1939 CAN 2.0b. The modules are set up in a master-expansion configuration capable of supporting up to seven 1 Application Description expansion modules per master thus minimizing the impact on a controller to a single CAN node. Additionally, up to eight master modules per system can be accommodated. Communication with the expansion modules is done via a four-wire sub-bus. Multiplexing of switches can significantly reduce harness costs and complexity as well as improve installation cycle time. Master Expansion Modules The E30 eSM is especially suited for applications that require both high current independently wired switches using Eaton NGR switches as well as those applications realizing the benefits of multiplexing. The E30 eSM is styled to match the Eaton NGR switch for a consistent look and feel to your dash panel. The E30 eSM also has the capability of having a separate input for key switch and dimmer control functions to increase the flexibility of the product to interface seamlessly to your vehicle. Customization of the E30 eSM is done by creating an application specific rocker with icons representing the function as well as by use of colored LEDs to highlight status. Two and three position as well as momentary or maintained circuits are identified using a sub-actuator to offer complete flexibility. Target Market Segments: Motor coach/bus Specialty vehicle Truck 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Product Selection Note: All products are custom ordered. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. Master 1 1 Expansion 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--March 2014 www.eaton.com V11-T1-7 1.2 Electronic Products E30 eSM--Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units 1 Technical Data and Specifications 1 E30 eSM Specifications 1 Description Power supply 1 Operating temperature Storage temperature 1 1 Switch life cycle 1 SAE J1455 Description Specification 12 Vdc regulated power, 1.5A Dust test (Non-operational) SAE J726 Course -40 to 85C Mechanical vibration 2gs from 10 to 2 kHz -40 to 85C Mechanical shock 30g Sealing IP42 Handling drop 1m, 3-axis Illumination Dependent or search lighting, customer defined LED color Load dump transient Table 4A and 4B Specification 250,000 cycles Over-voltage 48 Vdc for 5 mins Mechanical life 250,000 cycles Under-voltage 4 Vdc for 5 mins Radiated immunity 1 Radiated emissions SAE J1113/41, Class 2 Dimming 0-10 Vdc Analog Input (0 = 0% and 10V = 100% brightness) Connectors Delphi Micro VHT 15499927 Delphi Micro VHT 13513469 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -28 Vdc for 5 mins Electrical life 1 1 Reverse voltage SAE J1113/21, 100 v/m Power Supply Communication Message Contents A regulated 12 Vdc power supply capable of providing 1.5A should be connected to terminals 1, 5 and 6 of the six-pole connector of the master module only. All connected expansion modules receive their supply power from the master module. The communication to and from the master module is fully compliant to the SAE J1939/CAN 2.0b protocol. Status Diagnostics The LED indicators at the back of the modules show the status of the internal diagnostics as follows: Diagnostics Byte Status Byte 1 Master module status Byte 2 Expansion module 1 status Byte 3 Expansion module 2 status Byte 4 Expansion module 3 status Transmission Repetition Byte 5 Expansion module 4 status Description Specification Byte 6 Expansion module 5 status Transmission repetition rate 100 ms Byte 7 Expansion module 6 status Byte 8 Expansion module 7 status Data length 8 bytes Data page 0 PDU format PDU specific Default priority 5 Parameter group number 65440 The application-specific J1939 message parameters are as follows: 255 Within each status byte, the bits are assigned to the individual switches as follows: The two status bit pairs represent the switch state in the following manner: 160 Bit Switch Bit Switch Bit 8&7 Not defined 00 Switch in DOWN position Bit 5&6 Switch 1 status 01 Switch in MIDDLE position Bit 3&4 Switch 2 status 10 Switch in UP position Switch 3 status 11 Not defined Label Color Meaning 1 J1939 ACTIVE Red CANbus active 1 MODULE ACTIVE Amber Sub bus active Bit 1&2 1 SWITCH CHANGE Green Switch change where the switches are numbered as shown below. where the position assignment is as shown below. Switches Position Assignment 1 Rocker Position C B A 1 1 Switch 1 1 Switch 2 Switch 3 1 1 A = DOWN B = MIDDLE C = UP 1 V11-T1-8 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--March 2014 www.eaton.com 1.2 Electronic Products E30 eSM--Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units Wiring 1 The master unit is connected using six unshielded wires. The connection from the master to the first expansion module and between any consecutive expansion modules is made using four unshielded wires. 1 1 Expansion Module Master Module 1 J1939 ACTIVE MODULE ACTIVE MODULE ACTIVE SWITCH CHANGE 1 SWITCH CHANGE 1 1 Pin 4 3 2 1 Function Vcc out Ground Sub bus + Sub bus - Pin 6 5 4 3 2 1 Function Keyswitch Dimmer Ground J1939 + J1939 - +12 Vdc Master wiring: Six unshielded wires Pin 4 3 2 1 Function Vcc out Ground Sub bus + Sub bus - Pin 4 3 2 1 1 Function Vcc in Ground Sub bus + Sub bus - 1 1 1 Expansion wiring: Four unshielded wires 1 1 Dimensions 1 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Mounting Dimensions 1 E30 eSM Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units If you want to mount the modules in a panel, the opening in the panel should be rectangular, 2.835 in wide and 1.732 in high (72.00 mm wide and 44.00 mm high). 1 1 1.97 (50.0) The panel thickness should be between 0.039 and 0.157 in (1.00 and 4.00 mm). 1 1 2.99 (76.0) Panel Opening 1 0.47 (11.9) 0.10 (2.54) 1 1.734 (44.00) 1.85 (46.9) 1 1.22 (31.1) 1 1 2.835 (72.00) 1 2.82 (71.7) 1.70 (43.2) 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--March 2014 www.eaton.com V11-T1-9 1.3 1 Electronic Products E32 eSM--Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units Contents E32 eSM--Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units Description E32 eSM--Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 1 Page V11-T1-13 V11-T1-13 V11-T1-15 V11-T1-17 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Product Description Multiplexed Master Module using a LIN sub bus to communicate with up to seven expansion modules. Offering a high level of flexibility, the above-panel electronic multiplex switch module (E32 eSM) covers your wide range of switch and indicator applications using standard or custom graphics, as well as a full range of circuits and illumination options. The above-panel E32 eSM has top, center and bottom LED lighting with software that offers advanced circuit and lighting flexibility, including dimming and flashing options via J1939 CANbus communication. The indicator bar can be lighted with up to four separate colors to indicate operational status, vehicle mode and faults. All standard combinations of maintained and momentary switch actions, matching indicator caps and dummy plugs, along with the complementary styled SVR electromechanical rocker switch are available to complete the offering. Application Description Compared with electromechanical switches, multiplexed switch modules offer several advantages. Reduced assembly labor due to ease of installation, allowing for mounting and connection of three switches at one time versus individually Reduced wire harness complexity, using one harness to a controller to accommodate up to 24 switches and a three-wire interconnect between expansion and master modules Reduced harness size offers an overall reduction in weight, improving operational efficiency of the equipment Increase in switch lifecycle over traditional electromechanical switches (500k cycles) Target Market Segments This product is targeted at the bus/coach, truck and specialty vehicle markets. The product is especially suitable where a customer has "gangs" of switches mounted in a panel or dashboard, and expansion modules can be connected easily to a master module. On-road specialty vehicle EMS vehicles Street sweepers Recreational vehicles Motor coach/bus Refuse vehicles 1 1 1 V11-T1-10 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--March 2014 www.eaton.com Features and Benefits Fully compliant with J1939 CAN 2.0b messaging LED lighting in top, center and bottom positions Late point definition of circuit and rockers to reduce inventory and accommodate multiple application requirements 9-16 Vdc operating voltage 16-32 Vdc operating voltage IP53 degree of protection from the front Easy address assignment Immune to SAE J1455 and J1113 power disturbances Front panel removable for ease of maintenance Sleep mode available to reduce current draw on the battery Wake on switch change configurable Decorative-style rocker with matching indicator option available Colored rocker options CAN controlled digital logic output--500 mA 1.3 Electronic Products E32 eSM--Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units Product Selection 1 Note: All fully-assembled products are custom ordered. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. 1 1 1 Status Bar Icons 1 1 1 Modules Voltage Module Icon Lighting Status Bar Lighting Catalog Number 9-16V Master Amber Amber E321AAAAAAAAA01 Green Green E321GGGGGGGGG01 White Red, Amber, Green, Blue E321W4WW4WW4W01 Amber Amber E322AAAAAAAAA01 Expansion Indicator expansion 16-32V Master Expansion Indicator expansion Green Green E322GGGGGGGGG01 White Red, Amber, Green, Blue E322W4WW4WW4W01 Amber Amber E322AAAAAAAAAI7 Green Green E322GGGGGGGGGI7 White Red, Amber, Green, Blue E322W4WW4WW4WI7 Amber Amber E323AAAAAAAAA01 Green Green E323GGGGGGGGG01 White Red, Amber, Green, Blue E323W4WW4WW4W01 Amber Amber E324AAAAAAAAA01 Green Green E324GGGGGGGGG01 White Red, Amber, Green, Blue E324W4WW4WW4W01 Amber Amber E324AAAAAAAAAI7 Green Green E324GGGGGGGGGI7 White Red, Amber, Green, Blue E324W4WW4WW4WI7 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Accessories Rockers 1 Circuit Sub-Actuators Color Description Catalog Number Color Circuit (Up-Middle-Down) Black Full-throw actuator 53-7350 Black On On None 61-4043 Half-throw up actuator 53-7350-2 Red Momentary On None 61-4043-2 Half-throw down actuator 53-7350-3 Light blue On On On 61-4043-3 Full-throw actuator 53-7350-4 White Momentary On Momentary 61-4043-4 Half-throw up actuator 53-7350-5 Yellow Momentary On On 61-4043-5 Half-throw down actuator 53-7350-6 Gray On None On 61-4043-6 Red Black Catalog Number Indicator 53-7354 Pink Momentary None On 61-4043-7 Dummy plug 53-7354-2 Maroon None On On 61-4043-8 Panel plug 17-24241 Light purple None On Momentary 61-4043-9 Orange On On Momentary 61-4043-10 Green On None Momentary 61-4043-11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--March 2014 www.eaton.com V11-T1-11 1.3 1 1 Electronic Products E32 eSM--Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units Wiring Master Module Wire Harness The interconnection between master module and controller uses a simple four-wire harness with addressing specified by jumping between pins 6 to 9. An additional pin-out is provided for a 500 mA output if required. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Expansion Module Wire Harness Mating Connector Information Mating Connector Information Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Function VBAT (clamp 30) Ground CAN high CAN low 500 mA output Address 1 Address 2 Address 3 Address 4 No connect No connect No connect Pin 1 2 3 Function VBAT (clamp 30) Ground LIN sub bus Housing: ETN 28-6982 Amp/Tyco #1394048-1 ETN 49-7867 Amp/Tyco #2-1355524-3 1 1 1 Master Address Assignment Manufacturing Flexibility The master switch module address is set using jumpers in the wire harness to connect the following pins: E32 eSM offers a tremendous amount of flexibility including options for complete assemblies to be provided as well as late-point definable rocker and circuit. Individual components can be purchased independently and assembled to create any combination of circuits and icons which is especially suited for low volume/high mix applications minimizing inventory requirements. Rockers and indicators can also be laser-etched with custom icons by Eaton or other to accommodate application specific requirements. Contact your Eaton representative to discuss the Eaton solution further. Master Address Assignment Pin 1 2 3 Function VBAT (clamp 30) Ground LIN sub bus Pin 1 2 3 Function VBAT (clamp 30) Ground LIN sub bus Terminal Pins Connected Address 6-7 A1 1 6-8 A2 1 6-9 A3 7-8 A4 1 7-9 A5 8-9 A6 1 6-7, 8-9 A7 6-8, 7-9 A8 V11-T1-12 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--March 2014 www.eaton.com 1 1 1 Terminal: ETN 28-6983 Amp/Tyco #1-1718346-1 Coding A ETN 80-20608 Amp/Tyco #963715-1 1 1 The interconnection between modules uses a costeffective three-wire harness. This simplified wire harness reduces cost, weight and assembly labor for the enduser. 1 1 1 1 1 Electronic Products E32 eSM--Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units 1.3 Dimensions 1 Approximate Dimensions in mm 1 Mounting Instructions The modules are easily mounted with plastic retention clips. Modules are mounted in a single, space-saving cutout, reducing assembly time and accommodating up to three switches in a compact design. 1 The unit will accommodate 1.5 to 3 mm panel thickness. 1 1 1 1 Mounting Dimensions 61.4 0.2 1 38.2 Max. 1 1 37.6 0.3 41.0 0.3 1 1 1 3.90 4X 1 61.60 1 45 38.20 1 4X 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--March 2014 www.eaton.com V11-T1-13 1.4 1 Electronic Products E33 eSM--Sealed Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units E33 eSM--Sealed Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units Contents Description E33 eSM--Keypad Multiplexed Switch Module Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 1 Page V11-T1-22 V11-T1-22 V11-T1-22 V11-T1-23 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Product Description Sealed Multiplexed Master Module using a LIN sub bus to communicate with up to seven expansion modules. Eaton is pleased to introduce the newest line of multiplexed electronic Switch Modules (eSM), the E33 product line. The E33 eSM offers an increased level of flexibility over previous modules including: 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Application Description Compared with electromechanical switches, multiplexed switch modules offer several advantages. Fully sealed to IP68 from the front and rear Locking rocker options Palm guard option The E33 eSM offers a complete range of switch circuits as well as indicator options to meet all your control requirements. Similar to the E32 eSM product line, the E33 eSM includes individual icon lighting as well as a multi-color center indicator option allowing for steady state, flashing and dimming controlled via messaging. Additional flexibility is available by using the Eaton IP68 sealed SVR switch line for high-current, hard-wired applications in conjunction with our multiplexed solution. Reduced assembly labor due to ease of installation, allowing for mounting and connection of three switches at one time versus individually Reduced wire harness complexity, using one harness to a controller to accommodate up to 24 switches and a three-wire interconnect between expansion and master modules Reduced harness size offers an overall reduction in weight, improving operational efficiency of the equipment Increase in switch lifecycle over traditional electromechanical switches (500k cycles) Reduced connections resulting in less possible failure points Target Market Segments This product is targeted at harsh environment applications where a ruggedized product is needed to meet demanding requirements. Additionally, applications where there is concern over inadvertent switch actuation driving the need for guarding or locking features are also well-suited. Typical applications include: Construction equipment Agricultural equipment Specialty vehicle Material handling Emergency vehicle School and transit bus Contact your Eaton sales engineer for availability. V11-T1-14 1 1 Features and Benefits Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--March 2014 www.eaton.com Fully compliant with J1939 CAN 2.0b messaging IP68 degree of protection front and rear 9-32 Vdc rated Immune to SAE J1455 and J1113 power disturbances Top, bottom and full guard option available Locking rocker available Front panel removable for ease of maintenance Sleep mode available to reduce current draw on the battery Wake on switch change configurable LED lighting in top, centerindicator and bottom position Decorative style rocker with matching indicator option Late point definition of circuit and rockers to reduce inventory Diagnostics Electronic Products E33 eSM--Sealed Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units 1.4 Product Selection 1 Note: All fully-assembled products are custom ordered. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. 1 Wiring Master/Expansion Module Wire Harness Pin Numbers Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 Master VBATT Common CAN High CAN Low Common LIN Master = Black Expansion = Gray The interconnection between master module and controller uses a simple four-wire harness. Addressing of the master can be done by software or via address claim process. Interconnect wiring between master-expansion as well as expansionexpansion uses a three-wire harness. 1 Mating Connector Information Mating connector: Deutsch plug DT06-6S Wedge lock: W6S Socket contact: 0462-201-16141 (1.0-0.5 mm2 [16-20 AWG] Hole plug: 0413-217-1605 1 1 1 1 1 1 Expansion VBATT Common LIN LIN Common VBATT 1 1 1 Technical Data and Specifications 1 E33 eSM Specifications 1 Description Specification Operating temperature -40 to 85C Storage temperature -40 to 95C Operating voltage 9-32 Vdc Environmental sealing IP68 Mechanical shock 30g for 11 ms Mechanical vibration MIL-STD-202F/201A 2.0g random 1 1 1 1 Immunity to SAE J1455 and J1113 power disturbances 1 Communication Master SAE J1939 CAN 2.0b Expansion LIN 2.0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Contact your Eaton sales engineer for availability. Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--March 2014 www.eaton.com V11-T1-15 1.4 1 1 1 1 1 1 Electronic Products E33 eSM--Sealed Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Standard Cut-Out Serviceability The modules are easily mounted with plastic retention clips. Modules are mounted in a single, space-saving cutout reducing assembly time and accommodating up to three switches in a compact design. By modifying the standard cut-out to include the optional front panel removable slots shown below, the modules are easily serviceable from the front of the panel without further disassembly. 1 Standard Cut-Out 1 4X 0.13 (3.3) 1 1 1 1 Optional Panel Opening Features 2X 0.80 (20.4) 2.80 (71.1) 60 4X 2X 1.83 (46.4) 2X 0.17 (4.3) Optional Keying Feature Recommended Panel Opening Panel Thickness: 0.04-0.16 (1.0-4.0) 4X 0.17 (4.3) E33 eSM Sealed Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units 0.65 (16.4) 1 2.91 (74.0) 1 1 1.44 1.70 (36.5) (43.2) 1.87 (47.4) 1 1 1 1 1.75 (44.4) 1 1.12 (28.4) Max. 1 1 1.73 Depth with (44.0) Mating Connector E33 eSM Sealed Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units (Palm Guard Version) 1 0.83 (21.1) 1 1 1.89 (48.1) 1 1 1 Contact your Eaton sales engineer for availability. V11-T1-16 2X 0.50 (1.3) 1.45 (36.8) 1 1 Due to the E33's design allowing for late-point definition on assembly, both the actuator and circuit profile are serviceable as individual components. Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--March 2014 www.eaton.com 2X 1.70 (43.2) Optional Front Removal Slots 4X 1.5 Electronic Products eVu--Electronic Vehicle Display Contents eVu--Electronic Vehicle Display 1 Description eVu--Electronic Vehicle Display 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Product Description Application Description Features With a focus on communications, convenience and safety, Eaton is pleased to introduce eVU. Typical applications for information display include: Communication and Networking Designed for Easy Installation 1 eVU displays can interface with smart engines, controllers and equipment software via established J1939 and J1708 communication protocols. Some advancements in technology create installation obstacles. That isn't the case with eVU. The displays fit into the same cutouts as standard Eaton NGR rocker switches, 0.866 x 1.732 in (22.00 x 44.00 mm), making installation easy. The simplified architecture not only saves dash space, it also saves costs. 1 Rugged dashpanel displays simplify the viewing, selecting and inputting of key equipment/trip data. Working in sync with existing controllers and networks, the displays provide the driver with valuable feedback on vehicle status and performance. eVU displays offer a great deal of flexibility which can include: Internal warning/ alert buzzer Backlighted legend displays Sunlight readable LCD characters Internal power supply Analog or discrete switch inputs Up to 2.5 digit character display 8-segment bar graph Individual LED control So, what's the e for? Easy, electronic and evolutionary. eVU fills the gap (literally) between on-board systems and displays, ideal for applicationspecific functions. Temperature Pressure Speed Distance Capacity Transmission Warnings/alarms System information Safety eVU displays are easier to access than typical touch screens or soft-key applications. Keeping the dashboard displays within the driver's line of vision helps keep the driver and everyone else on the road safe. Additionally, the eVU displays are designed to meet SAE-1455 specification. What Do You Want to View? There are many types of eVU displays and they can be customized with various colors, resolutions and character configurations. Choose the functionality you want with the flexibility you need. In addition, eVU displays can receive input from analog transducers and sub-systems. Analog inputs can be either 0-20 mA or 0-10V. Additional input options exist for up to six logic states. 1 1 1 1 1 1 Product Selection Note: All products are custom ordered. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. 1 1 1 Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in mm [in] Mounting Instructions 1 Product is designed to mount in panels between 1 to 4 mm (0.039 to 0.157 in) thick. 1 eVu--Electronic Vehicle Display 1 26.0 [1.02] 2.7 [0.11] 44.04 [1.734] 50.0 [1.97] 22.02 [0.867] 50.0 [1.97] 1 1 1 1 Panel Opening 21.5 [0.85] Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--March 2014 www.eaton.com 1 V11-T1-17 Rockers NGR 2.1 Introduction Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2 SVR 2.4 2.6 2.7 2.10 2.12 V11-T2-56 V11-T2-57 V11-T2-64 V11-T2-65 V11-T2-67 V11-T2-68 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V11-T2-71 V11-T2-72 V11-T2-74 V11-T2-75 V11-T2-76 2 2 2 2 2 V11-T2-78 V11-T2-80 V11-T2-81 Symbol Library NGR, SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NGR Only Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 V11-T2-70 Technical Data Rocker, Toggle and Pushbuttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rocker Switch Circuit Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.14 V11-T2-50 Accessories Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13 V11-T2-49 8064/8065 ESPORT Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Icon/Legend Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ESPORT V11-T2-46 X Series Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X Series Symbols Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11 V11-T2-45 8004/8005--Euro Full Size Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EURO SR V11-T2-44 8006/8007--EURO SR Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9 V11-T2-43 Rockette Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8 V11-T2-34 1600/2600 Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rockette V11-T2-32 1500/2500 Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2 Dual Motion Safety Switch Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5 V11-T2-8 V11-T2-10 SVR Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2 NGR Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3 V11-T2-3 V11-T2-82 V11-T2-87 V11-T2-97 V11-T2-1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2.1 2 Rockers Introduction Rocker Switch Products Contents Description 2 Rocker Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NGR Rocker Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SVR--Sealed Vehicle Rockers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual Motion Safety Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1500/2500--Midsize AC Rated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1600/2600--Midsize AC Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rockette--General Purpose AC Rated . . . . . . . . . . 8006/8007--EURO SR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8004/8005--Euro Full Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X Series Rockers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8064/8065--ESPORT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Symbols Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V11-T2-2 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com V11-T2-3 V11-T2-8 V11-T2-32 V11-T2-43 V11-T2-45 V11-T2-49 V11-T2-56 V11-T2-64 V11-T2-67 V11-T2-70 V11-T2-74 V11-T2-78 V11-T2-80 V11-T2-82 Rockers Introduction 2.1 Rocker Selection Guide See Technical Data and Dimensions for more details. 2 Rocker Switches--Illuminated and Non-Illuminated 2 NGR SVR 2 2 2 2 2 2 Features Ratings 15A at 125 Vac, 10A at 250 Vac; 15A at 28 Vdc (14 Vdc rating) 12A at either 12 or 24 Vdc 2 Certifications RoHS, UL(R) Approvable RoHS, UL Approvable 2 Panel Opening Rectangular Octagonal 1.734 in (44.04 0.13 mm) 0.867 in (22.02 0.13 mm) 0.867 in (22.02 0.13 mm) 0.830 in (21.10 mm); 0.680 in (17.30 mm) 1.450 in (36.80 mm); 1.190 in (30.20 mm) 1.450 in (36.80 mm); 1.190 in (30.20 mm) -- -- -- -- 2 2 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Page V11-T2-10 Page V11-T2-34 Single- and two-pole length Single-pole width Two-pole width 2 2 Seal Top (internal) Bottom (internal) Panel 2 2 Actuator Rocker without bezel Rocker with bezel Paddle Snap-in lens Locking Label 2 2 Decorative Laser-etch Pad-print Poles Single Double Four 2 2 Termination Spade Solder Screw Weld lugs 2 2 Illumination Incandescent 6 Vdc Incandescent 12 Vdc Incandescent 14 Vdc Incandescent 18 Vdc Incandescent 24 Vdc Incandescent 28 Vdc Neon 110V Neon 125V Neon 250V 14V LED 28V LED Catalog Number Selection Technical Data Page V11-T2-16 Page V11-T2-36 Circuit Diagrams Page V11-T2-17 Page V11-T2-37 Dimensions Page V11-T2-30 Page V11-T2-38 Icon/Legend Symbols Library Page V11-T2-82 Page V11-T2-82 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V11-T2-3 2.1 2 2 Rockers Introduction See Technical Data and Dimensions for more details. Rocker Switches--Illuminated and Non-Illuminated, continued Dual Motion Safety Switch 1500/2500 Ratings 10A at 250 Vac, 15A at 125 Vac, 3/4 hp at 250 Vac Up to 22A at 125 Vac, 16A at 250 Vac Certifications UL, CSA(R), RoHS UL, CSA, ENEC, RoHS Panel Opening Octagonal Rectangular 1.450 in (36.80 mm); 1.190 in (30.20 mm) 0.830 in (21.10 mm); 0.680 in (17.20 mm) N/A 1.075 in (27.30 0.10 mm) 0.483 in (12.27 0.07 mm) 0.876 in (22.25 0.10 mm) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Catalog Number Selection Page V11-T2-44 Page V11-T2-46 Technical Data -- Page V11-T2-48 Circuit Diagrams -- Page V11-T2-80 Dimensions Page V11-T2-44 Page V11-T2-48 Icon/Legend Symbols Library -- Page V11-T2-55 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Features Single- and two-pole length Single-pole width Two-pole width Seal Top (internal) Bottom (internal) Panel Actuator Rocker without bezel Rocker with bezel Paddle Snap-in lens Locking Label Decorative Laser-etch Pad-print Poles Single Double Four Termination Spade Solder Screw Weld lugs Illumination Incandescent 6 Vdc Incandescent 12 Vdc Incandescent 14 Vdc Incandescent 18 Vdc Incandescent 24 Vdc Incandescent 28 Vdc Neon 110V Neon 125V Neon 250V 14V LED 28V LED 2 V11-T2-4 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com Rockers Introduction 2.1 See Technical Data and Dimensions for more details. 2 Rocker Switches--Illuminated and Non-Illuminated, continued 1600/2600 2 Rockette 2 2 2 2 2 2 Features Ratings Up to 22A at 125 Vac, 16A at 250 Vac Up to 15A at 125 Vac, 10A at 250 Vac, 3/4 hp at 250 Vac Certifications UL, CSA, ENEC, RoHS UL, CSA, RoHS Panel Opening Rectangular Octagonal 1.075 in (27.30 0.10 mm) 0.483 in (12.27 0.07 mm) 0.876 in (22.25 0.10 mm) 1.450 in (36.83 mm); 1.190 in (30.23 mm) 0.830 in (21.80 mm); 0.680 in (17.27 mm) 0.830 in (21.80 mm); 0.680 in (17.27 mm) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Catalog Number Selection Page V11-T2-50 Page V11-T2-57 Technical Data Page V11-T2-54 Page V11-T2-60 Circuit Diagrams Page V11-T2-80 Page V11-T2-80 Dimensions Page V11-T2-54 Page V11-T2-60 Icon/Legend Symbols Library Page V11-T2-55 -- Single- and two-pole length Single-pole width Two-pole width 2 2 2 2 Seal Top (internal) Bottom (internal) Panel 2 Actuator Rocker without bezel Rocker with bezel Paddle Snap-in lens Locking Label 2 2 2 Decorative Laser-etch Pad-print 2 2 Poles Single Double Four 2 2 Termination Spade Solder Screw Weld lugs 2 2 Illumination Incandescent 6 Vdc Incandescent 12 Vdc Incandescent 14 Vdc Incandescent 18 Vdc Incandescent 24 Vdc Incandescent 28 Vdc Neon 110V Neon 125V Neon 250V 14V LED 28V LED 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com V11-T2-5 2.1 2 2 Rockers Introduction See Technical Data and Dimensions for more details. Rocker Switches--Illuminated and Non-Illuminated, continued 8006/8007 8004/8005 Ratings 10A at 250 Vac, 15A at 125 Vac, 3/4 hp at 250 Vac, recommended up to 15A at 28 Vdc 10A at 250 Vac, 15A at 125 Vac, 3/4 hp at 250 Vac, recommended up to 15A at 28 Vdc Certifications UL(CUR), RoHS UL(CUR), RoHS Panel Opening Octagonal Rectangular 1.450 in (36.85 mm); 1.190 in (30.23 mm) 0.830 in (21.08 mm); 0.680 in (17.27 mm) 0.830 in (21.08 mm); 0.680 in (17.27 mm) 1.734 in (44.04 0.13 mm) 0.867 in (22.02 0.13 mm) 0.867 in (22.02 0.13 mm) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Catalog Number Selection Page V11-T2-65 Page V11-T2-68 Technical Data Page V11-T2-66 Page V11-T2-69 2 Circuit Diagrams Page V11-T2-80 Page V11-T2-80 Dimensions Page V11-T2-66 Page V11-T2-69 2 Icon/Legend Symbols Library -- -- 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Features Single- and two-pole length Single-pole width Two-pole width Seal Top (internal) Bottom (internal) Panel Actuator Rocker without bezel Rocker with bezel Paddle Snap-in lens Locking Label Decorative Laser-etch Pad-print Poles Single Double Four Termination Spade Solder Screw Weld lugs Illumination Incandescent 6 Vdc Incandescent 12 Vdc Incandescent 14 Vdc Incandescent 18 Vdc Incandescent 24 Vdc Incandescent 28 Vdc Neon 110V Neon 125V Neon 250V 14V LED 28V LED 2 V11-T2-6 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com Rockers Introduction 2.1 See Technical Data and Dimensions for more details. 2 Rocker Switches--Illuminated and Non-Illuminated, continued X Series 2 8064/8065 2 2 2 2 Features 2 Ratings 16A 125V, 10A 277V, 3/4 hp 277V Recommended 21A 14 Vdc or 10A 28 Vdc 10A at 250 Vac, 15A at 125 Vac, 3/4 hp at 250 Vac, recommended up to 15A at 28 Vdc Certifications UL(CUR); RoHS, T85 UL(CUR); RoHS Panel Opening Rectangular Rectangular 2 1.46 in (37.00 0.1 mm) 0.83 in (21.20 0.1 mm) 0.83 in (21.20 0.1 mm) 1.734 in (44.04 0.13 mm) 0.867 in (22.02 0.13 mm) 0.867 in (22.02 0.13 mm) 2 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 2 -- -- -- -- 2 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Catalog Number Selection Page V11-T2-71 Page V11-T2-75 Technical Data Page V11-T2-72 Page V11-T2-76 Circuit Diagrams Page V11-T2-72 (Light Diagrams) Page V11-T2-80 Dimensions Page V11-T2-73 Page V11-T2-77 Icon/Legend Symbols Library Page V11-T2-72 Page V11-T2-76 Single- and two-pole length Single-pole width Two-pole width 2 2 Seal Top (internal) Bottom (internal) Panel 2 2 Actuator Rocker without bezel Rocker with bezel Paddle Snap-in lens Locking Label 2 2 2 Decorative Laser-etch Pad-print 2 Poles Single Double Four 2 Termination Spade Solder Screw Weld lugs 2 Illumination Incandescent 6 Vdc Incandescent 12 Vdc Incandescent 14 Vdc Incandescent 18 Vdc Incandescent 24 Vdc Incandescent 28 Vdc Neon 110V Neon 125V Neon 250V 14V LED 28V LED 125V LED 277V LED Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V11-T2-7 2.2 2 Rockers NGR Rocker Switches Contents NGR Rocker Switches Description 2 Page NGR Rocker Switches Switch Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rocker Buttons/Actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lens Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NGR Complete Indicators and Indicator Caps . NGR Indicator Base and Indicator Caps . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Standard Circuit Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2 2 2 V11-T2-10 V11-T2-11 V11-T2-13 V11-T2-14 V11-T2-15 V11-T2-16 V11-T2-17 V11-T2-30 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Product Description Features Eaton presents its NGR Rocker Switches. This fieldproven line of full-sized rocker switches, initially developed for the heavy truck industry, is now found in a variety of vehicle-related applications. Sealing Standard switch provides splash and dust resistance to IP42. The sealed version is sealed to IP67 when supplied with panel seal. Rocker The standard actuator for the NGR is a clean, Europeanstyled, two-face rocker made of high-quality thermoplastic material. The rocker is replaceable and snaps on and off the switch. Both the rocker and the bezel are supplied with an aesthetically pleasing matte finish. Different colors are also available, but black is standard. Rockers can be ordered separately. The NGR offers both European styling and ergonomic design while still providing the solid durability that you have come to expect from Eaton switches. Illuminated and nonilluminated versions with either incandescent bulbs or LEDs are available in either dependent or independent circuits and in a variety of popular switching circuits. Lighting Each switch is capable of accommodating two incandescent light bulbs or LEDs for lighting purposes. A lamp or LED can be located at either end of the switch and oriented to be circuit dependent or independent. The incandescent bulbs are front replaceable. Two lamp or LED voltages, 14 Vdc and 28 Vdc, are standard. For additional voltages or colors, consult your local Eaton Sales Representative. The NGR also offers a variety of rocker buttons and indicators with laser-etched or pad-printed icons, insertable lenses and adhesive-backed labels. 2 2 2 2 2 2 V11-T2-8 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com Standards and Certifications Approvable under stringent UL and CSA standards For information, contact your local Eaton Sales Representative RoHS Compliant 1 Note 1 Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for the most up-to-date list of verified part numbers. Rockers NGR Rocker Switches Options Circuits 1PST, 1PDT, 2PST and 2PDT Maintained and momentary action Common lamp ground jumper for dual lamp units Multiple LEDs for daylight readability Additional colors of rockers, mounting bezels and lenses are available Special circuits Special ratings Pad-printed legends on lens, rocker and bezel Special lamps and lamp voltages Dry circuit capabilities Custom back-lit legends available Reversing jumpers (internal) Gang mounting system, see Page V11-T2-79 Locking rocker with locking feature in UP and/or DOWN positions Indicators with laseretched or insertable lenses, or adhesive labels IP67 rated sealed switch Polarized lock-on connectors, see Page V11-T2-78 28-5637-2 for Packard terminals 28-5940 for AMP terminals Panel plug 17-21543 Replacement bulb catalog number 14V: 28-5901 28V: 28-5909 For more information on additional options, contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. 2.2 Legends Flexible Ordering System Two legend areas are provided on the ends of each rocker of sufficient size to accommodate two lines consisting of four Helvetica Narrow 12-point characters. Legends may be nonilluminated or illuminated. The NGR offers three styles of illuminated legends. You can order assembled switches or the switch base and actuator separately. Use the final code in the switch base catalog number, Page V11-T2-10, to denote assembly instructions. 2 2 2 2 2 2 Single-piece back-lit--Backlighting is a high-quality automotive/truck industry technique. The legend can appear daylight white or dead-front when nonilluminated but, depending on the back-lit color chosen, will change color when illuminated. Examples of standard back-lit legends are found on Pages V11-T2-82 to V11-T2-96. 2 2 2 2 2 2 Snap-in lenses--This rocker will have either one or two snap-in lenses in the legend areas. Legends are typically pad-printed on the lens in black or white. Snap-in lenses are available in six standard colors and can be ordered separately. 2 2 2 2 Label rocker--This rocker has a one-piece adhesivebacked label inserted into a recessed area on the face of the button. Legends can be done in several colors and be illuminated or non-illuminated. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative for suggested sources. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com V11-T2-9 2.2 2 Rocker and Paddle Frame Rockers NGR Rocker Switches Full Palm Guard Switch Base Panel Seal and Internal Seal 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 To order rocker and switch base assembled, contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. To order rocker buttons, see Page V11-T2-11. To order lenses, see Page V11-T2-13. To order indicator caps, see Page V11-T2-15. For a complete indicator, see Page V11-T2-14. Catalog Number Selection How To Order--Switch Base To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base prefix and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers. 2 2 2 2 2 Example: Switch Series (Unsealed) NGR = Switch base Circuit 1 1501 = Circuit See Pages V11-T2-17 to V11-T2-29. 2 2 NGR Frame Style 1 = Rocker and paddle frame 2 = Palm guard (top) 3 = Palm guard (bottom) 4 = Full palm guard (top/bottom) S = Panel seal and internal seal G = Locking rocker 2 D = Locking rocker 3 F = Locking rocker 4 T = Internal seal 1501 Frame Color B = Black Switch Contact Plating 5 N = Standard T = High rated G = Gold 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 4 B N A 0 "A" Lamp Type and Color 0 = No lamp A = 14 Vdc incand./clear 6 B = 24 Vdc incand./clear 6 C = 28V LED/red 8 D = 28V LED/green 8 E = 28V LED/amber 8 R = 14V LED/red G = 14V LED/green Y = 14V LED/amber K = 28V LED/red 7 L = 28V LED/green 7 T = 28V LED/amber 7 W = 28V LED/white 7 X = 28V LED/blue 7 H = 14V LED/high intensity red J = 14V LED/high intensity green P = 14V LED/high intensity amber M = 14V LED/high intensity blue N "B" Lamp Type and Color 0 = No lamp A = 14 Vdc incand./clear 6 B = 24 Vdc incand./clear 6 C = 28V LED/red 8 D = 28V LED/green 8 E = 28V LED/amber 8 R = 14V LED/red G = 14V LED/green Y = 14V LED/amber K = 28V LED/red 7 L = 28V LED/green 7 T = 28V LED/amber 7 W = 28V LED/white 7 X = 28V LED/blue 7 H = 14V LED/high intensity red J = 14V LED/high intensity green P = 14V LED/high intensity amber M = 14V LED/high intensity blue Notes 1 Circuits show lighting options available. See Pages V11-T2-17 to V11-T2-29. 2 Locks in DOWN position. 3 Locks in UP and DOWN positions. 4 Locks in UP position. 5 Switch contact construction plating-- N = Standard: Recommended for use on loads up to 12 amps at 14 Vdc. T = High Rated: Recommended for use on loads greater than 12 amps at 14 Vdc. G = Gold: Recommended for use on dry circuit/low level switching. 6 Replaceable. 7 Replaceable/wedge base LED. 8 PCB version LED. 2 2 2 2 2 V11-T2-10 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com Rocker Assembled N = No 2.2 Rockers NGR Rocker Switches Two-Face Rocker, No Lens Two-Face Rocker, Snap-In Lens Rocker Buttons/Actuators Decorative Decorative Rocker, Paddle, Back-Lit Back-Lit Locking Rocker 2 Label Rocker 2 2 2 2 Catalog Number Selection 2 How To Order--Rocker Buttons/Actuators 2 To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate button type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers. Example: Rocker Button Type 1 = Two-face, no lens rocker 2 = Two-face, snap-in lens rocker 3 = Decorative rocker, back-lit 4 = Decorative paddle, back-lit 5 = Locking rocker 6 = Label rocker Icon/Lens/Hole Location A = "A" only B = "B" only C = "A" and "B" D = No icon/lens/hole 3 C AF A 1 B AE C 4 A 3 Icon "A" Code AF = Unlock See Symbols Library on Pages V11-T2-82 to V11-T2-96. Icon "B" Code AE = Lock See Symbols Library on Pages V11-T2-82 to V11-T2-96. Icon "A" Orientation A = Standard orientation B = 90 clockwise C = 180 clockwise D = 270 clockwise 0 = No icon; no orientation Icon "B" Orientation A = Standard orientation B = 90 clockwise C = 180 clockwise D = 270 clockwise 0 = No icon; no orientation Icon "A" Color 0 = No icon; no color 1 = Daylight white 1 2 = Deadfront 1 3 = White 2 4 = Black 2 5 = Lens hole (no lens) Icon "B" Color 0 = No icon; no color 1 = Daylight white 1 2 = Deadfront 1 3 = White 2 4 = Black 2 5 = Lens hole (no lens) Icon "A" Lighted Color or Lens Color A = Red B = Green C = Amber E = Blue F = White G = Clear 0 = Non-lighted or no lens Icon "B" Lighted Color or Lens Color A = Red B = Green C = Amber E = Blue F = White G = Clear 0 = Non-lighted or no lens Indicator Stripe Location 1 = "A" Position 2 = "B" Position 3 = "A" and "B" Positions 0 = No stripe 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 Decorative rocker only. 2 Two-face rocker only. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com V11-T2-11 2.2 2 Rockers NGR Rocker Switches Icon Location Examples Icon Orientation Examples Location A Location C Orientation A Orientation C Rocker with Icon in "A" Position (Code A) Rocker with Icon in "C" Position (Code C) Rocker with Standard Orientation (Code A) Rocker with Icon at 180 Clockwise (Code C) Location B Orientation B Orientation D Rocker with Icon in "B" Position (Code B) Rocker with Icon at 90 Clockwise (Code B) Rocker with Icon at 270 Clockwise (Code D) 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V11-T2-12 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com Rockers NGR Rocker Switches Translucent Lens Transparent Lens 2.2 Lens Selection 2 For NGR Rocker Type "2" and Indicator Type "2CAP" only. 2 2 2 2 2 Catalog Number Selection 2 How To Order--Translucent Lenses 12 To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base prefix and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers. Example: Lens Color Red Green Amber Blue White 4 Base Catalog Number 28-5863-2 28-5863 28-5863-3 28-5863-9 28-5863-8 28-5863-2 AF 2 A 2 Orientation Style Code A = Standard orientation B = Rotated 90 clockwise C = Inverted 180 D = Rotated 270 clockwise Icon Code AF = Unlock See Symbols Library on Pages V11-T2-82 to V11-T2-96. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 How To Order--Transparent Lenses 12 To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base prefix and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers. Example: Lens Color Red Green Amber Blue Clear 4 Base Catalog Number 28-5863-5 28-5863-4 28-5863-6 28-5863-10 28-5863-7 28-5863-5 AF Icon Code AF = Unlock See Symbols Library on Pages V11-T2-82 to V11-T2-96. A 2 2 2 Orientation Style Code A = Standard orientation B = Rotated 90 clockwise C = Inverted 180 D = Rotated 270 clockwise 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 When ordering a lens with an icon for the code B (bottom) position, specify code C orientation. 2 Standard lens type. 3 Non-standard lens type. 4 Standard pad print for white and clear lens is black. Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com 2 2 V11-T2-13 2.2 2 Rockers NGR Rocker Switches NGR Complete Indicators and Indicator Caps Complete Indicator and Indicator Cap Assembled To order rocker buttons, see Page V11-T2-11. To order lenses, see Page V11-T2-13. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Catalog Number Selection How To Order--Complete Indicator To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate indicator type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers. 2 2 2 2 Example: Indicator Type 2N = Two-face, snap-in lens 3N = Laser-etched 6N = Label 2N C AA R Icon/Lens/Hole Location A = "A" icon only B = "B" icon only C = "A" and "B" icons D = No icon/lens/hole 1 B AB Icon "A" Code AA = Horn See Symbols Library on Pages V11-T2-82 to V11-T2-96. Lamp/LED Type and Color A = 14 Vdc incand./clear B = 28 Vdc incand./clear 0 = No lamp/LED R = 14V LED/red G = 14V LED/green Y = 14V LED/amber K = 28V LED/red L = 28V LED/green T = 28V LED/amber H = 14V LED/high intensity red J = 14V LED/high intensity green P = 14V LED/high intensity amber M = 14V LED/high intensity blue 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 A 0 A Icon "B" Code AB = Battery See Symbols Library on Pages V11-T2-82 to V11-T2-96. Lamp/LED Type and Color A = 14 Vdc incand./clear B = 28 Vdc incand./clear 0 = No lamp/LED R = 14V LED/red G = 14V LED/green Y = 14V LED/amber K = 28V LED/red L = 28V LED/green T = 28V LED/amber H = 14V LED/high intensity red J = 14V LED/high intensity green P = 14V LED/high intensity amber M = 14V LED/high intensity blue Icon "A" Color 0 = No icon; no color 1 = Daylight white 1 2 = Deadfront 1 3 = White 2 4 = Black 2 5 = Lens hole (no lens) Icon "B" Color 0 = No icon; no color 1 = Daylight white 1 2 = Deadfront 1 3 = White 2 4 = Black 2 5 = Lens hole (no lens) Icon "A" Lighted Color or Lens Color A = Red B = Green C = Amber E = Blue F = White G = Clear 0 = Non-lighted or no lens Icon "B" Lighted Color or Lens Color A = Red B = Green C = Amber E = Blue F = White G = Clear 0 = Non-lighted or no lens 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 Decorative rocker only. 2 Two-face rocker only. 2 2 V11-T2-14 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com Rockers NGR Rocker Switches Indicator Base 2.2 NGR Indicator Base and Indicator Caps Indicator Cap 2 To order rocker buttons, see Page V11-T2-11. To order lenses, see Page V11-T2-13. To order complete indicator, see Page V11-T2-14. 2 2 2 2 2 Catalog Number Selection 2 How To Order--Indicator Base To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base prefix and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers. Example: NGRIND A "A" Lamp Type and Color 0 = No lamp A = 14 Vdc incand./clear B = 24 Vdc incand./clear R = 14V LED/red G = 14V LED/green Y = 14V LED/amber K = 28V LED/red L = 28V LED/green T = 28V LED/amber X = 28V LED/blue H = 14V LED/high intensity red J = 14V LED/high intensity green P = 14V LED/high intensity amber M = 14V LED/high intensity blue Switch Series (Unsealed) NGRIND = Indicator base 0 2 N "B" Lamp Type and Color 0 = No lamp A = 14 Vdc incand./clear B = 24 Vdc incand./clear R = 14V LED/red G = 14V LED/green Y = 14V LED/amber K = 28V LED/red L = 28V LED/green T = 28V LED/amber X = 28V LED/blue H = 14V LED/high intensity red J = 14V LED/high intensity green P = 14V LED/high intensity amber M = 14V LED/high intensity blue 2 Rocker Assembled 2 N = No 2 2 2 2 2 2 How To Order--Indicator Cap To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate indicator type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers. Example: Indicator Type 2CAP = Two-face, snap-in lens 3CAP = Decorative/ laser-etched 6CAP = Label 2 2CAP Icon/Lens/Hole Location A = "A" icon only B = "B" icon only C = "A" and "B" icons D = No icon/lens/hole C AB 1 B Icon "A" Code AB = Battery See Symbols Library on Pages V11-T2-82 to V11-T2-96. AH 0 A 2 2 Icon "B" Code AH = Fuel See Symbols Library on Pages V11-T2-82 to V11-T2-96. Icon "A" Color 0 = No icon; no color 1 = Daylight white 1 2 = Deadfront 1 3 = White 2 4 = Black 2 5 = Lens hole (no lens) Icon "B" Color 0 = No icon; no color 1 = Daylight white 1 2 = Deadfront 1 3 = White 2 4 = Black 2 5 = Lens hole (no lens) Icon "A" Lighted Color or Lens Color E = Blue A = Red F = White B = Green G = Clear C = Amber 0 = Non-lighted or no lens Icon "B" Lighted Color or Lens Color A = Red E = Blue B = Green F = White C = Amber G = Clear 0 = Non-lighted or no lens 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 Decorative rocker only. 2 Two-face rocker only. 2 2 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com V11-T2-15 2.2 Rockers NGR Rocker Switches 2 Technical Data and Specifications 2 NGR Rocker Switches 2 2 2 2 Description Ratings 1 Specification 15A at 125 Vac, 10A at 250 Vac 15A at 28 Vdc (14 Vdc rating) Approvable under stringent UL and CSA standards Contact mechanism Slow-make/slow-break contact mechanism Butt action contact mechanism designed specifically for use on AC and low voltage DC applications Contact material-- Standard construction Movable--copper alloy with silver alloy contact face button Stationary--silver-plated copper alloy with silver alloy contact face button Mechanical life 250,000 operations, minimum 2 Electrical life 200,000 operations, minimum Terminal type Standard 0.25 in (6.35 mm) spade, silver-plated copper alloy 2 Base material High-grade thermoplastic molding material Dielectric 1000V rms, minimum 2 Mounting means Snap-in mounting with plastic bezel 2 Mounting hole Rectangular panel cutout 1.734 x 0.867 in (44 x 22 mm) Panel thickness 0.040 to 0.156 in (1.0 to 4.0 mm) 2 3 2 2 2 2 IP rating Standard IP42; sealed option IP67 Operating temperature range -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C) Notes 1 For information, contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. 2 Best results obtained between 0.060 and 0.118 in (1.5 and 3.0 mm). 3 On sealed versions, recommended panel thickness between 0.079 and 0.118 in (2.0 and 3.0 mm). 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V11-T2-16 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com 2.2 Rockers NGR Rocker Switches Standard Circuit Diagrams Single-Pole 2 Two-Pole Circuit with Rocker In ... DOWN Position Schematic Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position) 1001 OFF 9 UP Position ON 2001 9 4 1 6 2B 7 8 9 10 1501 -- OFF 3 8 9 10 1502 -- OFF NONE -- 5B -- OFF 9 NONE 2B 1504 -- OFF 9 NONE ON 5B 7 8 9 10 1505 -- OFF 2B 7 8 9 10 1506 -- OFF NONE 2B 7 1507 -- NONE 9 10 9 -- 1508 -- NONE 2B 10 9 -- 8 -- 2B-3 2 2 2 2 2 NONE ON -- -- 2B-3-10 5B-6 OFF NONE ON -- -- 2B-3 5B-6 2 OFF NONE ON 2 -- -- 2B-3 5B-6 2 OFF NONE ON 2 -- -- 2B-3-9 5B-6 OFF NONE ON -- -- 2B-3-10 5B-6 OFF NONE ON -- -- 2B-3-9-1 5B-6 OFF NONE ON -- -- 2B-3 5B-6 2 2 2 2 10 5B 2 OFF 4 1 6 2B 7 2B-3-9 5B-6 8 3 5B 5B 2508 4 1 6 -- 10 2B-3-9-10 ON -- 4 1 6 7 OFF 9 5B 2507 8 ON 8 3 5B 7 NONE 4 1 6 2B 4 1 6 2B 8 2506 10 9 5B 7 2B-3-10 ON OFF 2 2 4 1 6 7 OFF 3 10 2B 8 2B 9 2505 3 -- 5B 5B 8 2B-3-9 ON 2B-3 5B-6 4 1 6 7 4 1 6 3 10 3 -- 5B 2B 9 2504 2B-3 ON 5B 8 4 1 6 3 NONE -- 10 3 -- -- 4 1 6 7 4 ON 8 2B-3 10 1 6 5B 2503 8 NONE 4 1 6 9 -- 5B 2B 10 3 7 3 9 2502 10 2B 8 4 1 6 5B 7 2B-3-10 ON OFF 4 1 6 7 1503 3 10 2B 8 2B 9 2501 3 7 3 8 2B-3-9 ON 5B 7 4 1 6 2B ON UP Position 4 1 6 2B 3 -- 5B 7 3 2B-3 4 1 6 2B NONE CENTER Position 10 3 -- 5B DOWN Position Schematic Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position) 10 3 7 NONE 2 Circuit with Rocker In ... CENTER Position 8 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com V11-T2-17 2.2 2 2 2 2 Rockers NGR Rocker Switches Single-Pole 1002 OFF 9 8 9 10 OFF 3 8 9 10 1522 OFF 8 9 10 1523 OFF 2 1524 2 2 OFF 8 9 10 OFF MOM. ON -- NONE -- 7 8 9 10 OFF 2 3 8 9 10 2523 -- NONE 8 9 10 2524 -- NONE 8 9 10 2525 8 -- 5B 7 8 9 10 2526 5B 7 8 9 10 2528 5B 8 2 2 2 2 2 V11-T2-18 OFF NONE MOM. ON -- -- 2B-3-9 5B-6 OFF NONE MOM. ON -- -- 2B-3-10 5B-6 OFF NONE MOM. ON -- -- 2B-3 5B-6 OFF NONE MOM. ON -- -- 2B-3 5B-6 OFF NONE MOM. ON -- -- 2B-3-9 5B-6 OFF NONE MOM. ON -- -- 2B-3-10 5B-6 OFF NONE MOM. ON -- -- 2B-3 5B-6 4 1 6 2B 7 2B-3 5B-6 4 1 6 2B 2B-3 -- 4 1 6 2B 3 -- 5B 5B 7 2B-3-10 MOM. ON -- 4 1 6 2B 2B-3-9 MOM. ON 5B 7 2B-3 MOM. ON MOM. ON 4 1 6 2B 4 1 6 2B 7 NONE 5B 7 2B-3 MOM. ON NONE 4 1 6 2B 3 -- 5B 1528 2 NONE 2B-3-10 4 1 6 2B 10 3 -- 5B 7 3 9 4 1 6 1526 2 -- 10 2B 8 2522 8 9 2 MOM. ON 5B 7 3 -- 5B 1525 2 NONE OFF 4 1 6 2B 4 1 6 3 10 2B-3-9 10 7 2 2 OFF 9 2B 9 2521 8 3 8 3 -- 5B 7 2 -- 5B 7 4 1 6 2B MOM. ON UP Position 4 1 6 2B 3 -- 5B 7 3 2B-3 4 1 6 2B NONE CENTER Position 10 3 -- 5B 7 3 -- 4 1 6 2B 2 2 2002 3 7 2 2 MOM. ON DOWN Position Schematic Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position) 9 -- 5B 1521 2 NONE UP Position 4 1 6 2B 2 Circuit with Rocker In ... CENTER Position 10 3 2 2 DOWN Position Schematic Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position) 2 2 Two-Pole Circuit with Rocker In ... Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com 2.2 Rockers NGR Rocker Switches Single-Pole Two-Pole Circuit with Rocker In ... DOWN Position Schematic Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position) ON NONE ON 2003 2B-1 8 9 10 1541 ON 5B 8 9 10 1542 ON NONE 8 9 10 1543 ON 2B-3-9 ON -- NONE 2B 7 1544 -- ON 2B-1 -- 2B-3 ON NONE ON 9 2544 7 2545 10 9 4 1 6 2B-1 5B 8 9 10 1546 ON NONE ON 7 8 9 10 1547 ON -- NONE 2B 10 -- 1548 9 7 8 9 10 2547 2B-3-9 NONE ON 10 2548 9 2B-1 8 5B 8 -- ON 2 2B-1 5B-4 -- 2B-3-9 5B-6 ON NONE ON 2B-1 5B-4 -- 2B-3-10 5B-6 ON NONE ON 2B-1 5B-4 -- 2B-3 5B-6 ON NONE ON 2B-1 5B-4 -- 2B-3 5B-6 2 ON NONE ON 2 2B-1 5B-4 -- 2B-3-9 5B-6 2 ON NONE ON 2 2B-1 5B-4 -- 2B-3-10 5B-6 ON NONE ON 2B-1-10 5B-4 -- 2B-3-9 5B-6 ON NONE ON 2B-3 2B-1 5B-4 -- 2B-3 5B-6 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 4 1 6 2B 7 2 2 10 3 5B NONE 4 1 6 2B 4 1 6 5B 7 ON ON 4 1 6 2B 8 2B 9 2546 3 2B-1-10 5B 7 3 8 4 1 6 5B 7 2B-3-10 ON 2 4 1 6 3 2B-1 5B 2B 2B-3-9 4 1 6 3 -- 2B-3 5B-6 10 3 7 2B 8 3 1545 5B 7 NONE -- 4 1 6 2B 8 3 10 2B 5B 7 2B 9 2543 10 3 8 4 1 6 5B 7 2B-3 ON 2B-1 5B-4 4 1 6 9 9 2B 10 2B 8 3 9 2542 3 2B-1 5B 5B 8 2B-3-10 ON ON 4 1 6 7 4 1 6 2B 10 3 2B-1 5B 7 3 9 2541 4 1 6 2B -- 5B 8 3 2B-1 7 3 ON 2B 7 4 1 6 2B NONE 2B-3 2 NONE 4 1 6 2 ON 10 3 -- UP Position 4 5B 7 CENTER Position 10 3 8 2B 9 4 1 6 DOWN Position Schematic Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position) 10 3 7 UP Position 1 6 9 CENTER Position 5B 1003 2 Circuit with Rocker In ... 5B 8 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com V11-T2-19 2.2 2 2 2 2 Two-Pole Circuit with Rocker In ... 1004 ON 9 2 2 8 9 10 ON 3 8 9 10 1562 ON 8 9 10 1563 ON 2 10 ON 8 9 10 ON 7 8 9 10 ON 3 2 8 9 10 1567 ON 3 2 2 8 9 10 1568 ON 3 7 2 OFF 2B-3-10 ON -- OFF -- OFF 8 9 10 2563 -- OFF -- OFF 8 9 10 2564 -- OFF 8 9 10 2565 1 6 2B 8 -- 8 9 10 2566 1 6 2B 8 9 10 2567 1 6 2B 8 9 10 2568 1 6 2B OFF ON 2B-1 5B-4 -- 2B-3-9 5B-6 ON OFF ON 2B-1 5B-4 -- 2B-3-10 5B-6 ON OFF ON 2B-1 5B-4 -- 2B-3 5B-6 ON OFF ON 2B-1 5B-4 -- 2B-3 5B-6 ON OFF ON 2B-1 5B-4 -- 2B-3-9 5B-6 ON OFF ON 2B-1 5B-4 -- 2B-3-10 5B-6 ON OFF ON 2B-1-10 5B-4 -- 2B-3-9 5B-6 ON OFF ON 2B-1 5B-4 -- 2B-3 5B-6 4 5B 8 2 2 V11-T2-20 ON 4 5B 7 7 2B-3 5B-6 4 5B 7 2B-3 -- 4 5B 7 3 2B-1 5B 5B 7 2B-3-9 ON 2B-1 5B-4 4 1 6 2B 2B-3-10 ON 5B 7 2B-3-9 ON ON 4 1 6 2B 2B-3 ON 5B 7 2B-3 ON OFF 4 1 6 2B 4 1 6 2B 10 3 2B-1-10 5B 7 2 9 2562 4 1 6 2B 8 3 2B-1 5B 7 2 -- 5B 7 4 1 6 2B ON ON 4 1 6 2B 3 2B-1 5B 1566 2 OFF 2B-3-9 4 1 6 2B 10 3 2B-1 5B 7 3 9 2561 4 1 6 1565 2 2 9 1564 2 2 8 2B 8 3 2B-1 5B 7 3 -- 5B 7 4 1 6 2B ON UP Position 4 1 6 2B 3 2B-1 5B 7 3 2B-3 4 1 6 2B OFF CENTER Position 10 3 2B-1 5B 7 3 -- 4 1 6 2B 2 2004 3 7 2 ON DOWN Position Schematic Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position) 9 2B-1 5B 1561 2 OFF UP Position 4 1 6 2B 2 Circuit with Rocker In ... CENTER Position 10 3 2 2 DOWN Position Schematic Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position) 2 2 NGR Rocker Switches Single-Pole 2 2 Rockers Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com 2.2 Rockers NGR Rocker Switches Single-Pole Two-Pole Circuit with Rocker In ... DOWN Position Schematic Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position) 1005 MOM. ON 9 UP Position MOM. ON 2005 2B-1 7 8 9 10 1581 MOM. ON 3 5B 8 9 10 1582 MOM. ON 8 9 10 1583 MOM. ON OFF 2B-3-9 MOM. ON -- OFF 1584 9 -- 9 2B-3 OFF MOM. ON -- OFF 2584 5B 8 9 10 1586 MOM. ON 2585 OFF MOM. ON 7 8 9 10 1587 MOM. ON -- OFF 2B 9 10 2586 -- 1588 7 8 9 10 2B-3-9 OFF MOM. ON 10 8 9 2B-1 8 -- 2B-3 2 2B-1 5B-4 -- 2B-3-9 5B-6 MOM. ON OFF MOM. ON 2B-1 5B-4 -- 2B-3-10 5B-6 MOM. ON OFF MOM. ON 2B-1 5B-4 -- 2B-3 5B-6 MOM. ON OFF MOM. ON 2B-1 5B-4 -- 2B-3 5B-6 2 MOM. ON OFF MOM. ON 2 2B-1 5B-4 -- 2B-3-9 5B-6 2 MOM. ON OFF MOM. ON 2 2B-1 5B-4 -- 2B-3-10 5B-6 MOM. ON OFF MOM. ON 2B-1-10 5B-4 -- 2B-3-9 5B-6 MOM. ON OFF MOM. ON 5B 8 2B-1 5B-4 -- 2B-3 5B-6 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 4 1 6 2B 7 MOM. ON 10 3 5B 5B 2588 4 1 6 OFF 4 1 6 2B 7 MOM. ON 9 5B 2587 8 MOM. ON 4 1 6 2B 3 2B-1-10 5B 7 2B 8 4 1 6 5B 7 2B-3-10 MOM. ON 2 4 1 6 3 2B-1 5B 2B-3 5B-6 10 2B-3-9 4 1 6 5B 8 3 -- -- 10 9 2B-1 2B-1 5B-4 4 1 6 2B 10 7 5B 8 2B-3 MOM. ON MOM. ON 4 1 6 2B 4 1 6 3 10 7 MOM. ON 2B 9 9 2B-1 1585 3 8 2583 8 2B 7 3 5B 7 5B 2 OFF 4 1 6 2B 10 3 10 4 1 6 2B 9 2582 7 MOM. ON 3 8 2B-3-10 MOM. ON 5B 7 2 MOM. ON 4 1 6 2B 8 2B 10 3 2B-1 5B 7 3 9 2581 4 1 6 2B 8 3 2B-1 5B 7 3 -- 5B 2B 7 4 1 6 2B MOM. ON UP Position 4 1 6 3 2B-1 7 3 OFF 2B-3 4 1 6 2B -- CENTER Position 10 3 5B 2B 9 4 1 6 DOWN Position Schematic Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position) 10 3 7 CENTER Position OFF 2 Circuit with Rocker In ... 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com V11-T2-21 2.2 2 2 2 2 Two-Pole Circuit with Rocker In ... 1006 ON 9 2 2 8 9 10 ON 3 8 9 10 1602 ON 8 9 10 1603 ON 2 10 ON 8 9 10 ON 7 8 9 10 ON 3 2 8 9 10 1607 ON 3 2 2 8 9 10 1608 ON 3 7 2 OFF 2B-3-10 MOM. ON -- OFF -- OFF 8 9 10 2603 -- OFF -- OFF 8 9 10 2604 -- OFF 8 9 10 2605 8 -- 5B 7 8 9 10 2606 5B 7 8 9 10 2607 5B 7 8 9 10 2608 OFF MOM. ON 2B-1 5B-4 -- 2B-3-9 5B-6 ON OFF MOM. ON 2B-1 5B-4 -- 2B-3-10 5B-6 ON OFF MOM. ON 2B-1 5B-4 -- 2B-3 5B-6 ON OFF MOM. ON 2B-1 5B-4 -- 2B-3 5B-6 ON OFF MOM. ON 2B-1 5B-4 -- 2B-3-9 5B-6 ON OFF MOM. ON 2B-1 5B-4 -- 2B-3-10 5B-6 ON OFF MOM. ON 2B-1-10 5B-4 -- 2B-3-9 5B-6 ON OFF MOM. ON 2B-1 5B-4 -- 2B-3 5B-6 4 1 6 2B 5B 8 2 2 V11-T2-22 ON 4 1 6 2B 7 2B-3 5B-6 4 1 6 2B 2B-3 -- 4 1 6 2B 3 2B-1 5B 5B 7 2B-3-9 MOM. ON 2B-1 5B-4 4 1 6 2B 2B-3-10 MOM. ON 5B 7 2B-3-9 MOM. ON MOM. ON 4 1 6 2B 2B-3 MOM. ON 5B 7 2B-3 MOM. ON OFF 4 1 6 2B 4 1 6 2B 10 3 2B-1-10 5B 7 2 9 2602 4 1 6 2B 8 3 2B-1 5B 7 2 -- 5B 7 4 1 6 2B MOM. ON ON 4 1 6 2B 3 2B-1 5B 1606 2 OFF 2B-3-9 4 1 6 2B 10 3 2B-1 5B 7 3 9 2601 4 1 6 1605 2 2 9 1604 2 2 8 2B 8 3 2B-1 5B 7 3 -- 5B 7 4 1 6 2B MOM. ON UP Position 4 1 6 2B 3 2B-1 5B 7 3 2B-3 4 1 6 2B OFF CENTER Position 10 3 2B-1 5B 7 3 -- 4 1 6 2B 2 2006 3 7 2 MOM. ON DOWN Position Schematic Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position) 9 2B-1 5B 1601 2 OFF UP Position 4 1 6 2B 2 Circuit with Rocker In ... CENTER Position 10 3 2 2 DOWN Position Schematic Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position) 2 2 NGR Rocker Switches Single-Pole 2 2 Rockers Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com 2.2 Rockers NGR Rocker Switches Single-Pole Two-Pole Circuit with Rocker In ... DOWN Position Schematic Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position) 1007 ON 9 CENTER Position NONE UP Position MOM ON 1 6 2007 9 2B-1 -- 2B-3 2B 8 ON 9 NONE MOM ON 1 9 5B -- 2B-3-9 1622 ON NONE MOM ON 1 6 3 5B 7 -- 2B-3-10 2B 8 ON 9 NONE MOM ON 2623 9 3 2B-1 5B 2B-3 NONE MOM ON 9 2B 2B-1 5B -- 2B-3 2B 8 ON 9 NONE MOM ON 1 6 2B -- 2B-3-9 1626 ON NONE MOM ON 3 1 6 2B 7 3 2B-1 -- 2B-3-10 1627 ON NONE MOM ON 8 1 6 2B 3 4 2B-1-10 5B 7 -- 2B-3-9 8 1628 9 NONE MOM ON 2B 1 6 2B-1 -- ON NONE MOM ON 2B-1 5B-4 -- 2B-3-10 5B-6 ON NONE MOM ON 2B-1 5B-4 -- 2B-3 5B-6 ON NONE MOM ON 2B-1 5B-4 -- 2B-3 5B-6 2 ON NONE MOM ON 2 2B-1 5B-4 -- 2B-3-9 5B-6 2 ON NONE MOM ON 2 2B-1 5B-4 -- 2B-3-10 5B-6 ON NONE MOM ON 2B-1-10 5B-4 -- 2B-3-9 5B-6 ON NONE MOM ON 2B-3 7 2B 8 2B-1 5B-4 -- 2B-3 5B-6 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 4 5B 2 2 10 1 6 3 8 8 2628 4 5B 2B-3-9 5B-6 4 5B 9 10 3 1 6 2B 7 ON -- 10 9 3 7 5B 2627 9 2B-1 5B-4 4 1 6 2B 7 8 2 10 9 4 5B 8 2626 10 MOM ON 4 5B 2B 7 8 NONE 10 1 6 3 2B-1 9 8 9 4 5B 7 5B 2625 10 3 ON 4 7 1625 2 10 1 6 3 4 6 8 2624 10 1 2B-3 5B-6 4 5B 7 ON 3 1 6 2B 8 1624 9 -- -- 10 4 6 1 7 7 8 10 2B 2B-1 5B-4 4 5B 7 1623 3 1 6 3 2B-1 MOM ON 10 9 4 2B 8 2622 10 9 5B 2 NONE 4 2B 7 8 1 6 2 ON 10 3 2B-1 2B 7 8 4 6 5B 2621 10 UP Position 4 7 1621 3 1 6 3 5B CENTER Position 10 4 2B 7 DOWN Position Schematic Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position) 10 3 2 Circuit with Rocker In ... 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com V11-T2-23 2.2 2 2 2 2 Two-Pole Circuit with Rocker In ... 3003 OFF 9 3 2 OFF 2 2 1 6 OFF 9 1 6 OFF 9 3 1 6 ON 2A-2B ON 5B 2A-2B OFF 9 3 1 6 ON 5B 2A-2B OFF 9 3 1 6 ON 5B 2A-2B OFF 9 3 1 6 ON 5B 2A-2B OFF 9 3 1 6 ON ON 5A 8 2A-2B 5A 8 9 10 3567 1 6 5B 7 8 9 10 3568 1 6 2A 2B 7 ON ON 2A-1 5A-4 2A-2B 5A-5B 2B-3-9 5B-6 OFF ON ON 2A-1 5A-4 2A-2B 5A-5B 2B-3-10 5B-6 OFF ON ON 2A-1 5A-4 2A-2B 5A-5B 2B-3 5B-6 OFF ON ON 2A-1 5A-4 2A-2B 5A-5B 2B-3 5B-6 OFF ON ON 2A-1 5A-4 2A-2B 5A-5B 2B-3-9 5B-6 OFF ON ON 2A-1 5A-4 2A-2B 5A-5B 2B-3-10 5B-6 OFF ON ON 2A-1-10 5A-4 2A-2B 5A-5B 2B-3-9 5B-6 OFF ON ON 2A-1 5A-4 2A-2B 5A-5B 2B-3 5B-6 4 5A 5B 8 2 2 V11-T2-24 OFF 4 5A 2A 2B 2B-3 2B-3 5B-6 4 5B 7 3 2A-1 1 6 2A 2B 4 2A 5B 10 2B-3-9 10 2B 9 3566 5A 8 3548 5A 8 3 2A-1-10 2A-2B 5A-5B 4 5B 7 2B-3-10 ON 1 6 2A 4 2A 7 10 2B 10 2B 9 3565 5A 8 3547 5A 8 3 2A-1 2A-1 5A-4 4 5B 7 2B-3-9 ON 1 6 2A 4 2A 7 10 2B 10 2B 9 3564 5A 8 3546 5A 8 3 2A-1 ON 4 5B 7 2B-3 ON 1 6 2A 4 2A 7 10 2B 10 2B 9 3563 5A 8 3545 5A 8 3 2A-1 ON 4 5B 7 2B-3 ON 1 6 2A 2B 4 2A 7 10 2B-3-10 10 2B 9 3562 5A 8 3544 2 ON 5A 8 3 2A-1 5B 7 7 2A-2B OFF 4 5B 7 4 2A 2 ON 10 3 2 ON 1 6 2A 2B 5A 8 3543 2B 10 3 2A-1 5B 9 4 2A 7 8 2B-3-9 8 OFF 2 2 5A 2A-2B 5A 3561 10 3 2 ON UP Position 4 5B 7 3 2A-1 5B 2B 2 2B 4 9 2 2 1 6 2A 2B 3542 2 ON 1 6 2A 2B-3 CENTER Position 10 3 2A-2B 10 3 2 3004 5A 8 9 2 ON DOWN Position Schematic Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position) 4 3541 2 ON UP Position 9 2A-1 5B 7 2 2 1 6 2A 7 Circuit with Rocker In ... CENTER Position 10 2B 2 2 DOWN Position Schematic Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position) 2 2 NGR Rocker Switches Single-Pole 2 2 Rockers Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com 2.2 Rockers NGR Rocker Switches Single-Pole Two-Pole Circuit with Rocker In ... DOWN Position Schematic Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position) 5001 ON 9 UP Position OFF 1 6 5510 2B 9 4 2B-1 5B 8 9 10 5501 ON 3 1 6 2B NONE 8 9 10 5502 ON NONE 7 8 9 10 5503 ON -- NONE -- OFF 7 -- 9 NONE -- 9 NONE 5514 8 9 10 5506 ON NONE 7 8 9 10 5507 ON -- NONE 2B 10 -- 5508 9 7 8 9 10 5517 -- NONE OFF 10 5518 9 2B-1 8 5B 8 -- -- -- -- ON NONE OFF 2B-1-10 5B-4 -- -- ON NONE OFF 2B-1 5B-4 -- -- ON NONE OFF 2B-1 5B-4 -- -- ON NONE OFF 2B-1-9 5B-4 -- -- ON NONE OFF 2B-1-10 5B-4 -- -- ON NONE OFF 2B-1-9-10 5B-4 -- -- ON NONE OFF 5B 8 2B-1 5B-4 -- -- 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 4 1 6 2B 7 2B-1-9 5B-4 10 3 5B OFF 4 1 6 2B 4 1 6 5B 7 ON NONE 4 1 6 2B 8 2B 9 5516 3 2B-1-9-10 5B 7 3 8 4 1 6 5B 7 -- OFF ON 2 2 10 -- OFF -- 4 1 6 3 2B-1-10 5B 2B -- 4 1 6 8 3 5B 5B 9 2B-1-9 -- 10 5515 10 2B-1 5B-4 4 1 6 2B 4 7 5B 8 -- OFF OFF 4 1 6 2B 7 ON 3 10 9 2B-1 5505 2B 9 5513 8 3 8 3 5B 7 5B 7 -- OFF NONE 4 1 6 2B 10 2B 10 4 1 6 1 6 9 7 ON 3 8 5512 8 5504 5B 2B 7 -- OFF ON 4 1 6 3 2B-1 5B 2B 10 4 1 6 3 9 5511 3 2B-1-10 5B 2B -- 5B 8 4 1 6 3 2B 7 3 2B-1-9 5B 2B OFF UP Position 10 -- 4 7 3 -- CENTER Position 4 1 6 3 7 DOWN Position Schematic Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position) 10 3 7 CENTER Position NONE 2 Circuit with Rocker In ... 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com V11-T2-25 2.2 2 2 2 2 Circuit with Rocker In ... 5002 MOM. ON 3 2 2 9 10 8 9 10 5522 8 9 10 5523 2 9 10 8 9 10 8 9 10 9 10 5528 2 7 OFF -- NONE OFF -- NONE OFF 1 6 5B 1 6 5B 5547 1 6 5B 7 2A-2B 2B-3 ON ON OFF 2A-1 2A-2B 2B-3 ON ON OFF 2A-1 2A-2B 2B-3-9 ON ON OFF 2A-1 2A-2B 2B-3-10 ON ON OFF 2A-1-10 2A-2B 2B-3-9 ON ON OFF 2A-1 2A-2B 2B-3 10 3 1 6 4 2A 2B 5B 5A 8 2 2 V11-T2-26 2A-1 5A 8 9 2 OFF 4 2A 7 ON 10 2B 2 ON 5A 8 5548 2 2B-3-10 4 2A 8 2A-2B 10 2B -- 2A-1 5A 8 5546 3 -- OFF 4 9 2B-1 ON 10 2B -- ON 5A 8 2A -- 2B-3-9 4 5545 4 5B 5B 7 MOM. ON 1 6 1 6 2B 3 8 2B NONE 2A-2B 10 2A -- 2A-1 5A 8 9 2B-1-10 5B 7 3 -- OFF 4 5544 4 1 6 5B 7 MOM. ON 2 OFF 3 5B 1 6 2B 9 2B-1-9 5526 2 NONE ON 5A 8 2A -- 4 7 2B -- ON 10 7 MOM. ON 1 6 5B 5543 3 7 3 OFF 2B-3 4 9 2B-1 5B 1 6 2B 4 1 6 2B NONE 2A-2B 5A 8 2A -- 2A-1 10 7 MOM. ON 5525 2 2 8 5B 5542 3 5524 2 -- OFF 4 9 2B-1 5B 7 3 OFF 4 1 6 1 6 2B 7 MOM. ON 2B NONE ON 10 2A -- ON 5A 8 5541 3 7 3 -- UP Position 4 9 2B-1-10 5B 2B OFF 4 1 6 5B 7 MOM. ON 3 NONE 3 7 2B 2B 9 2B-1-9 5B 1 6 2A -- 4 1 6 3 -- CENTER Position 10 7 MOM. ON 2B 2 5003 3 8 3 2 OFF DOWN Position Schematic Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position) 9 2B-1 7 2 NONE UP Position 4 5B 5521 2 2 1 6 2B 2 Circuit with Rocker In ... CENTER Position 10 9 2 2 DOWN Position Schematic Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position) 2 2 NGR Rocker Switches Single-Pole 2 2 Rockers Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com 2.2 Rockers NGR Rocker Switches Two-Pole Circuit with Rocker In ... DOWN Position Schematic Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position) 3001 ON 9 UP Position ON 3002 2B 9 4 1 6 5B-4-2B-1 5B 8 9 10 3501 ON 3 1 6 2B ON 8 9 10 3502 ON 1 6 9 10 ON 5B-4-2B-3-10 ON 3504 ON 9 2B 5B-4-2B-3 ON 5B-4-2B-1 3505 ON 9 5B-4-2B-3 ON 9 10 3506 ON 6 2B-3 5B-6 ON 9 10 ON ON 2B ON 5B-4-2B-3 ON 5B-4-2B-3-9 8 ON 9 ON ON ON 1 6 2B 9 10 1 6 2B 5B-4-2B-3 2B-3 5B-6 7 8 9 10 3527 1 6 2B 1-ON 2-ON 2 2B-1 5B-4 2B-3-9 5B-4 2B-3-9 5B-6 OFF 1-ON 2-ON 2B-1 5B-4 2B-3-10 5B-4 2B-3-10 5B-6 OFF 1-ON 2-ON 2B-1 5B-4 2B-3 5B-4 2B-3 5B-6 OFF 1-ON 2-ON 2B-1 5B-4 2B-3 5B-4 2B-3 5B-6 2 OFF 1-ON 2-ON 2 2B-1 5B-4 2B-3-9 5B-4 2B-3-9 5B-6 2 OFF 1-ON 2-ON 2 2B-1 5B-4 2B-3-10 5B-4 2B-3-10 5B-6 OFF 1-ON 2-ON 2B-1-10 5B-4 2B-3-9 5B-4 2B-3-9 5B-6 8 3528 OFF 1-ON 2-ON 2B 2B-1 5B-4 2B-3 5B-4 2B-3 5B-6 4 5B 8 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 10 1 6 2 2 4 5B 7 7 OFF 4 5B 9 5B-4-2B-1 8 5B 8 3 5B 2 4 7 4 2B-3 5B-6 10 1 6 3526 2B-3-9 5B-6 10 3 8 3 5B-4-2B-1 3508 5B 2B 2B-3 5B-6 2B-3 5B-4 4 3525 2B-3 5B-6 2B-1 5B-4 10 1 6 7 4 5B 7 8 3524 2B-3 5B-6 2-ON 4 5B 7 3 3507 1 6 5B-4-2B-3 ON 5B-4-2B-1 8 2B 1 6 2B 4 5B 7 3 10 9 5B-4-2B-1 8 1 9 3 5B 2B 8 4 7 3 7 2 1-ON 4 5B 3523 10 2B 1 6 3 5B 1 6 10 9 8 3 9 2B 10 2B 8 3522 2B-3-10 5B-6 ON 5B 2 OFF 4 7 4 7 1 6 3 5B-4-2B-1 8 1 6 10 4 5B 7 3 9 3521 2B-3-9 5B-6 ON 5B 8 3 3503 1 6 5B-4-2B-3-9 ON 5B-4-2B-1 8 2B 2B 7 4 5B 7 3 ON UP Position 4 1 6 3 5B-4-2B-1 5B 2B 2B-3 5B-6 4 7 3 5B-4-2B-3 CENTER Position 10 3 7 DOWN Position Schematic Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position) 10 3 7 CENTER Position ON 2 Circuit with Rocker In ... 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com V11-T2-27 2.2 2 2 2 2 Circuit with Rocker In ... 3005 MOM. ON 9 2 9 10 2 7 8 9 10 7 8 9 10 3583 2B 9 10 3584 8 9 10 8 9 10 3586 8 9 10 3587 3 2 2 1 6 2B 9 10 3588 1 6 2B 7 2 MOM. ON ON MOM. ON 1 6 2B 2B-1 5B-4 2B-1 5B-6 2B-3-10 5B-6 MOM. ON ON MOM. ON 2B-1 5B-4 2B-1 5B-6 2B-3 5B-6 MOM. ON ON MOM. ON 2B-1 5B-4 2B-1 5B-6 2B-3 5B-6 MOM. ON ON MOM. ON 2B-1 5B-4 2B-1 5B-6 2B-3-9 5B-6 MOM. ON ON MOM. ON 2B-1 5B-4 2B-1 5B-6 2B-3-10 5B-6 MOM. ON ON MOM. ON 2B-1-10 5B-4 2B-1-10 5B-6 2B-3-9 5B-6 MOM. ON ON MOM. ON 8 9 10 4502 1 6 2B 8 9 10 4503 1 6 2B 8 2B-1 5B-6 2B-3 5B-6 8 9 10 4504 1 6 2B 8 9 10 4505 1 6 2B 2B-1 5B-4 2B-3 5B-6 NONE ON MOM. ON 2B-1 5B-4 2B-1 5B-4 2B-3-9 5B-6 NONE ON MOM. ON 2B-1 5B-4 2B-1 5B-4 2B-3-10 5B-6 NONE ON MOM. ON 2B-1 5B-4 2B-1 5B-4 2B-3 5B-6 NONE ON MOM. ON 2B-1 5B-4 2B-1 5B-4 2B-3 5B-6 NONE ON MOM. ON 2B-1 5B-4 2B-1 5B-4 2B-3-9 5B-6 NONE ON MOM. ON 2B-1 5B-4 2B-1 5B-4 2B-3-10 5B-6 NONE ON MOM. ON 2B-1-10 5B-4 2B-1-10 5B-4 2B-3-9 5B-6 NONE ON MOM. ON 2B-1 5B-4 2B-1 5B-4 2B-3 5B-6 4 5B 7 8 9 10 4506 1 6 2B 4 5B 7 8 9 10 4507 1 6 2B 4 5B 7 8 9 10 4508 1 6 2B 4 5B 8 2 2 V11-T2-28 2B-1 5B-4 4 5B 7 7 MOM. ON 4 5B 7 3 2B-1 5B-4 ON 4 5B 7 4 5B NONE 4 5B 7 3 8 3 2B-3-9 5B-6 4 5B 7 2 2B-1 5B-6 3 5B 7 2 2B-1 5B-4 4 1 6 2B 10 3 5B 7 3 9 4501 4 1 6 2B MOM. ON 8 3 5B 7 3 ON UP Position 4 5B 7 4 1 6 3585 2 2 8 2B MOM. ON 1 6 2B 3 5B 7 3 2B-3 5B-6 4 1 6 3 2B-1 5B-6 CENTER Position 10 3 5B 2B 2B-1 5B-4 4 1 6 3 2 9 3 5B 3582 2 4001 4 1 6 2B 2 MOM. ON DOWN Position Schematic Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position) 3 8 3 2 ON UP Position 4 5B 7 2 2 6 3581 2 2 1 2B 2 Circuit with Rocker In ... CENTER Position 10 3 2 2 DOWN Position Schematic Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position) 2 2 NGR Rocker Switches Two-Pole 2 2 Rockers Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com 2.2 Rockers NGR Rocker Switches Two-Pole Circuit with Rocker In ... DOWN Position Schematic Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position) 5004 ON 3 1 6 2A ON UP Position OFF 5005 5B 2B 8 9 10 5561 3 1 6 2A 4 5A 8 7 2A-1 5A-4 2A-2B 5A-5B 2B-3 5B-6 ON ON OFF 5562 2A-1 5A-4 2A-2B 5A-5B 2B-3-9 5B-6 ON ON OFF 3 1 6 2A 4 5A 7 8 9 10 5563 3 1 6 2A 4 5A 7 8 9 10 5564 3 1 6 2A 4 5A 7 8 9 10 5565 3 1 6 2A 4 5A 7 8 5566 3 1 6 2A 4 5A 7 7 8 9 10 5567 3 1 6 2A 4 5A 5582 2A-2B 5A-5B 2B-3-10 5B-6 ON ON OFF 2B 7 8 9 10 5568 3 1 6 2A 2B 5B 8 5583 9 2A-1 5A-4 2A-2B 5A-5B 2B-3 5B-6 ON ON OFF 2A-1 5A-4 2A-2B 5A-5B 2B-3 5B-6 ON ON OFF 2A-1 5A-4 2A-2B 5A-5B 2B-3-9 5B-6 ON ON OFF 2A-2B 5A-5B 2B-3-10 5B-6 ON ON OFF 4 5A 2A-1-10 5A-4 2A-2B 5A-5B 2B-3-9 5B-6 ON ON OFF 8 2A-1 5A-4 2A-2B 5A-5B 5B 2B 7 8 9 10 5584 5B 7 8 9 10 5585 2 2-ON 1-ON OFF 2 2B-1 5B-4 2B-3-9 5B-4 2B-3-9 5B-6 2-ON 1-ON OFF 2B-1 5B-4 2B-3-10 5B-4 2B-3-10 5B-6 2-ON 1-ON OFF 2B-1 5B-4 2B-3 5B-4 2B-3 5B-6 2 2-ON 1-ON OFF 2 2B-1 5B-4 2B-3 5B-4 2B-3 5B-6 2-ON 1-ON OFF 2B-1 5B-4 2B-3-9 5B-4 2B-3-9 5B-6 2-ON 1-ON OFF 2B-1 5B-4 2B-3-10 5B-4 2B-3-10 5B-6 2 2-ON 1-ON OFF 2 2B-1-10 5B-4 2B-3-9 5B-4 2B-3-9 5B-6 2-ON 1-ON OFF 2B-1 5B-4 2B-3 5B-4 2B-3-9 5B-6 ON NONE ON 4 1 6 2B 5B 7 8 5586 10 4 1 6 2B 5B 7 8 9 10 5587 4 1 6 2B 5B 7 8 9 10 5588 1 6 2B 4 5B 7 8 6001 9 2B-3 5B-6 4 1 6 2B 2B-3 5B-6 2B-3 5B-4 10 3 5B 2B-1 5B-4 4 1 6 9 2A-1 5A-4 OFF 10 7 6 7 3 4 1 5A 2A 5B 2B 10 8 2 1-ON 4 1 6 3 5B 2B 8 3 5B 2B 5B 2 2-ON 4 1 6 2B 10 9 10 3 5B 2B 9 5581 3 5B 2B 8 3 5B 2B 5B 9 2A-1 5A-4 UP Position 4 7 3 5B 2B 1 6 2B 10 9 CENTER Position 10 3 5B 2B 9 3 5A DOWN Position Schematic Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position) 4 7 7 CENTER Position 10 9 2 Circuit with Rocker In ... 2A-2B-5A-5B- -- 10-1-4-3 3-6-1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com V11-T2-29 2.2 2 2 NGR Rocker Switches Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Switch Base with Rocker Button 1.734 0.005 (44.04 0.13) 2 0.867 0.005 (22.02 0.13) 2 2 1.024 0.010 (26.01 0.25) 0.500 Max. (12.70 Max.) Decorative Rocker LEGEND AREA "A" 2 2 LEGEND AREA "B" LEGEND AREA "A" SIL Rocker (Snap-In Lens) 0.500 Max. (12.70 Max.) 2 2 Orientation Examples of "Standard" Orientation of Icons 1.970 0.010 (50.04 0.25) 2 2 Terminals 8 and 10 0.320 Max. (8.13 Max.) 2 2 ROAD LAMP 1.970 0.010 (50.04 0.25) 2 2 Terminals 7 and 9 Panel Opening Panel Thickness: 0.039 to 0.157 in (1.00 to 4.00) mm (Best results obtained between 0.059 and 0.118 in [1.50 and 3.00 mm]) LEGEND AREA "B" 2 Rockers 0.320 Max. (8.13 Max.) On Indicator "A" 0.100 0.005 (2.54 0.13) 2 1.024 .010 (26.01 0.25) On Indicator "B" A B C 0.500 0.010 (12.70 0.25) 0.345 0.010 (8.76 0.25) 2 0.054 0.005 (1.37 0.13) 2 2 1.800 Max. (45.42 Max.) 2 0.408 0.010 (10.36 0.25) 2 2 0.250 0.005 (6.35 0.13) 2 0.462 0.005 (11.73 0.13) 0.0305/0.032 (0.775/0.813) 0.523 0.005 (13.28 0.13) 0.144 0.005 (3.66 0.13) 2 7 5A 5B 6 5B USA 9 0.667 0.005 (16.94 0.13) 2 V11-T2-30 2A 2B 10 2 1 2B 2A 9 3 1 2 8 7 5A 2 8 6 4 2 4 0.855 0.010 (21.72 0.25) 3 10 0.257 0.005 (6.53 0.13) 0.401 0.005 (10.19 0.13) Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com 2.2 Rockers NGR Rocker Switches Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Locking Rocker 2 Sealed Rocker 0.500 Max. (12.70 Max.) 1.024 0.010 (26.01 0.25) A 2 B C 0.345 0.010 (8.76 0.25) 0.100 0.005 (2.54 0.13) 2 0.420 0.005 (10.67 0.13) 2 2 0.060 0.010 (1.52 0.25) Panel Seal 1.450 0.040 (36.83 1.02) 1.800 Max. (45.42 Max.) 2 0.345 0.010 (8.76 0.25) B C A 2 2 0.408 0.010 (10.36 0.25) 0.408 0.010 (10.36 0.25) 2 2 0.320 Max. (8.13 Max.) 0.320 0.005 Max. (8.13 0.13 Max.) 0.245 0.005 (6.22 0.13) 2 LEGEND AREA "B" 0.500 0.005 Max. (12.70 0.13 Max.) LEGEND AREA "A" LEGEND AREA "B" 1.024 0.010 (26.0 0.25) 2 1.970 0.010 (50.04 0.25) 1.970 0.010 (50.04 0.25) 2 2 Indicator 2 Label Rocker Surface Length Along Bottom 1.970 0.010 (50.04 0.25) 2 0.375 0.010 (9.53 0.25) LEGEND AREA "B" 0.500 Max. (12.70 Max.) LEGEND AREA "A" 1.128 0.010 (28.65 0.25) 0.320 Max. (8.13 Max.) 1.024 0.010 (26.01 0.25) 0.580 0.008 (14.73 0.020) 2 2 0.470 0.010 (11.94 0.25) 2 2 R0.060 0.005 (R1.52 0.13) 0.095 0.005 (2.42 0.13) 2 0.020 0.005 (5.08 0.13) 2 12 1 0.100 0.005 (2.54 0.13) Rotated 12 CCW Graphics Window 1.800 Max. (45.42 Max.) Note: Graphics window may be on both ends or either end of part. Dimensions shown are typical. 0.408 0.010 (10.36 0.25) 2 2 2 2 0.0305/0.032 (0.775/0.813) 2 2 2 2 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com V11-T2-31 2.3 2 Rockers SVR--Sealed Vehicle Rockers Contents SVR--Sealed Vehicle Rocker Description 2 Page SVR--Sealed Vehicle Rockers Above-Panel Rocker Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Below-Panel Rocker Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Circuit Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2 2 V11-T2-34 V11-T2-35 V11-T2-36 V11-T2-37 V11-T2-38 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Product Description The Sealed Vehicle Rocker (SVR) switch from Eaton's electrical business now offers an above panel actuator style in addition to the below panel and paddle actuators. Designed to meet the severe environmental requirements of the construction and agricultural vehicle markets, the SVR is sealed at the front and back of the switch and meets the rigorous sealing requirements of IP68. The small switch footprint minimizes the space taken on switch panels. SVR switches are assembled into panels by pressing the switch through the top of the panel and are held in place by retention tabs molded into the body of the switch; mounting hardware or special tools are not necessary. Features The SVR is offered in singleand two-pole switch circuits, with two- and three-position momentary and maintained circuits available. Switch and illumination circuits are terminated with 0.11 in (2.8 mm) tin-plated copper alloy spade terminals. The SVR connector can be loaded with the appropriate terminals and/or wire seals to accomplish sealing at the back end of the switch. You can order assembled switches or the switch base and actuator separately. Actuator Styles Use the final code in the switch base catalog number, Pages V11-T2-34 and V11-T2-35, to denote assembly instructions. Actuator The SVR switch family includes three styles of actuators: above panel, below panel and paddle. Switch performance and specifications are the same for all actuator styles. Black is standard, but other colors are also available. Matte finish is standard on all actuator styles, matching the finish on the bezels and all other visible SVR switch features and accessories. Above panel rocker button offers new styling and a larger surface area. Eaton can offer assistance with unique designs of above panel actuators for applications where differentiation is desired Below panel rocker button is the same two-faced European styling that has been offered for SVR since its initial release. Indicator style matches the below panel rocker button style Paddle actuator allows toggle-type actuation of the SVR switch Standards and Certifications 2 2 2 2 Approvable under stringent UL and CSA standards For information, contact your local Eaton Sales Representative RoHS Compliant 1 2 Note 1 Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for the most up-to-date list of verified part numbers. 2 2 V11-T2-32 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com Rockers SVR--Sealed Vehicle Rockers Illumination Snap-in Lenses Long life LEDs provide backlighting illumination for the SVR switch. Backlighting can be either independent of or dependent on the switch circuits, or a combination of both. Standard LED color is amber, with red, green and blue also available. LED protection circuitry is available to protect the LED from overvoltage and reverse voltage conditions. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative for more specific information about standard and custom circuit options. Backlighting Each switch can accommodate up to two LEDs that can be connected to be either circuit dependent or independent Standard LED color is amber, with red, green and blue also available. Long life (100,000 hours) LEDs are standard Standard LED voltages are 12 and 24 Vdc The below panel rocker button style includes a single-piece back-lit actuator with laser-etched icons in either daylight white or deadfront styles. Without illumination, the icon is either daylight white or deadfront, but will change to the color of the chosen light source when illuminated Above and below panel rocker buttons are available with or without one or two translucent lenses. Five standard lens colors are available: white, red, green, blue and amber Icons Icon areas are provided on each end of the rocker button. Icons may be illuminated or nonilluminated and are padprinted in a contrasting color either directly on the rocker button or the lens Mounting Means Snap-in mounting using four flexible plastic retainers integral with switch frame. Circuits The SVR switch is capable of single- or two-pole configurations with two- or three-position maintained, momentary or a combination of actuations. The addition of jumpers between switch terminals expands the circuit possibilities. Standard Circuit Options ON-NONE-ON ON-OFF-ON ON*-OFF-ON* ON*-OFF-ON ON-ON-ON ON*-NONE-ON ON*-ON-ON* ON*-ON-ON Options Note: * = Momentary. See Electrical Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-37. Sealing SVR design includes a sealed contact chamber with dust and water resistance to IP68. The harness connection can also be sealed by using AMP wire seals Catalog Number 828905-1 (14-16 gauge) or 828904-1 (18-20 gauge) to seal the wires to the connector. For an application where a connector cavity is not being used, it can be sealed with AMP sealing plug Catalog Number 828922-1. The above panel version may also be sealed to the panel using panel seal Catalog Number 32-2245. 2.3 Additional colors of actuators, mounting bezels and lenses Special circuits Special ratings Pad printing on the below panel switch bezel Low current capabilities Custom back-lit icons Gang-mount system including end bezel Catalog Number 17-22146 and center bezel 17-22152 Palm Guard (below panel switch only) at either or both ends of the switch frame Indicators with insertable lenses Polarized lock-on connector Catalog Number 25-13936 Panel plug with connector retention feature Catalog Number 17-22145 Non-illuminated below panel paddle actuator Note: Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative for additional information on options. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative for more specific information about SVR standard and custom circuit options. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com V11-T2-33 2.3 Rockers SVR--Sealed Vehicle Rockers Above-Panel Rocker Switch 2 2 2 2 2 2 Catalog Number Selection 2 How To Order--Above-Panel SVR Switch 2 To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate switch series and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers. Example: 2 2 S AC Switch Series M 2X D G AT R 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 M = Standard Switch Circuits/Illumination Circuits 2nd Digit (Illumination) 1st Digit (Circuit) Single-Pole Illumination A = None C = Top/left (D) A = ON-NONE-ON D = Bottom/right (D) 1 C = ON-NONE-ON E = Top/left (I) D = ON-OFF-ON F = Bottom/right (I) 1 E = ON-OFF-ON G = Top/left (D)/bottom/right (I) F = ON*-OFF-ON* H = Top/left (I)/bottom/right (D) G = ON*-OFF-ON* 1 J = Top/left (D)/bottom/right (D) H = ON*-OFF-ON K = Top/left (I)/bottom/right (I) 1 J = ON*-OFF-ON Two-Pole Illumination K = ON-ON-ON 2 R = None L = ON-ON-ON 12 S = Top/left (D) M = ON*-NONE-ON T = Bottom/right (D) P = ON*-NONE-ON 1 U = Top/left (I) R = ON*-ON-ON* 2 V = Bottom/right (I) S = ON*-ON-ON* 12 W = Top/left (D)/bottom/right (I) T = ON*-ON-ON Y = Top/left (I)/bottom/right (D) U = ON*-ON-ON 1 3 = Top/left (D)/bottom/right (D) 4 = Top/left (I)/bottom/right (I) KEY: * = Momentary, (I) = Independent, (D) = Dependent. 2 2 LED Wavelengths: Red = ~630 Nm Amber = ~592 Nm Green = ~526 Nm Blue = ~472 Nm 2 2 2 A= C= D= E= F= Lens Color (Top/Left) X = None B = Blue R = Red A = Amber G = Green W = White Decorative Icon Color X = No icon 1 = Daylight white Icon (Top/Left) XX = None AT = Work light See Symbols Library on Pages V11-T2-82 to V11-T2-86 and V11-T2-97 to V11-T2-104. Lens Color (Bottom/Right) X = None B = Blue R = Red A = Amber G = Green W = White Decorative Icon Color X = No icon 1 = Daylight white 2 = Deadfront Icon (Bottom/Right) XX = None AV = Hazard See Symbols Library on Pages V11-T2-82 to V11-T2-86 and V11-T2-97 to V11-T2-104. Notes 1 Gold plated. 2 Two-pole only. See Electrical Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-37 and Illumination Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-38. 3 For red rocker, only actuator style options A, C and F are available. 2 V11-T2-34 X Actuator Style Decorative rocker No lens Top/left lens only Bottom/right lens only Top/left and Bottom/right lenses White LED Coordinates: White = 0.31 x 0.31 2 2 LED (Top/Left) 1st Digit X = None 14V Standard J = Red K = Green L = Amber (standard for lensed rockers) M = Blue N = White (standard for decorative rockers) 14V Over/Reverse Voltage Protection 1 = Red 2 = Green 3 = Amber (standard) 7 = Blue 28V Standard E = Red F = Green G = Amber (standard for lensed rockers) H = Blue P = White (standard for decorative rockers) 28V Over/Reverse Voltage Protection 4 = Red 5 = Green 6 = Amber (standard) 8 = Blue LED (Bottom/Right) 2nd Digit X = None Same codes available as 1st digit. 2 X Frame S = SVR 2 2 AV Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com Rocker Color X = Black R = Red 3 Special Feature X = None For Eaton use only. Rockers SVR--Sealed Vehicle Rockers 2.3 Below-Panel Rocker Switch 2 2 2 2 2 2 Catalog Number Selection 2 How To Order--Below-Panel Rocker Switch To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate switch series and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers. Example: S AC S 2X Switch Series S= T= B= F= S = SVR Switch Circuits/Illumination Circuits 2nd Digit (Illumination) 1st Digit (Circuit) Single-Pole Illumination A = None C = Top/left (D) A = ON-NONE-ON D = Bottom/right (D) C = ON-NONE-ON 1 E = Top/left (I) D = ON-OFF-ON F = Bottom/right (I) E = ON-OFF-ON 1 G = Top/left (D)/bottom/right (I) F = ON*-OFF-ON* H = Top/left (I)/bottom/right (D) G = ON*-OFF-ON* 1 J = Top/left (D)/bottom/right (D) H = ON*-OFF-ON K = Top/left (I)/bottom/right (I) J = ON*-OFF-ON 1 Two-Pole Illumination K = ON-ON-ON 2 R = None L = ON-ON-ON 12 S = Top/left (D) M = ON*-NONE-ON T = Bottom/right (D) P = ON*-NONE-ON 1 U = Top/left (I) R = ON*-ON-ON* 2 V = Bottom/right (I) S = ON*-ON-ON* 12 W = Top/left (D)/bottom/right (I) T = ON*-ON-ON Y = Top/left (I)/bottom/right (D) U = ON*-ON-ON 1 3 = Top/left (D)/bottom/right (D) 4 = Top/left (I)/bottom/right (I) 1st and 2nd Digit Indicators NE = 7-9 Illumination NF = 8-10 Illumination NK = Dual Illumination N9 = Dual Illumination with 8-9 jumper KEY: * = Momentary, (I) = Independent, (D) = Dependent. 3 G AT R AC Frame Standard--Below panel Palm Guard--Top/left Palm Guard--Bottom/right Palm Guard--Full LED (Top/Left) 1st Digit X = None 14V Standard J = Red K = Green L = Amber (standard) M = Blue 14V Over/Reverse Voltage Protection 1 = Red 2 = Green 3 = Amber (standard) 7 = Blue 28V Standard E = Red F = Green G = Amber (standard) H = Blue 28V Over/Reverse Voltage Protection 4 = Red 5 = Green 6 = Amber (standard) 8 = Blue LED (Bottom/Right) 2nd Digit X = None Same codes available as 1st digit. LED Wavelengths: Red = ~630 Nm Amber = ~592 Nm Green = ~526 Nm Blue = ~472 Nm X X Actuator Style 1 = No lens 2 = Top/left lens only 3 = Bottom/right lens only 4 = Top/left and bottom/right lenses 5 = Paddle--No lens 6 = Indicator--Top/left lens 7 = Indicator--Bottom/right lens 8 = Indicator--Top/left and Bottom/ right lens 9 = Indicator--No lens A = Decorative rocker 2 Special Feature X = None For Eaton use only. Special Feature X = None For Eaton use only. 2 2 2 2 2 2 Lens Color (Top/Left) X = None B = Blue R = Red A = Amber G = Green W = White Decorative Icon Color 1 = Daylight white 2 = Deadfront 2 2 2 2 Icon (Top/Left) XX = None AT = Work light See Symbols Library on Pages V11-T2-82 to V11-T2-86 and V11-T2-97 to V11-T2-104. 2 2 2 Lens Color (Bottom/Right) X = None B = Blue R = Red A = Amber G = Green W = White Decorative Icon Color 1 = Daylight white 2 = Deadfront 2 2 2 2 Icon (Bottom/Right) XX = None AC = Fast See Symbols Library on Pages V11-T2-82 to V11-T2-86 and V11-T2-97 to V11-T2-104. 2 2 2 Notes 1 Gold plated. 2 Two-pole only. See Electrical Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-37 and Illumination Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-38. Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com 2 2 V11-T2-35 2.3 Rockers SVR--Sealed Vehicle Rockers 2 Technical Data and Specifications 2 SVR--Sealed Vehicle Rocker 2 2 Description Specification Ratings 12A at either 12 or 24 Vdc, can be approved under stringent UL and CSA standards Electrical life Standard plating 2 50,000 operations at 12A at either 12 or 24 Vdc. Life cycle testing conducted using both inductive and resistive loads Gold plating 250,000 (maintained circuits)/50,000 (momentary circuits) operations at 10 mA at either 12 or 24 Vdc 2 Mechanical life 2 2 2 2 2 Maintained circuits 250,000 operations minimum Momentary circuits 50,000 operations minimum Circuits Single- or two-pole, two- or three-position, with momentary and maintained capabilities Dielectric strength 1500 volts rms minimum Operate force 1-3 lbs (4.4-13.2 Nm) depending on circuit configuration and actuator style Temperature Operating range -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C) Storage range -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C) Contact material 2 Movable Stationary Silver-plated copper alloy with silver alloy contact surface 2 Gold-plated Contacts are available for low level electrical loads 2 2 2 2 2 2 Copper alloy with silver alloy contact surface Terminal type Standard 0.11 in (2.8 mm) tin-plated copper alloy spade terminal Mates to AMP Junior Power Timer Terminals 1 Catalog Number 927766-3 (14-16 gauge) Catalog Number 927770-3 (18-20 gauge) Plastic component UL ratings Base material UL 94 V-O Frame material UL 94 H-B IP rating IP68 Sub-actuator material UL 94 V-O Actuator material UL 94 V-0 (above panel rocker button) UL 94 H-B (below panel rocker button and paddle actuator) Mounting hole Standard panel cutout of 1.45 x 0.83 in (36.8 x 21.1 mm) 2 Panel thickness 0.04 to 0.16 in (1.0 to 4.0 mm) Best results obtained between 0.06 and 0.12 in (1.5 and 3.0 mm) 2 Note 1 See also Sealing, Page V11-T2-33, for additional AMP components to seal the connector interface. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V11-T2-36 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com 2.3 Rockers SVR--Sealed Vehicle Rockers Circuit Diagrams 2 Switch Circuit Schematics Code A C (Gold) 7 2 5 3 2-3 4 7 2 3 9 1 6 4 8 7 2 5 3 NONE -- BOTTOM/ RIGHT Actuated ON Code A C (Gold) 2-3 9 5 OFF -- ON D E (Gold) MOM. ON OFF 2 3 9 1 6 4 5 2 5 -- F G (Gold) 4 3 4 2 5 3 2-3 OFF -- ON H J (Gold) 4 10 7 2 2-1 5 3 K L (Gold) 4 10 7 2 Two-pole only 5 3 7 2 3 9 NONE ON M P (Gold) 4 10 7 2 1 6 4 5 MOM. ON 2-3 -- 2-1 5 10 8 3 R S (Gold) 4 10 7 2 Two-pole only 5 3 7 2 3 9 MOM. ON ON ON T U (Gold) 4 9 7 2 5 2-3 6 4 10 2-1 5 8 BOTTOM/ RIGHT Actuated 2 2 ON NONE ON 2-3 5-6 -- -- 2-1 5-4 2 ON OFF ON 2 2-3 5-6 -- -- 2-1 5-4 MOM. ON OFF MOM. ON 2-3 5-6 -- -- 2-1 5-4 2 MOM. ON OFF ON 2 2-3 5-6 -- -- 2-1 5-4 ON ON ON 2-3 5-6 5-4-2-3 5-4-2-1 MOM. ON NONE ON 2-3 5-6 -- -- 2-1 5-4 MOM. ON ON MOM. ON 2-3 5-6 5-4-2-3 5-4-2-1 2 MOM. ON ON ON 2 2-3 5-6 2-1 5-4 2-1 5-4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 1 6 2-1 CENTER 2 2 10 1 8 9 1 6 8 T U (Gold) 9 1 6 8 R S (Gold) 9 1 6 8 M P (Gold) 9 1 6 8 K L (Gold) 9 1 6 8 MOM. ON 9 10 7 2-1 10 8 1 6 10 7 2-1 MOM. ON 9 1 6 10 7 2 3 8 2-3 4 7 8 ON TOP/ LEFT Actuated Two-Pole Schematic (Shown in Top/left Actuated Position) 2-1 10 1 6 8 H J (Gold) ON CENTER 10 5 F G (Gold) 9 1 6 8 D E (Gold) TOP/ LEFT Actuated Single-Pole Schematic (Shown in Top/left Actuated Position) 4 10 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com V11-T2-37 2.3 2 2 2 Dimensions SinglePole Code Above-Panel Rocker TwoPole Code Schematic 1 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) A R None Above-Panel (Pad-Printed) Rocker Switch C S 2 D T 2 2 E U 2 2 2 F V 2 2 G W 2 H Y J 3 2 K 4 2 2 2 Illumination Code 9 2 2 2 10 7 + 0.400 0.010 (10.16 0.25) 9 10 + 7 + 9 8 10 7 + 9 8 10 + 7 + 9 3 7 + ICON AREA T/L 1.870 0.010 (47.50 0.25) 0.300 0.010 (7.62 0.25) 3 8 ICON AREA B/R 0.052 0.010 (1.32 0.25) Top/Left Actuated Center Bottom/Right Actuated 0.807 0.010 (20.50 0.25) 1.418 0.010 (36.00 0.25) 10 + 1.299 0.010 (33.00 0.25) 0.810 0.010 (20.60 0.25) 9 3 Above-Panel Decorative (Laser-Etched) Rocker Switch 8 10 + 7 + 9 3 1 8 10 + 7 + 9 8 2 2 8 0.945 0.010 (24.00 0.25) 1.873 (47.53) 2 2 9 3 8 2 2 7 + 1.400 0.010 (35.60 0.25) 2 2 SVR--Sealed Vehicle Rockers Illumination Schematics 2 2 Rockers Note: Icon area is the same as Above-Panel (Pad-Printed) Rocker Switch shown above. 0.940 (23.87) 0.600 (15.24) 10 + Schematic 1 7 + 9 8 10 + Note 1 LED for terminals 7-9 is at top/left side of switch. LED for terminals 8-10 is at bottom/right of switch. 1.477 0.010 (44.00 0.25) 0.810 0.010 (20.60 0.25) 1.400 0.010 (35.60 0.25) 2 V11-T2-38 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com Rockers SVR--Sealed Vehicle Rockers 2.3 Above-Panel Rocker 2 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Panel Seal Gasket (Above Only) Catalog Number 32-2245 1.700 0.010 (43.18 0.25) 1.450 0.010 (36.83 0.25) 0.812 0.010 (20.62 0.25) 2 Panel Opening (Above and Below) 1.450 (36.80) 2 1.190 (30.20) 2 2 1.190 0.010 (30.23 0.25) 2 0.680 (17.30) 0.830 (21.10) 2 0.680 0.010 (17.27 0.25) 2 R0.060 0.010 (R1.52 0.25) 0.950 0.010 (24.13 0.25) 2 Note: Recommended panel thickness 0.039-0.157 in (1.00-4.00 mm). Best results obtained between 0.059 and 0.118 in (1.50 and 3.00 mm). 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com V11-T2-39 2.3 2 2 Rockers SVR--Sealed Vehicle Rockers Below-Panel Rocker Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Below-Panel Rocker Switch with Actuator 2 0.980 0.010 (25.00 0.25) 0.390 0.005 (9.90 0.13) 2 2 0.270 0.005 (6.90 0.13) 2 2 0.446 0.010 (11.40 0.25) ICON AREA T/L 1.730 0.010 (44.00 0.25) ICON AREA B/R Top/Left Actuated Center Bottom/Right Actuated 2 2 1.730 0.010 (44.00 0.25) 2 2 2 2 2 2 1.400 0.010 (35.60 0.25) Panel Actuator (Below-Panel Only) 0.100 0.010 (2.60 0.25) 0.810 0.010 (20.60 0.25) 1.610 0.010 (40.89 0.25) Panel Guard (Below-Panel Only) 0.551 0.010 (14.00 0.25) 1.054 0.010 (26.78 0.25) 0.940 0.010 (23.88 0.25) 0.102 0.010 (2.60 0.25) 2 2 1.730 0.010 (44.00 0.25) 2 1.400 0.010 (35.60 0.25) 2 0.810 0.010 (20.60 0.25) 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V11-T2-40 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com Rockers SVR--Sealed Vehicle Rockers 2.3 Below-Panel Rocker 2 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 2 Indicator (Below-Panel Only) 0.390 0.005 (9.90 0.13) 0.270 0.005 (6.90 0.13) 0.100 0.010 (2.60 0.25) 2 ICON AREA T/L ICON AREA B/R 2 1.730 0.010 (44.00 0.25) 2 2 2 0.980 0.010 (25.00 0.25) 2 2 2 1.730 0.010 (44.00 0.25) 2 1.400 0.010 (35.60 0.25) 2 0.810 0.010 (20.60 0.25) 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com V11-T2-41 2.3 2 Rockers SVR--Sealed Vehicle Rockers Accessories Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 2 Gang Mount System 2 End Bezel Catalog Number 17-22146 Center Bezel Catalog Number 17-22152 2 0.820 0.005 (20.88 0.13) 2.020 0.010 (51.37 0.25) 1.020 0.010 (25.96 0.25) 2 2 1.770 0.010 (44.88 0.25) 2 1.530 0.010 (38.90 0.25) 2 1.450 0.005 (36.80 0.13) 2.050 0.010 (52.00 0.25) 2 2 2 End Bezels 2 1.976 0.010 (50.20 0.25) 2 End Bezels and 1 Center Bezel 0.640 0.010 (16.36 0.25) 3.000 0.010 (76.20 0.25) 0.150 0.010 (3.75 0.25) 2 1.070 0.010 (27.10 0.25) 2 2 Panel Opening for 2-End Bezel 1.545 0.010 (39.24 0.25) Panel Opening for 2-End and 1 Center Bezel 1.545 0.010 (39.24 0.25) 0.540 0.010 (13.64 0.25) 2 2 2 2 1.000 0.010 (25.51 0.25) 2-End Bezel 2 Ends and 1 Center Bezel Panel Plug Connector Catalog Number 17-22145 Catalog Number 25-13936 2 2 AMP Terminal Catalog Numbers: 927766-3 (14-16 gauge) 927770-3 (18-20 gauge) AMP Wire Seal Catalog Numbers: 828905-1 (14-16 gauge) 828904-1 (18-20 gauge) AMP Sealing Plug Catalog Number: 828922-1 0.980 0.010 (25.00 0.25) 2 1.730 0.010 (44.00 0.25) 2 2 0.660 0.010 (16.80 0.25) 1.310 0.010 (33.40 0.25) 0.100 0.010 (2.55 0.25) 1.240 0.010 (31.50 0.25) 2 0.580 0.010 (14.75 0.25) 2 2 1.730 0.010 (43.95 0.25) 2 0.330 0.010 (8.40 0.25) 2 1.400 0.010 (35.56 0.25) 2 0.810 0.010 (20.57 0.25) 2 V11-T2-42 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com 1.020 0.010 (26.00 0.25) Rockers Dual Motion Safety Switches 2.4 Contents Dual Motion Safety Switch Description Dual Motion Safety Switches Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 2 V11-T2-44 V11-T2-44 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Product Description Application Description Eaton's Vehicle Control business offers these new dual motion safety switches to prevent accidental actuation and protect operator personnel and equipment. These rockers are available in two standard circuit options: OFF (locked)--None--ON and ON (locked)--None--ON. The locked safety feature requires two motions from the operator to place the actuator in the unlocked position. In the locked position, the operator must apply pressure on the actuator forward and an additional force in an upward motion for the switch to be moved to the unlocked position. Once in the unlocked position, the switch can easily be moved back into the locked position. Farming equipment Fire trucks and safety vehicles Lawn and garden equipment Large transportation buses Industrial and commercial equipment Features and Benefits Dual motion safety switches are recommended up to 15A at 28 Vdc. An added benefit is its IP54 seal level. They can be used in tough environments where there may be exposure to small dust particles or water splashing against the enclosure from any direction. For available higher ratings or additional customizable circuits, please contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. Options There are many options to choose when building the right switch for your application. Termination types to choose from include screw type, solder lug and 0.250-inch spade terminals. Actuators are available in four standard colors with an appealing matte finish. Choose from black, red, white or yellow. Eaton also offers standard and customizable legend pad printing options on top of the actuator. There is even an option for arrows to be pad printed on the sides of the rocker to indicate the correct forward motion. 2 Standards and Certifications UL/CSA Recognition at 15A, 125 Vac; 10A, 250 Vac; 3/4 hp, 250 Vac RoHS Compliant 1 2 2 2 2 Note 1 Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for the most up-to-date list of verified part numbers. 2 2 2 2 2 2 For added convenience, the bezel is designed to allow an easy snap-in switch mount into various panel thicknesses. The actuators even have ergonomic grooves to help provide the operator a firm grip when moving the actuator. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com V11-T2-43 2.4 2 Rockers Dual Motion Safety Switches Catalog Number Selection 8179K21Z T 51 AA A Y 2 2 2 Poles and Throws Circuit with Rocker In ... Position A Center Position Position B OFF (lock) None ON ON (lock) None ON 2PST 2PDT Base Part Number Side Arrow Pad Prints X = None Y = Both sides 8179K21Z 8179K22Z 2 2 Rocker Color Y = Black T = Red M = White E = Yellow 2 2 2 Available Switch Pad Prints 2 Prints 2 Termination Type 50 = Screw type 51 = Solder lug 52 = Quick connect (0.250 in spade) Top Pad Print 1 XX = None AA = PTO AB = Creeper engage AC = Retarder AD = Windrower ON/OFF AE = Rotary lock pin cylinder A= B= C= D= X= Icon Orientation Standard 90 clockwise 180 clockwise 270 counterclockwise None 2 2 PTO Creeper Engage Retarder Windrower ON/OFF 2 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Dual Motion Safety Switch 2 0.957 (24.40) 2 0.648 (16.50) 0.102 (2.60) 2 PAD PRINT ICON 0.800 0.010 (20.30 0.25) B "A" 0.03 A 2 0.410 0.010 (10.40 0.25) 2 2 1.155 (29.30) Pad Print Arrows on Side of Rocker 2 2 1.190 (30.20) Recommended Panel Opening Thickness 0.040 to 0.140 (1.01 to 3.55) Best Results Obtained from 0.080 to 0.125 (2.03 to 3.17) Notes 1 Black pad print color for white and yellow rockers. White pad print color for red and black rockers. 2 Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative for more available pad print options. V11-T2-44 1.450 (36.80) 0.680 (17.20) 0.830 (21.10) 0.276 (0.07) 2 2 1.548 (39.30) Push rocker in direction of arrow to actuate from "A" to "B" position. "A" position = locked, "B" position = unlocked. 0.669 (0.17) 6 2 1.844 (46.8) 2 2 2 3 0.170 (4.32) 1 2 0.250 (6.35) (0.032 [0.80] Thick) 1 2 0.825 (20.90) 0.096 (2.40) 5 2 Dimensions 4 2 Rotary Lock Pin Cylinder 3 2 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com 1.427 (36.20) Rockers 1500/2500--Midsize AC Rated 2.5 Contents 1500/2500 Series Description Page 1500/2500--Midsize AC Rated Midsize Non-Illuminated and Illuminated . . . . Hi-Lite Rocker with High Inrush . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-46 V11-T2-47 V11-T2-48 V11-T2-48 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Product Description Options Eaton's 1500/2500 series rocker switch offers a designer touch that will enhance any product line. High Inrush Option Ideal applications include appliances, electronic instrumentation, data processing, communications and medical and office equipment. Custom legends are available on the switch actuator and bezel. The 1500H/2500H is designed to handle high inrush currents up to 100A peak inrush for 10 milliseconds. This two-color rocker version brightly indicates the ON position. This version spares the expense of more costly illuminated switches and is available with the high inrush option. 2 Note: See Catalog Number Selection for more detail. 2 International Approvals Hi-Lite Rocker with High Inrush Option 2 Standards and Certifications 2 UL Recognized CSA Certified ENEC RoHS Compliant 1 2 2 EN EC 2 2 Note 1 Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for the most up-to-date list of verified part numbers. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com V11-T2-45 2.5 Rockers 1500/2500--Midsize AC Rated Midsize Non-Illuminated and Illuminated 2 To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base circuit number and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers. 2 2 2 Catalog Number Selection 2 How To Order--Midsize Non-Illuminated Example: 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 UL/CSA: 15A 125 Vac, 10A 250 Vac, 10A 28 Vdc, 8A 14VT; ENEC: 10(4)A 250V UL/CSA: 15A 125 Vac, 10A 250 Vac, 10A 28 Vdc, 8A 14VT; ENEC: 10(2)A 250V UL/CSA: 10A 125 Vac, 10A 250 Vac, 10A 28Vdc, 8A 14VT; ENEC: 10(2)A 250V UL/CSA: 15A 125 Vac, 10A 250 Vac, 10A 28 Vdc, 8A 14VT; ENEC: 10(4)A 250V UL/CSA: 15A 125 Vac, 10A 250 Vac, 10A 28 Vdc, 8A 14VT; ENEC: 10(2)A 250V UL/CSA: 10A 125 Vac, 10A 250 Vac, 10A 28 Vdc, 8A 14VT; ENEC: 10(2)A 250V 2 2 2 Rating UL/CSA: 15A 125 Vac, 10A 250 Vac, 10A 28Vdc, 8A 14VT; ENEC: 10(4)A 250V 2 2 2 1PDT ON OFF ON 1504 6 1PDT MOM. ON MOM. ON OFF OFF MOM. ON ON 1506 1507 9 8 ON MOM. ON ON ON ON NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE OFF OFF MOM. OFF ON MOM. ON 2500 2501 2505 2502 2503 10 11 12 13 15 2PDT ON OFF ON 2504 14 2PDT MOM. ON MOM. ON OFF OFF MOM. ON ON 2506 2507 17 16 2PST 2PDT Example: 2 2 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 1PDT E 038 Code letters and/or numbers. Add to base circuit number. ON MOM. ON ON ON ON 1PST 1 Circuit Number 3 1 3 4 5 7 Base and Bezel Color 1 = Black 2 = White 3 = Red Rocker Color 1 = Black 2 = White 3 = Red Terminal Type E = 6.3 mm tabs/0.25 in quick connect B = Solder lugs Note: B style terminal not offered for 1506 Series. Legend Type (Optional) 038 = ON/OFF See Most Popular Legends table on Page V11-T2-55. How To Order--Midsize Illuminated 2 2 2 DOWN 1 Position Base Circuit Number 2 1500 OFF 1501 OFF 1505 MOM. OFF ON 1502 MOM. ON 1503 Poles and Throw Rating Circuit with Rocker in ... UP CENTER Position Position 1500 Circuit with Rocker in ... UP CENTER Position Position 2500 1PST ON MOM. ON NONE NONE DOWN 1 Position Base Circuit Number OFF 1500 OFF 1501 2PST ON MOM. ON NONE NONE OFF OFF Poles and Throw 2500 2501 G 2 2 E 725 Code letters and/or numbers. Add to base circuit number. Circuit Number 3 18 21 28 30 Lens/Rocker Color A = Amber G = Green R = Red W = White (clear) Base and Bezel Color 1 = Black 2 = White 3 = Red Lamp Voltage 0 = No lamp 1 = 125V neon 2 = 250V neon 4 = 6V filament 4 5 = 12V filament 4 Terminal Type E = 6.3 mm tabs/0.25 in quick connect B = Solder lugs Notes 1 1500 Type--Lever depressed toward terminal #3. 2500 Type--Lever depressed toward terminals #13 and #26. 2 #1500--#1507 switches are supplied in 1500 type base. #2500--#2507 switches are supplied in 2500 type base. 3 See Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-80. 4 6V, 12V filament lamps are not UL, CSA, or ENEC. V11-T2-46 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com Legend Type (Optional) 725 = ON/OFF See Most Popular Legends table on Page V11-T2-55. Rockers 1500/2500--Midsize AC Rated 2.5 Hi-Lite Rocker with High Inrush To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base circuit number and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers. 2 2 2 2 Catalog Number Selection How To Order--Hi-Lite Rocker with High Inrush Option 1500H Example: Poles and Throw Rating UL/CSA:15A 125 Vac, 10A 250 Vac, 10A 28 Vdc, 8A 14VT; ENEC: 10(4)A 250V UL/CSA: 22A 125 Vac, 16A 250 Vac, 6A 125 VacL, 10A 14VT, 1 hp 125-250Vac; ENEC: 16(4)A 250V 1PST 1PST Circuit with Rocker in ... UP CENTER Pos. Position ON MOM. ON NONE NONE ON DOWN 1 Position Base Circuit Number OFF OFF NONE 1 2 1500 _ 1501 _ OFF 1500H E 2 038 2 Code letters and/or numbers. Add to Base Circuit Number. Circuit Number 3 1 3 2 4 1 Base and Bezel Color 1 = Black 2 = White 3 = Red Hi-Lite Color 1 = Black 5 = Gray 2 = White 6 = Red 4 = Green 7 = Yellow Rocker Color 1 = Black 2 = White 3 = Red Terminal Type E = 6.3 mm tabs/0.25 in quick connect B = Solder lugs 4 Legend Type (Optional) 038 = ON/OFF See Most Popular Legends table on Page V11-T2-55. 2 2 2 Example: Poles and Throw Circuit with Rocker in ... UP CENTER Pos. Position 1500H DOWN 1 Position Base Circuit Number 1 2 E 2 038 2 Code letters and/or numbers. Add to Base Circuit Number. Circuit Number 3 1PST ON NONE OFF 1500H 1 2PST ON NONE OFF 2500H 10 Base and Bezel Color 1 = Black 2 = White 3 = Red Rocker Color 1 = Black 2 = White 3 = Red Legend Type (Optional) 038 = ON/OFF See Most Popular Legends table on Page V11-T2-55. Terminal Type E = 6.3 mm tabs/0.25 in quick connect Example: Poles and Throw Circuit with Rocker in ... UP CENTER Pos. Position 2500H DOWN 1 Position Base Circuit Number 1PST ON NONE OFF 1500H 18 2PST ON NONE OFF 2500H 28 2 2 2 725 2 Code letters and/or numbers. Add to Base Circuit Number. 2 G 2 2 E Circuit Number 3 2 2 How To Order--High Inrush Illuminated Rating UL/CSA: 22A 125 Vac, 16A 250 Vac, 6A 125 VacL, 10A 14VT, 1 hp 125-250 Vac; ENEC: 16(4)A 250V 2 2 How To Order--High Inrush, Non-Illuminated Rating UL/CSA: 22A 125 Vac, 16A 250 Vac, 6A 125 VacL, 10A 14VT, 1 hp 125-250 Vac; ENEC: 16(4)A 250V 2 Lens/Rocker Color A = Amber G = Green R = Red W = White (clear) Lamp Voltage 0 = No lamp 4 = 6V filament 5 5 = 12V filament 5 1 = 125V neon 2 = 250V neon Base and Bezel Color 1 = Black 2 = White 3 = Red Legend Type (Optional) 725 = ON/OFF See Most Popular Legends table on Page V11-T2-55. 2 2 2 2 2 Terminal Type E = 6.3 mm tabs/ 0.25 in quick connect 2 Notes 1 1500 Type--Lever depressed toward terminal #2. 1500H Type--Lever depressed toward terminal #3. 2500H Type--Lever depressed toward terminals #13 and #26. 2 High inrush capabilities available only on basic catalog numbers beginning with 1500H. 3 See Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-80. 4 Standard rating only. 5 6V, 12V filament lamps are not UL, CSA, or ENEC. Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com 2 2 2 V11-T2-47 2.5 Rockers 1500/2500--Midsize AC Rated 2 Technical Data and Specifications 2 1500/2500--Midsize AC Rated Description Specification Description Specification 2 Ratings See selection tables on Pages V11-T2-46 and V11-T2-47. Mechanical life 50,000 cycles minimum Seal level IP40 Insulation resistance 50M ohms minimum Dielectric withstand 1000V rms minimum 2 Circuits Standard 1PST, 1PDT, 2PST, 2PDT, maintained and momentary 2 High inrush option 1PST, 2PST, maintained Standard 6.3 mm Tabs/0.250 in Quick Connect Hi-lite option 1PST, maintained Optional Solder lug 2 Contact mechanism Standard Slow-make/slow-break butt contact Common (center) 2 High inrush option Slow-make/slow-break butt contact with mechanical break End Copper Make--High inrush option 100A peak inrush at 250 Vac for 10 ms for 10,000 cycles minimum Lamp Brass Break--High inrush option 16A, 250 Vac for 10,000 cycles minimum Mounting See dimensions below Contact material Silver inlay over copper 32 to 185F (0 to 85C) 2 Operating temperature range Contact resistance 10M ohms max. at 1A, 4 Vdc 2 Dimensions 2 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 2 2 2 Termination material 0.287 (7.30) Max. Matte Finish Bezel Matte Finish Rocker (Non-Illuminated) Translucent Rocker (Illuminated) 1.248 (31.70) Max. 0.024 0.004 (0.60 0.10) Combination Quick Connect/ Solder Lug Code "E" 0.249 0.001 (6.325 0.03) Wide 0.032 0.001 (0.815 0.02) Thick 0.595 (15.11) Max. 2 2 2 2 2 2 Hole O0.098 (O2.50) Nom. 0.380 0.002.0.003 (9.62 0.07/0.08) 2 0.422 0.003 (10.73 0.08) 0.756 (19.20) Nom. 0.042 0.002 (2.05 0.05) 0.982 0.010 (24.95 0.30) 1.070 (27.18) Max. 0.909 0.017 (23.09 0.44) 0.888 0.002 (22.55 0.05) 0.483 0.003 (12.27 0.07) 1.075 0.004 (27.30 0.10) 0.351 0.010/0.011 (8.90 0.25/0.26) Panel Opening Panel Thickness: 0.031-0.118 (0.75-3.00) Code "B" Alternative Solder Lug Only 2500/2500H Type Base 0.287 (7.30) Max. 2 2 Copper fine silver-plated 1500/1500H Type Base 2 2 Terminal types 1.248 (31.70) Max. Matte Finish Bezel Matte Finish Rocker (Non-Illuminated) Translucent Rocker (Illuminated) 0.024 0.004 (0.60 0.10) 1.028 (26.11) Max. 2 2 Hole O0.098 (O2.50) Nom. 2 0.380 0.002/0.003 (9.62 0.07/0.08) 0.909 0.017 (23.09 0.44) 0.351 0.010/0.011 0.756 (8.90 0.25/0.26) (19.20) Nom. Code "B" Alternative Solder Lug Only 2 2 Combination Quick Connect/ Solder Lug Code "E" 0.249 0.001 (6.325 0.03) Wide 0.032 0.001 (0.815 0.02) Thick 0.042 0.002 (2.05 0.05) 0.422 0.003 (10.73 0.08) 0.982 0.011 (24.95 0.30) 0.888 0.002 (22.55 0.05) Hole O0.106 (O2.70) Nom. 1.070 (27.18) Max. 0.876 0.004 (22.25 0.10) 1.075 0.004 (27.30 0.10) 1.026 0.002 (26.05 0.05) 0.327 (8.31) Nom. Panel Opening Panel Thickness: 0.030-0.118 (0.75-3.00) 0.658 0.004 (16.712 0.14) 0.868 0.002 (22.05 0.05) 2 V11-T2-48 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com Hole O0.106 (O2.70) Nom. 0.474 0.002 (12.05 0.05) Rockers 1600/2600--Midsize AC Only 2.6 Contents 1600/2600 Series Description Page 1600/2600--Midsize AC Only Non-Illuminated Rocker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illuminated Rocker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Splashguard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High Inrush Rockers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-50 V11-T2-51 V11-T2-52 V11-T2-53 V11-T2-54 V11-T2-54 V11-T2-55 V11-T2-55 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Product Description Options Eaton's 1600/2600 series of midsize snap-in rocker and paddle switches have worldwide approvals at up to 16A, 250 Vac. One switch can be used for both domestic and foreign markets. High Inrush Option Ideal applications include appliances, electronic instrumentation, data processing, communications, medical equipment, office equipment and many more. A wide circuit variety is offered in a choice of standard and custom colors for illuminated and nonilluminated versions. Custom legends are available on the switch lever and bezel. High inrush and splashguard are also available. This version features a uniquely designed seal that resists moisture and water, making it ideally suited for marine, RV and food processing applications. The oversized nylon lever with smooth, matte finish features a convenient thumb depression to ensure effortless touch control. Two-pole switches feature both a thumb depression and a convex curve. See Page V11-T2-52. The 1600H/2600H is designed to handle high inrush currents up to 100A peak inrush for 10 milliseconds. 2 Note: See Catalog Number Selection for more detail. 2 International Approvals Splashguard Option 2 Standards and Certifications 2 UL Recognized CSA Certified 1 ENEC RoHS Compliant 2 2 2 EN EC 2 2 Notes 1 Splashguard option is cRU marked only. 2 Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for the most up-to-date list of verified part numbers. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com V11-T2-49 2.6 Rockers 1600/2600--Midsize AC Only Non-Illuminated Rocker 2 To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base circuit number and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers. 2 2 2 2 2 2 Catalog Number Selection How To Order--Non-Illuminated Rocker Example: 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Rating UL/CSA: 16A 125-250 Vac, 10A 28 Vdc, 8A 14VT; ENEC: 16(4)A 250V UL/CSA: 16A 125-250 Vac, 10A 28 Vdc, 8A 14VT; ENEC: 10(2)A 250V UL/CSA: 10A 125-250 Vac, 10A 28 Vdc, 8A 14VT; ENEC: 10(2)A 250V UL/CSA: 16A 125-250 Vac, 10A 28 Vdc, 8A 14VT; ENEC: 16(4)A 250V UL/CSA: 16A 125-250 Vac, 10A 28 Vdc, 8A 14VT; ENEC: 10(2)A 250V UL/CSA: 10A 125-250 Vac, 10A 28 Vdc, 8A 14VT; ENEC: 10(2)A 250V Poles and Throw 1PST 1PDT Circuit with Rocker in ... UP CENTER Position Position ON MOM. ON ON ON ON NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 1600 M 2 OFF OFF MOM. OFF ON MOM. ON Rocker 1600 1601 1605 1602 1603 Paddle 1 P1600 P1601 P1605 P1602 P1603 Circuit Number 1 3 4 5 7 1PDT ON OFF ON 1604 P1604 6 1PDT MOM. ON MOM. ON OFF OFF MOM. ON ON 1606 1607 P1606 P1607 9 8 ON MOM. ON ON ON ON NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE OFF OFF MOM. OFF ON MOM. ON 2600 2601 2605 2602 2603 P2600 P2601 P2605 P2602 P2603 10 11 12 13 15 2PDT ON OFF ON 2604 P2604 14 2PDT MOM. ON MOM. ON OFF OFF MOM. ON ON 2606 2607 P2606 P2607 17 16 2PST 2PDT 3 Finish 4 Blank = Standard M = Matte Base and Bezel Color 1 = Black 2 = White 3 = Red Rocker/Paddle Color 1 = Black 2 = White 3 = Red Notes 1 Paddles are UL, CSA only. 2 1600 Type--Lever depressed toward terminal #3. 2600 Type--Lever depressed toward terminals #13 and #26. 3 See Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-80. 4 To order the standard, add a "dash" to the catalog number. Example: 1600-11E. 2 2 2 2 2 V11-T2-50 E 038 Code letters and/or numbers. Add to base circuit number. Base Circuit Number DOWN 2 Position 1 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com Terminal Type E = 6.3 mm tabs/0.25 in quick connect B = Solder lugs Legend Type (Optional) 038 = ON/OFF See Most Popular Legends table on Page V11-T2-55. 2.6 Rockers 1600/2600--Midsize AC Only Illuminated Rocker To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base circuit number and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers. 2 2 2 2 Catalog Number Selection 2 How To Order--Illuminated Rocker 2 Example: 1621 X W 5 3 E 038 2 X = Independent lamp Rating UL/CSA: 16A 125-250 Vac, 10A 28 Vdc, 8A 14VT; ENEC: 16(4)A 250V ON MOM. ON ON MOM. ON ON ON ON NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 1PDT ON OFF ON 1624X 4 1PDT MOM. ON MOM. ON OFF OFF MOM. ON ON 1626X 1627X 4 2PST ON MOM. ON ON NONE NONE NONE OFF OFF MOM. OFF 2600 2601 2605 28 30 31 -- Indicator -- -- 1609 32 Poles and Throw 1PST 2 Code letters and/or numbers. Add to base circuit number. DOWN 1 Position Base Circuit Number 1600 OFF 1601 OFF 1620X OFF 1621X OFF 1625X MOM. OFF ON 1622X MOM. ON 1623X 1PDT UL/CSA: 16A 125-250 Vac, 10A 28 Vdc, 8A 14VT; ENEC: 10(2)A 250V UL/CSA: 10A 125-250 Vac, 10A 28 Vdc, 8A 14VT; ENEC: 10(2)A 250V UL/CSA: 16A 125-250 Vac, 10A 28 Vdc, 8A 14VT; ENEC: 16(4)A 250V -- Circuit with Rocker in ... UP CENTER Position Position 2 Circuit Number 18 21 20 4 3 Lens/Rocker Color A = Amber G = Green R = Red W = White (clear) Base and Bezel Color 1 = Black 2 = White 3 = Red 4 4 4 4 Lamp Voltage 0 = No lamp 1 = 125V neon 2 = 250V neon 4 = 6V filament 5 5 = 12V filament 5 Terminal Type E = 6.3 mm tabs/0.25 in quick connect B = Solder lugs Legend Type (Optional) 038 = ON/OFF See Most Popular Legends table on Page V11-T2-55. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 1600 Type--Lever depressed toward terminal #3. 2600 Type--Lever depressed toward terminals #13 and #26. 2 #1600--#1609 switches are supplied in 1600 type base. #1620--#1627 switches are supplied in 2600 type base. (Must have an "X" code.) #2600--#2605 switches are supplied in 2600 type base. 3 See Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-80. 4 All independent lamps for IP switches to be assembled from terminal positions #24 and #26. 5 6V, 12V filament lamps are not UL, CSA, or ENEC. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com V11-T2-51 2.6 Rockers 1600/2600--Midsize AC Only Splashguard 2 To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base circuit number and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers. 2 2 2 2 Catalog Number Selection 2 How To Order--Splashguard 1 Example: 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Rating Poles and Throw 2 1PST 16A, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac 1PDT 10A, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac 16A, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac 16A, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac 10A, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac 1PDT 2PST 2PDT 2PDT Circuit with Rocker in ... UP CENTER Position Position NONE NONE NONE ON MOM. ON MOM. ON NONE NONE NONE ON MOM. ON MOM. ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF DOWN Position ON MOM. ON ON ON MOM. ON ON ON MOM. ON ON ON MOM. ON ON B1600 1 Base Circuit Number B1600 B1601 B1602 B1604 B1606 B1607 B2600 B2601 B2602 B2604 B2606 B2607 Circuit Number 3 1 2 5 6 9 8 10 11 13 14 17 16 Base Color 1 = Black Rocker Color 1 = Black 2 = White 3 = Red 4 = Green 5 = Gray Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Splashguard O 0.560 (14.22) (2) 17 1.800 (45.72) 1.000 (25.40) 2 0.474 0.001 (12.05 0.05) 2 2 Hole O 0.106 nom. (2.70) 0.868 0.001 (22.05 0.05) Single-Pole 0.81 + 0.02/-0.01 (0.032) Thick Two-Pole 1.026 0.001 (26.05 0.05) 0.424 + 0.003/-0.004 (10.75 + 0.11/-0.10) 0.758 0.005 (19.26 0.14) 1.070 (27.18) 0.888 0.001 (22.05 0.05) 2 2 Hole O 0.106 nom. (2.70) 0.500 (12.70) 0.249 (6.32 + 0.03/-0.02) Wide 2 2 Terminal Type E = 6.3 mm tabs/0.25 in quick connect Dimensions 2 2 E Code letters and/or numbers. Add to base circuit number. 2 2 2 0.876 0.003 (22.25 0.10) 0.483 0.002 (12.27 0.007) 1.075 0.003 (27.30 0.10) Panel Thickness 0.030-0.118 (0.75-3.00) 1.075 0.003 (27.30 0.10) Panel Opening Notes 1 Splashguard is CUR marked, but does not have ENEC approval. 2 All circuits also recommended 10A, 28 Vdc. 3 See Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-80. 2 2 V11-T2-52 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com Panel Thickness 0.030-0.118 (0.75-3.00) Panel Opening Rockers 1600/2600--Midsize AC Only 2.6 High Inrush Rockers 2 To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base circuit number and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers. 2 2 2 2 Catalog Number Selection How To Order--Non-Illuminated High Inrush Rockers Example: Rating UL/CSA: 1 22A 125 Vac, 16A 250 Vac, 6A 125 VacL, 10A 14VT, 1 hp 125-250 Vac; ENEC: 16(4)A 250V Poles and Throw 1PST 2PST Circuit with Rocker in ... UP CENTER Position Position ON ON ON NONE NONE NONE 1600H DOWN 2 Position Base Circuit Number OFF 1600H OFF 1620H 3 OFF 2600H M 2 1 2 E 038 2 Code letters and/or numbers. Add to base circuit number. 2 Circuit Number Finish 5 4 E = 6.3 mm tabs/0.25 in quick connect Base and Bezel Color 1 = Black 2 = White 3 = Red 10 2 Terminal Type Blank = Standard M = Matte 1 2 2 2 Legend Type (Optional) 038 = ON/OFF See Most Popular Legends table on Page V11-T2-55. 2 2 Rocker Color 1 = Black 2 = White 3 = Red 2 2 How To Order--Illuminated High Inrush Rockers Example: Rating UL/CSA: 1 22A 125 Vac, 16A 250 Vac, 6A 125 VacL, 10A 14VT, 1 hp 125-250 Vac; ENEC: 16(4)A 250V -- Circuit with Rocker in ... UP CENTER Position Position 1600H 1PST ON ON NONE NONE DOWN 2 Position Base Circuit Number OFF 1600H OFF 1620HX 6 2PST ON NONE OFF Poles and Throw 2600H R 2 1 E 038 2 Code letters and/or numbers. Add to base circuit number. Circuit Number 5 18 19 Lens/Rocker Color A = Amber G = Green R = Red W = White (clear) Base and Bezel Color 1 = Black 2 = White 3 = Red 2 Legend Type (Optional) 038 = ON/OFF See Most Popular Legends table on Page V11-T2-55. 28 Terminal Type -- Indicator Indicator -- 1609 32 Lamp Voltage 0 = No lamp 1 = 125V neon 2 = 250V neon 4 = 6V filament 8 5 = 12V filament 8 6 = 24V filament 8 2 2 2 2 E = 6.3 mm tabs/0.25 in quick connect 2 2 2 Notes 1 UL, CSA: 1 hp at 125V or 250 Vac; 6A, 125 Vac (L) rating; 10A, 14 Vdc. Marked on request only. 2 1600H Type--Rocker depressed toward terminal #2. 2600H Type--Rocker depressed toward terminals #13 and #26. 3 1620H switch is supplied in 2600H base. 4 No code required. 5 See Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-80. 6 1620H switch is supplied in 2600H type base. (Must have "X" code.) 7 1600H Type--Rocker depressed toward terminal #3. 1620H Type--Rocker depressed toward terminals #13 and #26. 2600H Type--Rocker depressed toward terminals #13 and #26. 8 6V, 12V, 24V filament lamps are not UL, CSA, or ENEC. 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com V11-T2-53 2.6 2 2 2 2 2 Rockers 1600/2600--Midsize AC Only Technical Data and Specifications 1600/2600--Midsize AC Rated Description Specification Description Specification Ratings See selection tables on Pages V11-T2-50 to V11-T2-53. Insulation resistance 100M ohms minimum Dielectric withstand 1000V rms minimum Circuits Standard 1PST, 1PDT, 2PST, 2PDT maintained and momentary High inrush option 1PST, 2PST maintained Terminal types Contact mechanism Standard Slow-make/slow-break butt contact High inrush option Standard 6.3 mm tabs/0.250 in quick connect Optional Solder lug Termination material Slow-make/slow-break butt contact with mechanical break Common (center) Copper fine silver-plated 2 Make--High inrush option 100A, 250 Vac for 10 ms for 10,000 cycles min. End Copper Break--High inrush option 16A, 250 Vac for 10,000 cycles min. Lamp 2 Contact material Silver inlay over copper Mounting See dimensions below Contact resistance 10M ohms max. at 1A, 4 Vdc Operating temperature range 32 to 185F (0 to 85C) 2 Mechanical life 50,000 cycles minimum 2 Dimensions 2 1600/1600H Type Base Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 2 36 Combination Quick Connect/Solder Lug Code "E" 0.249 0.001 (6.33 0.03) Wide 0.032 0.001 (0.82 0.02) Thick 0.279 0.004 (7.10 0.10) 0.024 0.004 (0.60 0.10) 2 2 2 2 2 Hole O0.098 (O2.50) Nom. 1.075 0.004 (27.30 0.10) Code "B" Alternative Solder Lug Only Panel Thickness 0.030-0.118 (0.75-3.00) Panel Opening 2600/2600H Type Base 1.197 (30.40) Max. 0.024 0.004 (0.60 0.10) 36 0.287 (7.30) Max. 18 1.023 0.004 (26.00 0.10) 2 0.982 0.010 (24.95 0.30) 0.042 0.002 (2.05 0.05) Combination Quick Connect/Solder Lug Code "E" 0.249 0.001 (6.33 0.03) Wide (0.032 0.001 (0.82 0.02) Thick 2 2 0.474 0.002 (12.05 0.05) 0.483 0.003 (12.27 0.07) 0.756 (19.20) Nom. 2 2 Hole O0.106 (O2.70) Nom. 0.888 0.002 (22.55 0.05) 0.909 0.017 (23.09 0.44) 2 2 1.070 (27.18) Max. 0.380 0.002/0.003 (9.62 0.07/0.08) 2 2 0.042 0.002 (2.05 0.05) 0.982 0.010 (24.95 0.30) 0.422 0.004 (10.73 0.08) 0.351 0.010/0.11 (8.90 0.25/0.26) 2 2 18 0.287 (7.30) Max. 2 2 Brass 0.622 0.007 (15.80 0.20) 1.082 0.004 (26.10 0.10) 0.422 0.004 (10.73 0.08) 0.888 0.002 (22.55 0.05) 0.327 (8.31) Nom. 1.070 (27.18) Max. 0.279 0.004 (7.10 0.10) Hole O0.098 (O2.50) Nom. 0.380 0.002/0.003 (9.62 0.07/0.08) 0.351 0.010/0.11 (8.90 0.25/0.26) 0.756 (19.20) Nom. Code "B" Alternative Solder Lug Only 2 V11-T2-54 0.876 0.004 (22.25 0.10) 0.909 0.017 (23.09 0.44) 1.075 0.004 (27.30 0.10) Hole O0.106 (O2.70) Nom. 0.636 0.030 (16.17 0.755) 0.866 + 0.004/-0.008 (22.00 + 0.10/-0.20) Panel Thickness 0.030-0.118 (0.75-3.00) Panel Opening Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com Rockers 1600/2600--Midsize AC Only 2.6 Accessories 2 Panel Cutout Fillers If panel cutout fillers are required in anticipation of future rocker or paddle switch installation, order Catalog Number 1609DUM. 2 Specify color of base and filler portion by using the standard two-digit color code (base and lever) for non-illuminated switches. 2 2 Example: 1609DUM11 2 Legends 2 How To Order--Legends 2 To order a rocker with a legend marking, add the three-character code to the end of the catalog number. Example: 1500-21E becomes 1500-21E038. Legends are for 1500/2500 and 1600/2600 only. 2 Most Popular Legends 1 Legend Code Legend 014 Code Legend 653 2 Code 2 735 2 I 0 ON 0 Legend 714 OFF I Code 0 2 023 POW 656 725 746 2 ER I 2 0 038 657 730 ON 0 O FF I 039 671 2 752 2 2 734 2 760 2 ON OFF 0 2 630 2 2 2 Note 1 For additional legend options, contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com V11-T2-55 2.7 2 Rockers Rockette--General Purpose AC Rated Contents Rockette Series Description 2 Page Rockette--General Purpose AC Rated Standard Rockette Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sealed Rockette Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8058 Series Sealed Rockette Switches. . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2 2 V11-T2-57 V11-T2-58 V11-T2-59 V11-T2-60 V11-T2-60 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Product Description Features and Benefits Options These rocker switches offer the widest selection of features available, providing the design flexibility needed to fill the requirements of a variety of applications. They are available in two versions: standard and sealed. Voltages 110 Vac neon 14 Vdc and 28 Vdc On the illuminated version, the lamp is wired to operate in conjunction with the switch on single-throw circuit; on double-throw circuits, the lamp is independent of the switch Standard and Sealed Additional colors of rockers and bezels are available Hot stamped or pad printed legends on rocker and bezel Paddle actuators Single rocker operator on two- and three-pole circuits Dry circuits capabilities Special ratings Reversing jumpers Dead back cover (two-pole base) with wire leads Special circuits Printed circuit terminals and other terminal types Metal snap-in bezels Foam dust seal The Sealed Rockette features a silicone rubber seal that protects contacts and mechanisms. All switches resist contaminants such as sand, dust and moisture with both a base-to-frame seal and an actuator seal. Nonilluminated and illuminated versions are available. For Sealed Rockette selection, see table on Page V11-T2-58. 2 2 2 Mounting Flush (two screws), sub-panel and snap-in mounting Snap-in Mounting Convenient front panel or sub-panel snap-in mounting Available in single- and twopole non-illuminated or in single-pole illuminated Rockette switches. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative for three- and four-pole circuits Unless otherwise noted, all switches with snap-in mounting are UL Recognized and CSA Certified 2 Sealed Only Special voltage bulbs Industry standard connector available Two-pole illuminated circuit 2 2 2 2 2 V11-T2-56 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com Standards and Certifications UL Recognized CSA Certified RoHS Compliant 1 Note 1 Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for the most up-to-date list of verified part numbers. 2.7 Rockers Rockette--General Purpose AC Rated Standard Rockette Switches To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base circuit number and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers. 2 2 2 2 2 Catalog Number Selection 2 How To Order--Standard Rockette Switches Example: Rating 6A, 125 Vac 3A, 250 Vac Poles and Throw 2PST 1000W, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac 20A, 250 Vac 6A, 125 Vac 3A, 250 Vac 15A, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac 1 3/4 hp, 250 Vac DOWN Position ON ON ON MOM. ON MOM. ON ON MOM. ON ON ON MOM. ON MOM. ON NONE OFF NONE OFF OFF NONE NONE OFF NONE OFF OFF OFF ON ON MOM. ON ON OFF OFF ON ON MOM. ON ON 2PST ON NONE OFF 8150K21 C 2PST ON ON ON NONE OFF NONE OFF ON ON 8155K21 8155K20 8155K22 C 4PDT ON OFF ON 8130K20 4PST ON ON ON NONE OFF NONE OFF ON ON 8140K21 8140K20 8140K22 2PDT 2PDT 2PDT 4PDT E 6 T 50 2 Code letters and/or numbers. Add to base circuit number. Base Circuit Number 8132K21 8132K20 8132K22 8138K20 8138K30 8142K21 8147K21 8142K20 8142K22 8148K20 8148K30 2PST 15A, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac 3/4 hp, 250 Vac Circuit with Rocker in ... UP CENTER Position Position 8132K21 2 3 Circuit Number C 3 3 D C D D 3 F E F 4 Mounting Frame 5 All Except 8130K20, 8140K20, 8140K21, 8140K22 E = Mounting, 2-pole F = Mounting, 2-pole G = Mounting, 2-pole W = Snap-in X = Snap-in Y = Snap-in Z = Snap-in 8130K20, 8140K20, 8140K21, 8140K22 H = Mounting, 4-pole Rocker/Paddle Style All Except 8130K20, 8140K20, 8140K21, 8140K22 6 = 2-pole 7 = 2-pole 20 = 2-pole 7 37 = 2-pole 8 8130K20, 8140K20, 8140K21, 8140K22 14 = 4-pole 2 Rocker/Paddle Color M = White T = Red V = Black Terminal Type 50 = Screw 51 = Solder lugs 52 = 0.250 in spade 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 6 2 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 These switches also have marked rating of 7A at 277 Vac and 3/4 hp at 277 Vac. 2 Add code letters and numbers for mounting frame, rocker style and color and terminal construction. 3 Also rated 2A, 277 Vac; 2.5A, L125 Vac. 4 See Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-80. 5 See Frame Styles on Page V11-T2-61. 6 See Rocker Styles on Page V11-T2-63. 7 Cannot be used with snap-in mounting bezel. 8 Recommended for use with snap-in mounting. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com V11-T2-57 2.7 Rockers Rockette--General Purpose AC Rated Sealed Rockette Switches 2 To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base circuit number and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers. 2 2 2 2 Catalog Number Selection 2 How To Order--Sealed Rockette Switches, Non-Illuminated 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Rating 15A, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac 3/4 hp, 250 Vac Poles and Throw 1PST 1PDT 2PST 15A, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac 3/4 hp, 250 Vac 2PDT ON ON ON MOM. ON MOM. ON ON ON ON MOM. ON MOM. ON Rating 15A, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac Poles and Throw 1PST 1PDT ON MOM. ON 2 2 0.250 in Spade 8055K23 8055K20 8055K26 8055K29 8055K32 8055K43 8055K40 8055K46 8055K49 8055K52 Solder Lugs 8055K24 8055K21 8055K27 8055K30 8055K33 8055K44 8055K41 8055K47 8055K50 8055K53 Screw 8055K25 8055K22 8055K28 8055K31 8055K34 8055K45 8055K42 8055K48 8055K51 8055K54 Code letters and/or numbers. Add to base circuit number. Circuit Number 1 A B C D Mounting Frame E = Standard F = Standard L = Standard X = Snap-in W = Snap-in Z = Snap-in 2 Rocker Color M = White V = Black Rocker Style 3 1 = Two-face serrated 2 = Three-face smooth 7 = Concave NONE OFF DOWN Position OFF ON 8057K23 Base Circuit Number Terminal Type 0.250 in Spade 8057K23 8057K29 Circuit Solder Number 1 Screw Lugs 8057K24 8057K25 G 8057K30 8057K31 H E 1 5 V Mounting Frame E = Standard F = Standard L = Standard X = Snap-in W = Snap-in Z = Snap-in Notes 1 See Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-80. 2 See Frame Styles on Page V11-T2-61. 3 See Rocker Styles on Page V11-T2-63. 2 2 2 V11-T2-58 1 Code letters and/or numbers. Add to base circuit number. 2 Rocker Style 3 3 = Serrated w/1 lens 5 = Smooth w/1 lens 8 = Concave w/1 lens 2 2 Base Circuit Number Terminal Type V Bulb Voltage 1 = Neon 110V 3 = 14 Vdc filament 4 = 28 Vdc filament 2 2 OFF ON ON ON MOM. ON OFF ON ON ON MOM. ON Circuit with Rocker in ... UP CENTER Position Position 2 2 NONE OFF NONE OFF OFF NONE OFF NONE OFF OFF DOWN Position Example: 2 2 Circuit with Rocker in ... UP CENTER Position Position E 2 How To Order--Sealed Rockette Switches, Illuminated 2 2 8055K23 Example: 2 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com Rocker Color M = White V = Black Lens Color 1 = Clear 2 = Red 4 = Amber 5 = Blue Rockers Rockette--General Purpose AC Rated 2.7 8058 Series Sealed Rockette Switches To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base circuit number and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers. 2 2 2 2 2 Catalog Number Selection 2 How To Order--Sealed Rockette Switches, Non-Illuminated Example: Circuit with Rocker in ... Rating 30A, 125 Vac 25A, 250 Vac 3/4 hp, 125 Vac 2 hp, 250 Vac UP Position Poles and Throw 8058K28 Z 7 DOWN Position Terminal Type 2 Code letters and/or numbers. Add to base circuit number. Base Circuit Number CENTER Position 2 V 0.250 in Spade Solder Lugs Screw Circuit Number 1 2 1PST ON NONE OFF N/A N/A 8058K10 A 1PDT ON OFF ON N/A N/A 8058K22 B 1PDT ON NONE ON N/A N/A 8058K28 B 1PDT MOM ON OFF ON N/A N/A 8058K31 B 1PDT MOM ON OFF MOM ON N/A N/A 8058K34 B 3 Mounting Frame E = Standard ears up with two tapped holes F = Standard flat with two holes X = Metal snap-in Z = Standard plastic snap-in W = Contour plastic snap-in L = Standard ears up with two holes 2 Rocker Color M = White T = Red V = Black 2 2 2 2 2 4 Rocker Style 1 = Two-face serrated 2 = Three-face smooth 7 = Concave 2 2 8058K22E7V 8058K10X7T 8058K28Z7V 2 2 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 Supplied with terminal screws, (Cat. No. 11-8616), unassembled. 2 See Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-80. 3 See Frame Styles on Page V11-T2-61. 4 See Rocker Styles on Page V11-T2-63. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com V11-T2-59 2.7 2 2 2 2 Rockette--General Purpose AC Rated Technical Data and Specifications Rockette--General Purpose AC Rated Description Specification Description Specification Ratings and circuits Contact mechanism See selection tables on Pages V11-T2-57 to V11-T2-59. Switch ratings at 125 Vac also apply to 28 Vdc. Slow-make/slow-break contact mechanism. Butt action contact mechanism designed specifically for use on AC and low voltage DC applications 1000W rated Movable--Checon SK015B contact material welded to contactor Stationary--Copper with cad-oxide contact face button Terminal types Screw terminals--Brass designed to accept #6-32 x 3/16 binding head screws (Cat. No. 811-2), furnished unassembled Solder lug--0.250 in (6.35 mm) spade Termination material Screw and spade--Brass Solder-- Tintillate-plated brass Lamp voltages 110 Vac neon 14 Vdc and 28 Vdc Mounting Flush (two screws), sub-panel and snap-in mounting 2 Contact material 3-6A rated 2 10-15A rated 2 Rockers 20A rated 2 Movable--Silver-plated copper Stationary--Silver-plated copper Movable--Silver-plated copper with fine or coin silver contact face button Stationary--Copper with fine or coin silver contact face button Movable--Silver-plated copper with cad-oxide contact face button Stationary--Copper with cad-oxide contact face button 2 Dimensions 2 Base Standard Rockette Switch Dimensions Snap-In Mounting Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Terminals Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Type W Type X 2 2 2 #6-32 x 0.188 (4.78) Lg. Binding Head Term. Screw 0.125 (3.18) Dia. Hole 0.040 (1.02) 2 0.188 (4.78) 2 Solder Lug Terminal Hot Tin Dipped 2 0.288 (7.32) Contoured Snap-In Bezel, Two-Pole Base 0.040 (1.02) Snap-In Bezel, Single-, Twoand Four-Pole Bases 1.550 0.010 (39.37 0.254) 2.06 (52.32) Screw Terminal 1.12 (28.44) 2 0.900 0.010 (22.86 0.254) 2 Type Y Type Z 2 Sub-Panel Snap-In Mounting Bezel, Single- and Two-Pole Bases Snap-In Mounting Bezel, Two-Pole Base Only 1.94 (49.27) 1.700 (43.18) 2 2 2 2 2 0.960 (24.38) Panel Opening 2 125C Approx. 2 1.450 1.190 (36.83) (30.23) 2 0.680 (17.27) 2 0.830 (21.08) 2 Panel Thickness 0.040-0.140 (1.02-3.56) 2 V11-T2-60 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com 2.7 Rockers Rockette--General Purpose AC Rated Frame Types and Rocker/Paddle Styles for Standing Switches--Non-Illuminated Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 2 Two-Pole Mounting Frame Types 2 Type E Type F Style 37 with Type X 1.940 (49.28) 2.500 (63.50) 1.620 (41.15) 2.250 (57.15) CC 0.380 (9.65) 2 0.100 (2.54) CC 0.380 (9.65) 0.850 0.030 (21.59 0.76) 2 0.380 0.030 (9.65 0.76) 0.150 (3.81) Dia. 2 Holes #6-32 Tap 2 Holes 2 17.5 0.200 (5.08) 2 0.640 0.254 (16.26 6.45) Type G 2 2.120 (53.85) 1.750 (44.45) 2 CC 0.380 (9.65) 2 Mounting Type Recommended with This Style 0.150 (3.81) Dia. 2 Holes 2 Two-Pole Rocker Styles Style 6 Style 7 0.650 (16.51) 17.5 0.650 (16.51) R 0.610 (R 15.49) R 0.610 (R 15.49) 0.660 (16.76) CC CC Four-Pole Mounting Frame Type Type H 2 R 0.100 (R 2.54) 2 0.830 (21.08) 0.100 (2.54) 0.880 (22.35) 0.580 (14.73) 2 Style 20 2 CC 2 2 Four-Pole Rocker Styles Style 14 1.940 (49.28) 1.620 (41.15) 1.300 (33.02) 2 R 0.610 (R 15.49) 2 CC 2 CC 2 #6-32 Tap 2 Holes 2 2 Reference Dimension "CC"--Top of Frame to Bottom of Terminal Dimension in Inches (mm) Dimension in Inches (mm) Mounting Frame Type Mounting Frame Type Two-Pole Four-Pole 2 Rocker Style Type E Type F Type G Recommended Panel Opening Rocker Style Type H Recommended Panel Opening 2 6 0.08 (2.03) 0.42 (10.67) 0.42 (10.67) 0.69 x 1.25 (17.53 x 31.75) 14 1.34 x 1.25 (34.04 x 31.75) 7 0.08 (2.03) 0.42 (10.67) 0.42 (10.67) 0.69 x 1.25 (17.53 x 31.75) 2 20 N/A 0.42 (10.67) 0.42 (10.67) N/A 37 N/A N/A N/A N/A 0.08 (2.03) 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com V11-T2-61 2.7 2 2 2 2 Rockers Rockette--General Purpose AC Rated Base Sealed Rockette Switch Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Sealed Two-Pole--Mounting Frame Type E--Rocker Style 1 17.5 1.940 (49.28) 0.080 (2.03) 1.620 (41.15) 2 Quick Connect Term. 0.648 (16.46) #6-32 x 0.188 (4.78) Lg. Binding Head Term. Screws 6-32 Tap 0.250 (6.35) 0.750 (19.05) 0.031 (0.79) Ref. 0.288 0.040 (7.32) (1.02) Screw Terminal 1.330 (33.83) 2 2 Sealed Two-Pole--Mounting Frame Type F--Rocker Style 1 2 R 1.135 (R 28.83) 2 2 Panel Opening 35 17.5 2.500 (63.50) R 0.610 (R 15.49) 0.722 (18.34) 0.453 (11.51) 0.032 (0.81) 0.031/0.033 (0.79/0.84) 0.250 (6.35) 0.062 (1.57) 2.250 (57.15) 2 Mtg. Holes 0.172 (4.37) Dia. 2.020 (51.31) 0.260 (6.60) 2 BB 1.062 (26.97) 2 0.031 (0.79) 0.250 (6.35) Type X Solder Lug Terminal Hot Tin Dipped 0.390 (9.91) #6-32 x 0.188 (4.78) Lg. Binding Head Term. Screws 0.031 (0.79) Ref. 0.040 0.288 (1.02) (7.32) Screw Terminal Type Z 1.550 0.010 (39.37 0.254) 1.700 (43.18) 2 0.960 (24.38) 0.900 0.010 (22.86 0.254) Snap-In Mounting Bezel Snap-In Bezel 2 Reference Dimensions "AA" and "BB" in Inches (mm) 1 Terminal Type Dimension "AA" (Two-Pole) E Frame F Frame L Frame Dimension "BB" W Frame X Frame Z Frame All Frames Screw 1.39 (35.33) 1.05 (26.62) 1.39 (35.33) 1.37 (34.82) 1.39 (35.34) 1.37 (34.82) 0.30 (7.62) Solder lug 1.36 (34.57) 1.02 (25.86) 1.36 (34.57) 1.34 (34.06) 1.36 (34.51) 1.34 (34.06) 0.27 (6.86) 0.250 in spade 1.53 (38.89) 1.19 (30.18) 1.53 (38.89) 1.51 (38.38) 1.53 (38.89) 1.51 (38.38) 0.44 (11.18) 8058 Screw 2 1.509 (38.33) 1.145 (29.08) 1.509 (38.33) 1.808 (45.92) 1.627 (41.33) 1.528 (38.81) 0.460 (11.68) Notes 1 Dimension "AA"--Top of frame to bottom of terminal; "BB"--from bottom of base to bottom of terminal. 2 #8-32 x 1/4 Phillips screw. 2 V11-T2-62 0.040 (1.02) 0.188 (4.78) 1.620 (41.15) 2 2 1.090 (27.69) 0.125 (3.18) Dia. Hole 0.280 (7.11) 0.750 (19.05) 2 2 Terminals 0.648 (16.46) 35 0.960 AA (24.38) 2 Panel Thickness 0.040-0.140 (1.02-3.56) 1.330 (33.83) Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Sealed Two-Pole Switch--Mounting Frame Type W--Rocker Stye 7 2 0.680 (17.27) 0.830 (21.80) 0.750 (19.05) 2 2 0.648 (16.48) 0.294 (7.47) Snap-in Mounting Frame Dimensions 0.126 (3.20) 1.190 (30.23) 1.450 (36.83) 0.094 (2.39) AA BB 0.032 (0.81) Ref. 125C Approx. Max. 0.812 (20.62) 2 2 0.040 (1.02) Solder Lug Terminal Hot Tin Dipped 0.380 (9.65) BB 2 2 0.188 (4.78) 0.094 (2.39) 0.062 (1.57) AA 0.032 (0.81) 2 0.125 (3.18) Dia. Hole Max. 0.812 (20.62) 0.380 (9.65) 2 2 Terminals R 0.610 (R 15.49) Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com 2.7 Rockers Rockette--General Purpose AC Rated Dimensions for Frame Type and Rocker Styles--Sealed Switches 2 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Non-Illuminated Illuminated 2 Single- and Two-Pole Mounting Frame Types Single-Pole Mounting Frame Types Type E Type E 2 1.940 (49.28) 1.620 (41.15) 0.380 (9.65) 1.940 (49.28) 1.620 (41.15) CC #6-32 Tap 2 Holes 2 0.380 (9.65) 2 CC 2 #6-32 Tap 2 Holes Type F 2 Type F 2.500 (63.50) 2.500 (63.50) 0.380 (9.65) 2.250 (57.15) 2 0.380 (9.65) 2.250 (57.15) CC 2 CC 0.150 (3.81) Dia. 2 Holes 2 0.150 (3.81) Dia. 2 Holes Type L Type L 1.940 (49.28) 2 1.940 (49.28) 1.620 (41.15) CC 1.620 (41.15) 0.380 (9.65) 0.162 (4.11) Dia. 2 Hole 0.162 (4.11) Dia. 2 Hole 2 0.380 (9.65) Single- and Two-Pole Rocker Styles Single-Pole Rocker Styles Style 1 Style 3 2 2 2 R 0.610 (R 15.49) R 0.610 (R 15.49) 0.650 (16.51) 2 CC 0.650 (16.51) CC 0.216 (5.49) Style 2 2 CC 0.360 (9.14) 2 Style 5 2 R 0.610 (R 15.49) R 0.610 (R 15.49) 0.650 (16.51) 0.650 (16.51) CC 0.216 (5.49) Style 7 2 CC 0.360 (9.14) 2 Style 8 R 1.135 (R 28.83) 0.650 (16.51) R 0.610 (R 15.49) 0.350 (8.89) 0.650 0.496 R 0.610 (16.51) (12.60) (R 15.49) CC 2 R 1.135 (R 28.83) 2 CC 2 2 Reference Dimension "CC"--Top of Frame to Rocker Face Dimension in Inches (mm) 2 Dimension in Inches (mm) Mounting Frame Type Mounting Frame Type Rocker Single- and Two-Pole (Non-Illuminated) Style E Frame F Frame L Frame Recommended Panel Opening Rocker Style Single- and Two-Pole (Illuminated) E Frame F Frame L Frame Recommended Panel Opening 1 0.08 (2.03) 0.42 (10.67) 0.08 (2.03) 0.69 x 1.25 (17.53 x 31.75) 3 0.08 (2.03) 0.42 (10.67) 0.08 (2.03) 0.69 x 1.25 (17.53 x 31.75) 2 0.08 (2.03) 0.42 (10.67) 0.08 (2.03) 0.69 x 1.25 (17.53 x 31.75) 5 0.08 (2.03) 0.42 (10.67) 0.08 (2.03) 0.69 x 1.25 (17.53 x 31.75) 7 0.11 (2.79) 0.45 (11.43) 0.11 (2.79) 0.69 x 1.25 (17.53 x 31.75) 8 0.11 (2.79) 0.45 (11.43) 0.11 (2.79) 0.69 x 1.25 (17.53 x 31.75) 2 2 2 2 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com V11-T2-63 2.8 2 Rockers 8006/8007--EURO SR Contents 8006/8007 Series Description 2 Page 8006/8007--EURO SR Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2 V11-T2-65 V11-T2-66 V11-T2-66 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Product Description Features and Benefits Options Field-proven in America's roughest off-road applications, the standard size EURO SR is one tough and reliable rocker switch. Available with the complete range of rugged single- and two-pole, illuminated or non-illuminated circuits. Contact Mechanism Slow-make/slow-break contact mechanism. Butt action contact mechanism designed specifically for use on AC and low voltage DC applications. Additional colors of rockers and bezels are available Special circuits Special ratings Pad-printed legends on rocker and bezel Special voltage bulbs Dry circuit capabilities Foam dust seal Reversing jumpers Printed circuit terminals and other terminal types Wire leads Dead back cover Palm guard Industry standard connector: 28-3426 EURO SR panel plug: 53-3318 For information on optional features, contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. The EURO SR Series offers snap-in mounting and can be provided with a durable silicone seal that resists dust and moisture. All EURO SR switches are molded in an aesthetically pleasing matte finish and operate with a crisp tactile feel, allowing for easy actuation. The EURO SR will accept loads up to 15A. Terminal numbers are stamped on base for easy identification. 2 Rocker Material Thermoplastic rocker actuators. Different colors are available. Rocker and bezel are a high-grade nylon supplied with matte finish. Lamps Five lamp voltages--14 Vdc, 18 Vdc, 28 Vdc, 125 Vac neon and 250 Vac neon--are offered as standard. For additional lamp voltages, please contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. Mounting Means Snap-in mounting with plastic bezel. Seal Available in sealed and nonsealed versions. Sealed devices are furnished with silicone rubber seal, providing moisture and dust resistance with an IP67 rating. 2 2 2 Lens Options Lens Part Numbers (if ordered separately) Green . . . . . . . . . . 28-5415 Amber . . . . . . . .28-5415-2 Red. . . . . . . . . . .28-5415-3 Blue . . . . . . . . . .28-5415-4 White . . . . . . . . .28-5415-5 2 2 2 V11-T2-64 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com Standards and Certifications UL Recognized and recognized component for Canada File E2702 RoHS Compliant 1 Note 1 Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for the most up-to-date list of verified part numbers. 2.8 Rockers 8006/8007--EURO SR EURO SR Standard Size Euro-Style Rocker Switches To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base circuit number and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers. 2 2 2 2 2 Catalog Number Selection 2 How To Order--EURO SR, Non-Illuminated Example: Rating Poles and Throw 1PST 1PDT 10A, 250 Vac 15A, 125 Vac 15A, 28 Vdc 2PST 2PDT 2PDT 2 2PDT 3 Circuit with Rocker in ... UP CENTER Position Position 2-3 2-3 1 2-3 2-3 2-3 1 2-3 1 2-3, 5-6 2-3, 5-6 1 2-3, 5-6 2-3, 5-6 2-3, 5-6 1 2-3, 5-6 1 2-3, 5-6 5-6 8006K23 N NONE OFF OFF NONE OFF OFF NONE 2-1 2-1 2-1 2-1 1 OFF OFF NONE OFF OFF 5-6 5-3 2-1, 5-4 2-1, 5-4 2-1, 5-4 2-1, 5-4 1 OFF 5-1 0.250 in Spade 8006K23 8006K35 8006K20 8006K26 8006K29 8006K32 8006K43 8006K55 8006K40 8006K46 8006K49 8006K52 8006K58 8006K61 Solder Lugs 8006K24 8006K36 8006K21 8006K27 8006K30 8006K33 8006K44 8006K56 8006K41 8006K47 8006K50 8006K53 8006K59 8006K62 T 2 1 2 Code letters and/or numbers. Add to base circuit number. Terminal Type DOWN Position 1 Mounting Frame Color /Style N = Black/standard T = Black/top half palm guard B = Black/bottom half palm guard Screw 8006K25 8006K37 8006K22 8006K28 8006K31 8006K34 8006K45 8006K57 8006K42 8006K48 8006K51 8006K54 8006K60 8006K63 Rocker Color M = White T = Red V = Black Seal Option 1 = Non-sealed 2 = Sealed Rocker Style 1 = Two-face 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 How To Order--EURO SR, Illuminated Example: Rating Poles and Throw 1PST 1PDT 10A, 250 Vac 15A, 125 Vac 15A, 28 Vdc 2PST 2PDT 45 4 Circuit with Rocker in ... UP CENTER Position Position OFF NONE 2-3 2-3 2-3 1 2-3 1 OFF 2-3, 5-6 1 2-3, 5-6 2-1, 5-4 2-3, 5-6 1 2-3, 5-6 1 NONE OFF OFF NONE OFF OFF NONE OFF OFF NONE OFF OFF 8007K23 N 2-1 2-11 2-1 2-1 2-1 2-1 1 2-1, 5-4 NONE 2-1, 5-4 2-3, 5-6 2-1, 5-4 2-1, 5-4 1 0.250 in Spade 8007K23 8007K35 8007K20 8007K26 8007K29 8007K32 8007K43 8007K55 8007K40 8007K46 8007K49 8007K52 Solder Lugs 8007K24 8007K36 8007K21 8007K27 8007K30 8007K33 8007K44 8007K56 8007K41 8007K47 8007K50 8007K53 1 3 T 2 2 1 2 Code letters and/or numbers. Add to base circuit number. Terminal Type DOWN Position 4 Screw 8007K25 8007K37 8007K22 8007K28 8007K31 8007K34 8007K45 8007K57 8007K42 8007K48 8007K51 8007K54 Mounting Frame Color /Style N = Black/standard T = Black/top half palm guard B = Black/bottom half palm guard Bulb Voltage 1 = 125V neon 7 2 = 250V neon 7 3 = 14 Vdc 8 4 = 28 Vdc 8 7 = 18 Vdc 8 Lamp Wiring 1 = Dependent 2 = Independent Rocker Style 3 = Two-face w/1 lens 6 4 = Two-face w/2 lenses 4 Rocker Color M = White T = Red V = Black 2 Lens Color 1 = White 2 = Red 3 = Green 4 = Amber 5 = No lens 6 = Blue 7 = Clear Seal Option 1 = Non-sealed 2 = Sealed Notes 1 Momentary contact. 2 3A at 250 Vac, 6A at 125 Vac. 3 1/4 hp at 125-250 Vac. 4 All double-throw circuits, both 1PDT and 2PDT, provided with two lamps and two lenses (Rocker Style 4). When lamp is wired independent of circuit for 1PDT switches, device is supplied with lamp centered in open-pole of base. 5 Not standard with lamp wired independent of circuit. All 2PDT switches must be dependent on circuit and use Rocker Style 4. 6 Not provided standard for double-throw circuits, both 1PDT and 2PDT. Must use Rocker Style 4 for all double-throw switches. 7 Available on single-pole versions only. 8 14 Vdc, 18 Vdc and 28 Vdc bulbs are not UL, CSA when bulb is wired dependent to switch circuit. Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com V11-T2-65 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2.8 2 2 2 Rockers 8006/8007--EURO SR Technical Data and Specifications 8006/8007--EURO SR Description Specification Ratings 15A at 125 Vac 10A at 250 Vac 3/4 hp at 250 Vac (hp rating does not apply to lighted switches) Switch ratings at 125 Vac also apply to 28 Vdc 1PST, 1PDT, 2PST and 2PDT Maintained and momentary action Maintained--100,000 operations, minimum Momentary--25,000 operations, minimum 25,000 operations minimum at full load Standard 0.250 in (6.35 mm) Spade--Brass Screw--Brass (terminal screws provided unassembled) Solder--Tintillate-plated brass Thermoset molding material Thermoplastic rocker actuators 1000V rms, minimum IP67 (with optional seal) Snap-in mounting with plastic bezel -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C) 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Circuits Mechanical life Electrical life Terminal types Base material Rocker material Dielectric Seal level Mounting means Operating temperature Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Non-Illuminated 2 Illuminated 1.705 0.011 (43.31 0.31) R 0.156 0.010 (R 3.96 0.25) 2 Palm Guard 2 2 2 1.427 + 0.020/- 0.012 (36.25 + 0.51/- 0.38) 1 2 3 1.450 (36.85) 1.190 (30.23) 2 2 0.250 0.004 (6.35 0.08) 0.030 (0.813) Thick 0.440 0.005 (11.18 0.13) 2 0.830 (21.08) 4 0.680 (17.27) 0.389 0.040 (9.88 1.02) 0.096 0.010 (2.44 0.25) 1.082 0.012 (27.48 0.30) 2 2 R 0.156 0.005 (3.97 0.13) 0.096 0.010 (2.44 0.25) 2 2 0.957 0.012 (24.31 0.30) 0.389 0.041 (9.88 1.06) 2 2 1.705 0.011 (43.31 0.31) 0.957 0.012 (24.31 0.30) 2 2 R 0.156 0.010 (R 3.96 0.25) 5 1.705 0.012 (43.31 0.30) 1.220 0.012 (30.99 0.30) 6 0.820 0.005 (20.83 0.13) Panel Opening Reference Only Thickness: 0.040 to 0.140 (1.02 to 3.56) Best Results Obtained from: 0.080 to 0.125 (2.03 to 3.18) 2 V11-T2-66 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com Rockers 8004/8005--Euro Full Size 2.9 Contents 8004/8005-Euro Full Size Description Page 8004/8005--Euro Full Size Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-68 V11-T2-69 V11-T2-69 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Product Description Features and Benefits Options Eaton's 8004 and 8005 EuroLook Series features matte finish European styling and snap-in mounting. These durable switches, field-tested in the most demanding truck and marine applications, are available with a variety of standard actuator options. Options include concave, two-face, illuminated, nonilluminated and the recessed feature, which allows placement of your label on the face of our rocker. All switches in this rugged lineup can be fitted with a silicone rubber seal to provide moisture and dust-resistance. Additionally, these switches can be gang-mounted into a single panel opening. Panel blanks are also available. Contact Mechanism Slow-make/slow-break contact mechanism. Butt action contact mechanism designed specifically for use on AC and low voltage DC applications. Additional colors of rockers and mounting bezels are available Special circuits Special ratings Gold contacts Dry circuit capabilities Pad-printed legends on rocker and bezel Special lamp voltages Foam dust seal Reversing jumpers Printed circuit terminals and other terminal types Dead back cover (two-pole base) with wire leads Matching indicators Industry standard connector: 28-3426 Full size Euro-Look gang mounting systems Full size Euro-Look panel plugs: 17-19544-2 For information on optional features, contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. Rocker Material Custom styled, multi-colored thermoplastic rocker actuators. The rocker and bezel are supplied with a matte finish. Lamps Five lamp voltages--14 Vdc, 18 Vdc, 28 Vdc, 125 Vac neon and 250 Vac neon--are offered as standard. For additional lamp voltages, please contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. Mounting Means Snap-in mounting with plastic bezel. Seal Available in sealed and nonsealed versions. Sealed devices are furnished with a silicone rubber seal providing moisture and dust resistance with an IP54 rating. 2 Lens Options Lens Part Numbers (if ordered separately) 8005 Two-Face Green . . . . . . . . . 28-3425 Amber . . . . . . . . 28-3425-2 Red . . . . . . . . . . 28-3425-3 Blue . . . . . . . . . . 28-3425-4 White . . . . . . . . 28-3425-5 8005 Concave Red . . . . . . . . . . . 28-5148 Green . . . . . . . . 28-5148-2 Amber . . . . . . . . 28-5148-3 Blue . . . . . . . . . . 28-5148-4 Clear . . . . . . . . . 28-5148-5 Standards and Certifications 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 UL Recognized and recognized component for Canada File E2702 RoHS Compliant 1 2 2 2 Note 1 Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for the most up-to-date list of verified part numbers. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com V11-T2-67 2.9 Rockers 8004/8005--Euro Full Size Full Size, Euro-Look Rocker Switches 2 To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base circuit number and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers. 2 2 2 2 Catalog Number Selection 2 How To Order--Full Size Euro, Non-Illuminated Example: 2 2 2 Rating Poles and Throw 2 1PST 2 1PDT 2 2 10A, 250 Vac 15A, 125 Vac 15A, 28 Vdc 2PDT 2 2PDT 2 2PDT 3 2 2 2PST Circuit with Rocker in ... UP CENTER Position Position 2-3 2-3 1 2-3 2-3 2-3 1 2-3 1 2-3, 5-6 2-3, 5-6 1 2-3, 5-6 2-3, 5-6 2-3, 5-6 1 2-3, 5-6 1 2-3, 5-6 5-6 OFF OFF NONE OFF OFF 2-1 2-1 2-1 2-1 1 NONE OFF OFF NONE OFF OFF 5-6 5-3 2-1, 5-4 2-1, 5-4 2-1, 5-4 2-1, 5-4 1 OFF 5-1 Example: Rating 2 2 0.250 in Spade 8004K23 8004K35 8004K20 8004K26 8004K29 8004K32 8004K43 8004K55 8004K40 8004K46 8004K49 8004K52 8004K58 8004K61 Solder Lugs 8004K24 8004K36 8004K21 8004K27 8004K30 8004K33 8004K44 8004K56 8004K41 8004K47 8004K50 8004K53 8004K59 8004K62 1 Poles and Throw 1PST 1PDT 10A, 250 Vac 15A, 125 Vac 15A, 28 Vdc 2 2PST 2PDT 2 2 2 2 2 1 Code letters and/or numbers. Add to base circuit number. Mounting Frame Color N = Black M = White T = Red G = Gray Screw 8004K25 8004K37 8004K22 8004K28 8004K31 8004K34 8004K45 8004K57 8004K42 8004K48 8004K51 8004K54 8004K60 8004K63 Rocker Color M = White T = Red V = Black G = Gray Rocker Style 0 = Recessed 1 = Two-face 6 = Paddle 7 = Concave 45 4 Circuit with Rocker in ... UP CENTER Position Position OFF NONE 2-3 2-3 2-3 1 2-3 1 OFF 2-3, 5-6 1 2-3, 5-6 2-1, 5-4 2-3, 5-6 1 2-3, 5-6 1 NONE OFF OFF NONE OFF OFF NONE OFF OFF NONE OFF OFF 8005K23 N Seal Option 1 = Non-sealed 2 = Sealed 2-1 2-1 1 2-1 2-1 2-1 2-1 1 2-1, 5-4 NONE 2-1, 5-4 2-3, 5-6 2-1, 5-4 2-1, 5-4 1 0.250 in Spade 8005K23 8005K35 8005K20 8005K26 8005K29 8005K32 8005K43 8005K55 8005K40 8005K46 8005K49 8005K52 Solder Lugs 8005K24 8005K36 8005K21 8005K27 8005K30 8005K33 8005K44 8005K56 8005K41 8005K47 8005K50 8005K53 1 3 T 2 1 Code letters and/or numbers. Add to base circuit number. Terminal Type DOWN Position 4 Screw 8005K25 8005K37 8005K22 8005K28 8005K31 8005K34 8005K45 8005K57 8005K42 8005K48 8005K51 8005K54 Mounting Frame Color N = Black M = White T = Red G = Gray Bulb Voltage 1 = 125V neon 7 2 = 250V neon 7 3 = 14 Vdc 8 4 = 28 Vdc 8 7 = 18 Vdc 8 2 2 T How To Order--Full Size Euro, Illuminated 2 2 N Terminal Type DOWN Position NONE 2 2 8004K23 Lamp Wiring 1 = Dependent 2 = Independent Rocker Style 2 = Recessed w/1 lens 6 3 = Two-face w/1 lens 6 4 = Two-face w/2 lenses 4 5 = Recessed w/2 lenses 4 8 = Concave w/1 lens 6 9 = Concave w/2 lenses 4 Rocker Color M = White T = Red V = Black G = Gray Lens Color 2 = Red 3 = Green 4 = Amber 5 = No lens 6 = Blue Seal Option 1 = Non-sealed 2 = Sealed Notes 1 Momentary contact. 2 3A at 250 Vac, 5A at 125 Vac. 3 1/4 hp at 125-250 Vac. 4 All double-throw circuits, both 1PDT and 2PDT, provided with two lamps and two lenses (Rocker Style 4). When lamp is wired independent of circuit for 1PDT switches, device is supplied with lamp centered in open-pole of base. 5 Not standard available with lamp wired independent of circuit. All 2PDT switches must be dependent on circuit and use Rocker Style 4, 5 or 9. 6 Not provided standard for double-throw circuits, both 1PDT and 2PDT. Must use Rocker Style 4, 5 or 9 for all double-throw switches. 7 Available on single-pole versions only. 8 14 Vdc and 28 Vdc bulbs are not UL, CSA when bulb is wired dependent to switch circuit. V11-T2-68 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com 2.9 Rockers 8004/8005--Euro Full Size Technical Data and Specifications 2 8004/8005--Euro Full Size 2 Description Specification Ratings 15A at 125 Vac; 10A at 250 Vac; 3/4 hp at 250 Vac (hp rating does not apply to lighted switches) Switch ratings at 125 Vac also apply to 28 Vdc 1PST, 1PDT, 2PST and 2PDT; Maintained and momentary action Movable--Silver-plated copper with fine or coin silver contact face button Stationary--Copper with fine or coin silver contact face button Maintained--100,000 operations, minimum Momentary--25,000 operations, minimum 25,000 operations minimum at full load Standard 0.250 in (6.35 mm) spade--Brass Screw--Brass #6-32 x 3/16 (terminal screws provided unassembled) Solder--Tintillate-plated brass; tintillate spade terminals Thermoset molding material 1000V rms, minimum IP54 (with optional seal) Snap-in mounting with plastic bezel Circuits Contact material Mechanical life Electrical life Terminal types Base material Dielectric Seal level Mounting means 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Non-Illuminated 2 Illuminated 1.970 0.010 (50.04 0.25) 2 1.970 0.010 (50.04 0.25) R 0.004 0.005 (R 0.125 0.13) 1.440 0.010 (36.58 0.25) R 0.156 (R 3.96) Typ. 0.519 0.005 (13.18 0.13) R 0.004 0.005 (R 0.125 0.13) 1.440 0.010 (36.58 0.25) R 0.156 (R 3.96) Typ. 0.519 0.005 (13.18 0.13) 2 2 2 Surface Length Along Bottom of Recess: 1.122 0.012 (28.50 0.31) 1.087 0.005 (27.61 0.13) 0.090 0.005 (2.29 0.13) 1.024 0.010 (26.01 0.25) 0.689 0.010 (17.50 0.25) Surface Length Along Bottom of Recess: 1.122 0.012 (28.50 0.31) 1.087 0.005 (27.61 0.13) 0.090 0.005 (2.29 0.13) R 0.060 (R 1.52) 0.080 (2.03) 0.080 (2.03) 0.395 0.029 (10.03 0.76) 0.440 0.010 (11.18 0.25) 1.602 0.029 (40.69 0.76) 0.031 (0.79) 0.250 0.032 (6.35 0.81) 0.001 (0.032) Thick 1 1 1.734 0.005 (44.04 0.13) Panel Opening Reference Only Thickness: 0.030 to 0.190 (0.76 to 4.83) Best Results Obtained From: 0.080 to 0.130 (2.03 to 3.30) 0.328 0.015 (8.33 0.38) 2 3 1.734 0.005 (44.04 0.13) 4 5 6 0.687 0.015 (17.45 0.38) 0.867 0.005 (22.02 0.13) 4 5 2 2 2 2 2 0.031 (0.79) 0.250 0.032 (6.35 0.81) 0.001 (0.032) Thick 0.328 0.015 (8.33 0.38) 2 3 0.440 0.010 (11.18 0.25) 1.602 0.029 (40.69 0.76) 2 2 R 0.060 (R 1.52) 0.395 0.029 (10.03 0.76) 0.867 0.005 (22.02 0.13) 1.024 0.010 (26.01 0.25) 0.689 0.010 (17.50 0.25) 2 2 2 6 0.687 0.015 (17.45 0.38) 2 Panel Opening Reference Only Thickness: 0.030 to 0.190 (0.76 to 4.83) Best Results Obtained From: 0.080 to 0.130 (2.03 to 3.30) 2 2 2 2 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com V11-T2-69 2.10 2 Rockers X Series Rockers Contents X Series Rockers--XR Description 2 Page X Series Rockers Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X Series Symbols Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Light Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2 2 V11-T2-71 V11-T2-72 V11-T2-72 V11-T2-72 V11-T2-73 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Product Description The Electrical Sector is pleased to offer X Series Rockers for use in outdoor applications to meet almost every market need. These sleek style rockers are molded in a unique smooth matte finish. The bezel is also unique with a more modern roundedrectangular design with an oval shaped rocker. X Series Rockers are available in single- and double-pole with various circuit options, LED illumination, and laser etching. Frames and actuator colors are black Switches provided with 0.025 spade quick connect terminals Application Description Features and Benefits Options Market Applications Seal Standard IP56 Sealing per IES 60529. Agriculture Bus Commercial Marine Specialty Vehicle Truck Illumination Standard LED voltages offered include 14 Vdc and 125 Vac. Material Frames are nylon and actuators are nylon with glass fiber with both meeting UL flame: 94HB. Terminals are silver plated brass. Panel plug: 53-3318 Industry standard connector: 28-3426 For information on optional features, contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. Mounting Means Easy snap-in mounting with plastic bezel. Standards and Certifications UL Recognized and recognized component for Canada File E2702 T85 RoHS Compliant Label Eaton part number etched on switch for easy inventory management. Product Selection Guide Seal Actuator Decorative Termination Illumination Top Rocker without bezel -- Laser-etch Spade Incandescent 6 Vdc -- Neon 110V -- Bottom -- Rocker with bezel Pad-print -- Solder -- Incandescent 12 Vdc -- Neon 125V -- Panel -- Paddle -- Screw -- Incandescent 14 Vdc -- Neon 250V -- 2 Snap-in lens -- Poles Weld lugs -- Incandescent 18 Vdc -- 14 Vdc LED Locking -- Single Incandescent 24 Vdc -- 28 Vdc LED -- 2 Label -- Double Incandescent 28 Vdc -- 125 Vac LED Four -- 277 Vac LED -- 2 2 2 V11-T2-70 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com 2.10 Rockers X Series Rockers X Series Rockers 2 2 2 2 2 Catalog Number Selection 2 Standard rating 16A 125V, 10A 277V, 3/4 hp 277V Also recommended for use in applications up to 21A 14 Vdc IP56 per IES 60529 2 2 Product Selection XR Series Rocker 2 X Series Rockers Lamp Voltage Switch Function Light Circuit 3 Lens Color T. 1-4 None SPST OFF-ON X = None None SPST OFF-ON X = None SPST OFF-ON E= SPST OFF-ON 14 Vdc LED None 125 Vac LED 1 T. 3-6 Switch Markings Catalog Number None Int'l ON/OFF 4 XRXAXXXNV1CU None None ON/OFF 4 XRXAXXXNV1DB None Amber None XR1AEX4NV1XX E= None Green None XR1AEX3NV1XX SPST OFF-ON E= None Red None XR1AEX2NV1XX SPDT ON-ON G= Amber Amber None XR1CG44NV1XX SPDT ON-ON G= Green Green None XR1CG33NV1XX SPDT ON-OFF-ON G= Amber Amber None XR1BG44NV1XX SPDT ON-OFF-ON G= Green Green None XR1BG33NV1XX SPDT (ON)-OFF-(ON) G= Amber Amber None XR1EG44NV1XX SPDT (ON)-OFF-(ON) G= Green Green None 2 X = None None None Int'l ON/OFF DPST OFF-ON 2 X = None None None ON/OFF 4 XRXMXXXNV1DB DPST OFF-ON X = None None None None XRXMXXXNV1XX DPST ON-ON X = None None None None XRXNXXXNV1XX SPST OFF-ON E= None Amber None XR3AEX4NV1XX SPST OFF-ON E= None Green None XR3AEX3NV1XX SPST OFF-ON E= None Red None XR3AEX2NV1XX SPDT ON-ON G= Amber Amber None XR3CG44NV1XX SPDT ON-ON G= Green Green None XR3CG33NV1XX SPDT ON-OFF-ON G= Amber Amber None XR3BG44NV1XX SPDT ON-OFF-ON G= Green Green None XR3BG33NV1XX DPST OFF-ON XRXMXXXNV1CU SPDT (ON)-OFF-(ON) G= Amber Amber None XR3EG44NV1XX SPDT (ON)-OFF-(ON) G= Green Green None XR3EG33NV1XX 2 2 2 2 2 2 XR1EG33NV1XX 4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 Available in AC applications only. 2 Double-pole not available illuminated; it is available laser etched. 3 See Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-72. 4 See Symbols Library on Page V11-T2-72. 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com V11-T2-71 2.10 2 2 Rockers X Series Rockers X Series Symbols Library Catalog Number Suffix Inscription Catalog Number Suffix Inscription CU 2 DB 2 2 2 2 Technical Data and Specifications X Series Description Specification 2 Ratings 16A 125V, 10A 277V, 3/4 hp 277V; recommended 21A 14 Vdc or 10A 28 Vdc 2 Operating temperature -4 to 176F (-20 to 80C) 2 Light Diagrams 2 X Series 2 Light Circuit Letter Functions Light Circuit Letter Functions Light Circuit Letter Functions 2 X All E SPST G SPDT 2 2 1 4 1 4 4 1 1 4 1 4 1 4 5 2 5 3 6 1 2 3 5 6 2 3 5 6 2 5 2 3 6 2 3 5 6 2 2 3 6 Jumpers (3-4) 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V11-T2-72 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com Rockers X Series Rockers 2.10 Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 2 Mounting Hole 2 2 Y 2 X 2 Dimensions 2 Thickness 0.03-0.12 (0.75-3.0) X 0.83 +0.01 (21.2 +0.1) 2 Y 1.46 + 0.01 (37.0 +0.1) 2 2 X Series LED 1 2 LED 2 2 0.98 (25.0) 2 2 2 1.81 (46.0) ON OFF ON 0.32 (8.0) 2 2 0.09 (2.2) 1.11 (28.2) 2 2 2 0.25 (6.4) 0.44 (11.2) 2 0.81 (20.7) 2 1.43 (36.2) 2 2 0.81 (20.7) 2 2 0.03 (0.8) 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com V11-T2-73 2.11 2 Rockers 8064/8065--ESPORT Contents 8064/8065 Series Description 2 Page 8064/8065--ESPORT Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Icon/Legend Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2 V11-T2-75 V11-T2-76 V11-T2-76 V11-T2-77 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Product Description Features and Benefits The ergonomically designed ESPORT Series comes with a large, independent LEDilluminated indicator window that clearly identifies the switch's labeled function-- your label or ours. The switch can be ordered with an LED illuminated actuator, as well. All ESPORT switches are molded in a clean matte finish and operate with a definite tactile feel. Actuation of the switch feels crisp. Also, ESPORT switches will accept loads up to15A. Due to the LED's long life, lamp replacement should not be necessary. Contact Mechanism Slow-make/slow-break contact mechanism. Butt action contact mechanism designed specifically for use on AC and low voltage DC applications. Tested in America's toughest truck applications, the ESPORT switch is reliable and durable and is available with a full range of rugged single- and two-pole circuits. It has an optional polarized lock-on connector. Spade switch terminals are tinplated for long storage life. Rocker Material Thermoplastic rocker actuators. Different colors are available. The rocker and the bezel are a high-grade nylon and are supplied with an aesthetically pleasing matte finish. Lamps Durable, long-life LED illumination; 14 Vdc is standard. Integral indicator is illuminated by two independent green, yellow or red LEDs while the actuator is lighted using one dependent LED. For additional LED voltages and/ or colors, contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. Options Lenses All switches can be ordered with either a frosted clear lens (Cat. No. 28-5555) or a translucent white lens (Cat. No. 28-5555-2). The clear lens will allow the maximum amount of diffused light to flow through your label or one of ours. The white lens is shipped unassembled to facilitate the addition of your engraved or pad-printed legend. Labels The lens area of the integral indicator will accept a label 0.750 x 0.450 and 0.010 in (19.05 x 11.43 x 0.25 mm) thick. Our selection of standard labels with white legends on black polycarbonate background can be found on Page V11-T2-76. Mounting Means Snap-in mounting with plastic bezel. 2 2 Additional colors of rockers and mounting bezels are available Special circuits Special ratings Dry circuit capabilities Pad-printed legends on lens, rocker and bezel Special indicator legend labels Special LEDs and LED voltages Special actuators Reversing jumpers Solder terminals and other terminal types Wire leads Polarized lock-on connector: 28-5558 Full-size Euro-Look panel plugs: 17-19544-2 For information on optional features, contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. Standards and Certifications UL Recognized and recognized component for Canada: File 2702 RoHS Compliant 1 2 2 Note 1 Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for the most up-to-date list of verified part numbers. 2 V11-T2-74 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com 2.11 Rockers 8064/8065--ESPORT ESPORT Full-Size Rocker Switches To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base circuit number and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers. 2 2 2 2 2 Catalog Number Selection 2 How To Order--ESPORT, Non-Illuminated Example: Rating Poles and Throw 1PST 1PDT 15A, 125 Vac 15A, 28 Vdc 2PST 2PDT Circuit with Rocker in ... UP CENTER Position Position 5-6 OFF 2-3 2-3 2-3 1 2-3 1 2-3, 5-6 OFF 2-3, 5-6 2-3, 5-6 2-3, 5-6 1 2-3, 5-6 1 NONE NONE OFF NONE OFF OFF NONE NONE OFF NONE OFF OFF 8064K10 DOWN Position OFF 5-4 2-1 2-1 2-1 2-1 1 OFF 2-1, 5-4 1 2-1, 5-4 2-1, 5-4 2-1, 5-4 2-1, 5-4 Base Circuit Number 8064K10 8064K11 8064K14 8064K12 8064K17 8064K16 8064K20 8064K21 8064K24 8064K22 8064K27 8064K26 L R Z 1 W 2 2 Code letters and/or numbers. Add to base circuit number. Rocker Style S = 1 in paddle L = 1.5 in paddle B = Rocker 2 Rocker LED Color Z = None Rocker Color B = Black W = White R = Red G = Gray LED Voltage 1 = 14 Vdc 2 = 28 Vdc Indicator LED Color R = Red Y = Yellow G = Green Lens Color 1 = Clear 2 = White 2 1PST Circuit with Rocker in ... UP CENTER Position Position 5-6 NONE 2 2 2 2 Example: Rating 15A, 125 Vac 15A, 28 Vdc 2 2 How To Order--ESPORT, Illuminated Poles and Throw 2 8065K10 DOWN Position OFF Base Circuit Number 8065K10 S R Y 1 W 2 2 2 Code letters and/or numbers. Add to base circuit number. Rocker Style B = Rocker S = 1 in paddle Indicator LED Color R = Red Y = Yellow G = Green Rocker LED Color R = Red Y = Yellow G = Green Rocker Color B = Black W = White R = Red G = Gray LED Voltage 1 = 14 Vdc 2 = 28 Vdc Lens Color 1 = Clear 2 = White 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 Momentary contact. 2 White lenses are furnished unassembled. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com V11-T2-75 2.11 2 2 2 2 8064/8065--ESPORT Description Specification Ratings 15A at 125 Vac; 10A at 250 Vac; 3/4 hp at 250 Vac Switch ratings at 125 Vac also apply to 28 Vdc 1PST, 1PDT, 2PST and 2PDT Maintained and momentary action Movable--Silver-plated copper with silver contact face button Stationary--Copper with silver contact face button Maintained--100,000 operations, minimum Momentary--25,000 operations, minimum Switch--Standard 0.250 in (6.35 mm) spade, tintillate-plated brass Integral indicator--0.110 x 0.032 in (2.79 x 0.813 mm) spade, tintillate-plated brass Thermoset molding material 1000V rms, minimum Snap-in mounting with plastic bezel Circuits Contact material Mechanical life 2 Terminal types 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 8064/8065--ESPORT Technical Data and Specifications 2 2 Rockers Base material Dielectric Mounting means Icon/Legend Selection All labels below come with adhesive backing Label legends are distinct and easily readable when illuminated from behind Additional labels are available upon request. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative Icons and Legends Legend Ordering Code 1 Style Dome Light Work Light 0055 0056 TV/VCR 0065 Fridge 0066 Cruise ON/OFF Brake Select Brake ON/OFF Fan Override Cruise Set Engine Brake Left Window Power Mirror Right Window 0067 Icon Description Ordering Code 1 Windshield Wiper SAE Specification No. J1362-0086 White graphic on a black background 0057 Windshield Washer SAE Specification No. J1362-0087 White graphic on a black background 0986 Master Lighting Switch SAE Specification No. J1362-5012 White graphic on a black background 0687 Fog Lights SAE Specification No. J1362-0633 White graphic on a black background 0684 Clearance/Position Light SAE Specification No. J1362-0456 White graphics on a black background 0686 0068 Helvetica Narrow 0.135 in (3.43 mm) high White translucent letters Opaque black background 0069 0071 0681 0682 0683 0688 0689 Note 1 Ordering Code: If a standard label is required, add the Ordering Code to the end of ESPORT Switch part number preceded by a dash. Example: To order 8065K10BYR1B1 with the 0684 Fog Lights label, the part number will be 8065K10BYR1B1-0684. 2 2 2 2 2 V11-T2-76 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com 2.11 Rockers 8064/8065--ESPORT Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 2 Non-Illuminated and Illuminated 2 2 0.434 0.029 (11.02 0.76) 2 3 2 1 +7 USA 6 5 4 1.598 0.029 (40.59 0.76) -8 4 5 6 -8 0.110 (2.79) 0.004 (0.11) Thick 1 +7 2 See Detail A for Label Dimensions 0.030 0.010 (0.76 0.25) 0.250 (6.35) 0.010 (0.25) Thick 2 1.064 0.012 (27.03 0.31) R 0.156 0.127 (R 3.96 3.23) 2 2 1.598 0.030 (40.59 0.76) Location of LED when Illuminated 2 PDT--Non-Illuminated Bottom View 3 2 0.100 0.010 (2.54 0.25) 2 5 4 2 0.750 0.008 (19.05 0.20) USA 6 Panel Opening 0.450 0.006 (11.43 0.15) Panel Opening Reference Only Thickness: 0.060 to 0.150 (1.52 to 3.81) 2 2 -8 1 PST--Illuminated Bottom View 2 2 1.970 0.012 (50.04 0.31) 1.734 0.005 (44.04 0.13) 0.867 0.005 (22.02 0.13) 2 Label Dimensions Detail A 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com V11-T2-77 2.12 2 2 2 Rockers Accessories Dimensions for NGR, EURO SR, Full Size Euro-Look and ESPORT Rocker Accessories Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) NGR Connector Euro/SR and Full Size Euro-Look Connector 0.962 0.029 (24.38 0.76) 2.180 (55.37) 1.815 0.059 (45.97 1.52) 2 0.910 (23.11) 2 0.812 (20.62) 8 6 5B 0.954 0.005 (24.13 0.13) 2 4 7 2 5A 2 1.877 0.059 (47.50 1.52) 1.335 0.005 (33.78 0.13) 1.255 (31.88) 1.400 (35.56) 2 2 2 2 NGR Connector Catalog Number 28-5637-2 accepts Packard 12015870 Metri-Pack terminals or AMP compatible connector 28-5940 accepts AMP terminals 42100-2. 0.812 (20.62) 0.698 (17.73) 0.976 (24.79) 2 2 2 1.400 (35.56) 2 Euro-Look and EURO/SR Connector Catalog Number 28-3426 accepts Packard 12015870 Metri-Pack terminals. 2 2 2 ESPORT Connector 2 2 2 Retaining hinge functions to keep parts intact through shipment and handling. Fracture of the hinges does not affect form, fit or function of the connector and its terminal retention features. Dimension Applies at Base of Snap Leg 2 2 3 6 2 2 5 1.697 0.020 (43.10 0.51) 1 2 2 2 ESPORT Connector Catalog Number 28-5558 Locations 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 accept 1.701 0.020 Packard 12015870 Metri-Pack terminals. (43.21 0.51) Locations 7 and 8 accept Packard 4 12034046 Metri-Pack terminals. 8 7 0.910 0.020 (23.11 0.51) 1.392 0.014 (35.36 0.38) 2.180 0.020 (55.37 0.51) 2 2 V11-T2-78 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com 2.12 Rockers Accessories Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 2 Gang Mounting System 1.030 (26.16) R 0.125 (R 3.18) 2.060 (52.32) 2 0.867 (22.02) 2 2 1.734 (44.02) End Bezel 1.897 (48.18) 2 2.000 (50.8) 2.280 (57.91) (2) End Bezels (2) End Bezels and (1) Center Bezel 2.026 + 0.010 (51.46 + 0.25/- 0.000) 3.056 + 0.010 (77.62 + 0.51/- 0.000) 2 R 0.187 (R 4.75) R 0.165 (R 4.19) 0.661 (16.79) NGR, Euro-Look and ESPORT Panel Plugs C A 1.970 (50.04) 17-21160 17-21159 Euro-Look 17-19264 17-19263 NGR A 0.080 (2.03) 0.100 (2.54) B R 0.060 (R 1.52) R 0.080 (R 2.03) C 0.340 (8.64) 0.335 (8.51) D 0.530 (13.46) 0.550 (13.97) E R 0.156 (R 3.96) R 0.250 (R 6.35) Panel Opening Reference Only Thickness: 0.030 to 0.190 (0.76 to 4.83) Panel plug Catalog Number 17-19544-2 for Use with Euro-Look and ESPORT. NGR panel plug Catalog Number 17-21543. Part will also fit Eaton gang mounting boxes. Catalog Numbers 17-19263 and 17-19264 0.867 + 0.005/- 0.000 (22.02 + 0.13/- 0.00) 2 R 0.156 (R 3.96) 2 2 0.650 +0.010/ -0.001 (16.51 +0.25/ -0.02) 0.985 0.007 (25.02 0.20) 2 2 2 2 0.130 0.010 (3.30 0.25) 1.450 (36.83) 1.190 (30.23) Panel Opening 2 2 1.735 0.012 (44.07 0.31) 1.427 0.005 (36.25 0.13) 1.734 + 0.005/- 0.000 (44.04 + 0.13/- 0.00) 2 Tolerence: +0.254/-0.000 (+ 0.254/-0.000) for Each Center Bezel up to a Maximum of + 0.0002 (+ 0.050) Top View Euro-Look ESPORT E 1.024 (26.01) 2 0.494 (12.55) D 0.847 (21.51) 2 2 1.009 (25.63) 1.255 + 0.009/ -0.001 (31.88 +0.25/ -0.03) 1.380 (35.05) Bottom View NGR EURO SR Panel Plugs B 1.530 (38.86) Center Dimensions: 2.026 + 0.254/-0.00 (51.46 + 0.254/-0.000) Plus Number of Center Bezels Times 1.03 2 1.200 (30.48) End 1.900 0.020 (48.26 + 0.51/- 0.00) Panel Opening--Reference Only Thickness: 0.039 to 0.078 to 0.118 (1.00 to 2.00 to 3.00) 2 0.150 (3.81) Bezel Catalog Numbers Panel Opening for 2 End Bezels 1.900 0.020 (48.26 + 0.51/- 0.00) 2 2 2 0.820 0.005 (20.83 0.13) 2 Panel Opening--Reference Only Thickness: 0.040 to 0.140 (1.01 to 3.55) Best Results Obtained From: 0.080 to 0.125 (2.03 to 3.17) 2 2 2 0.680 0.830 (16.66) (21.08) 2 2 Panel Plug Catalog Number 53-3318 For Use with EURO/SR Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com V11-T2-79 2.13 2 2 SinglePole Rockers Technical Data 1 2 3 2 2 2 TwoPole 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 2 2 2 FourPole 7 8 9 10 11 12 Terminal Identification Circuit Diagrams When specified on order, switches will have the terminals identified as shown in the illustration at right. Terminal markings will be ink-stamped on the side of the switch case and unused terminal positions will not be identified. Rocker Circuit Diagrams All views are rear of switch with keyway or at down as applicable. Terminal numbers 2, 2 and 5 and 5 and 8 are considered inboard terminals for single-, two- and four-pole switches respectively. All others are considered outboard. 2 2 2 2 2 "Three Independent" ON-ON-ON Circuit Diagram Connection Points Single-Pole Connect common to terminals 2 2 Connect circuit "A" to terminals 6 Connect circuit "B" to terminals 4 Connect circuit "C" to terminals 1 2 2 UP Position No. of Poles Circuit A 2 2 B 1PDT 2 3 D 2PDT 1 2 3 E 4PST 1 1 PDT 2 1 1 4 3 6 2 4 1 3 J 1PST 1 2 3 C 2PST Schematic I 2 Circuit 5 K 1PDT 5 6 L 2PST 4 5 6 2 5 8 11 3 6 9 12 7 10 8 11 9 12 1 4 2 5 3 6 G3 1PST 4 M 2PST 2 4 1 3 6 N 2PDT P 1PDT 2 6 3 Circuit with Lever in ... 3 ON Independent Circuit Letter 2 3 F 4PDT 2 ON-ON-ON Special Circuit Schematic A 1PST For switch modified with "Three Independent" ON-ON-ON special circuit. External jumpers are required. User to connect wiring per instructions given below. 2 2 Circuit Letter CENTER Position (Maintained) Circuit B DOWN Position (Keyway) H4 1PDT 4 2 3 Q7 2 Circuit 6 B A C C NC NO H G NC NO Circuit C 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 4 5 6 4 5 6 Legends Rocker Switch Legend Legend Rocker Switch Type Contact terminal--will make contact with switch lever 2 Isolated terminal--does not make contact with lever 2 Center terminal and switch lever 2 Momentary contact Bulb Denotes mechanical contact portion 2 See next page for Midsize Switch Circuit Diagrams. See Page V11-T2-17 for NGR Circuit Diagrams. 2 Notes 1 Poles 11 and 12 may be eliminated for three-pole devices. 2 Poles 10, 11 and 12 may be eliminated for three-pole devices. 3 Dependent lamp. 4 Independent lamp. 5 Two circuit--indicates a special type of double-throw switch in which the two circuits being controlled may be independent of each other. 6 For 206 Series, an additional lamp is available. 7 Available in 1PDT or 2PDT. 2 2 2 2 V11-T2-80 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com Rockers Technical Data 2.13 Midsize Switch Circuit Diagrams 1 Non-Illuminated Circuit Number (Circuit Designator) Circuit with Rocker In ... DOWN CENTER Position Position UP Position Schematic 1 1PST OFF 2 NONE ON Circuit Number (Circuit Designator) 18 1PST 1 2 1PST OFF 12 11 3 1PST NONE OFF 2 NONE ON MOM. ON 1 4 1PST OFF 2 1 5 1PDT NONE ON 3 ON NONE 3 ON 2 OFF MOM. ON 2 NONE ON 1 ON 2 3 OFF MOM. ON MOM. ON 2 3 OFF MOM. ON 1 11 2PST 12 2PST 13 2PDT 12 25 11 24 12 25 11 24 12 25 11 24 12 13 25 26 11 14 2PDT 13 12 26 25 16 2PDT 13 12 26 25 11 17 2PDT 11 OFF NONE ON OFF NONE ON 2 OFF NONE MOM. ON 2 MOM. OFF NONE ON ON NONE ON ON OFF ON MOM. ON NONE ON ON OFF ON ON OFF ON ON NONE ON ON NONE ON MOM. ON NONE MOM. ON ON NONE ON -- -- -- 2 2 25 26 3 1 2 2 12 11 2 13 23 1PDT 25 26 24 13 24 1PDT 26 25 25 1PDT 2 2 2 26 25 26 1PDT 26 13 24 27 2PST OFF NONE ON 28 2PST OFF NONE MOM. ON 29 2PST 3 MOM. OFF NONE ON 30 2PDT ON 31 2PDT 25 2 NONE 2 26 25 13 24 12 25 12 2 2 24 25 12 11 24 13 26 11 ON 2 2 11 ON OFF ON MOM. ON NONE ON ON OFF MOM. ON 24 25 2 25 11 24 32 Indicator 2 2 24 12 2 2 3 2 2 Notes 1 Terminal numbers 1, 2 and 3 denote single-pole base. Terminal numbers 11, 12, 113, 24, 25 and 26 denote two-pole base. 2 Single-pole in two-pole base with lamp independently wired. 3 Two-pole--independently wired lamp. 2 2 2 24 12 26 13 11 21 1PST 2 ON 24 12 2 NONE 2 12 11 2 OFF 24 15 2PDT 11 3 1 24 13 12 26 25 11 Schematic 13 24 1 10 2PST UP Position 13 24 3 9 1PDT Circuit with Rocker In ... DOWN CENTER Position Position ON 1 8 1PDT 20 1PST 2 ON 1 7 1PDT 19 1PST 22 1PDT 2 6 1PDT 2 Illuminated 25 MOM. ON OFF 2 MOM. ON 2 24 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com V11-T2-81 2.14 Rockers Symbols Library 2 NGR, SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols 1 2 2 Inscription Catalog Number Suffix Inscription Catalog Number Suffix Inscription Catalog Number Suffix Inscription Catalog Number Suffix AA AQ BF BU AB AR BG BV AC AS BH BW AD AT BI BX AE AU BJ BY AF AV BK BZ AG AW BL CA AH AX BM CB AJ AY BN CC AK BA BP CD AL BB BQ CE AM BC BR CF AN BD BS CG AP BE BT CH 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. SAE Specification No. J1362. V11-T2-82 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com Rockers Symbols Library 2.14 NGR, SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols 1 2 Inscription Catalog Number Suffix CI Inscription Catalog Number Suffix CX Inscription Catalog Number Suffix Inscription DN Catalog Number Suffix EC 2 2 2 CJ CY DP 2 ED 2 CK DA DQ 2 EE 2 CL DB DR 2 EF 2 CM DC DS 2 EG 2 CN DD DT 2 EH 2 CP DE DU 2 EI 2 CQ DF DV 2 EJ 2 CR DG DW 2 EK 2 CS DH DX EL CT DJ DY EM CU DK DZ EN CV DL EA EO CW DM EB EP 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. SAE Specification No. J1362. Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com 2 V11-T2-83 2.14 Rockers Symbols Library 2 NGR, SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols 1 2 2 Inscription Catalog Number Suffix Inscription Catalog Number Suffix Inscription Catalog Number Suffix Inscription Catalog Number Suffix EQ FE FS GG ER FF FT GH ES FG FU GI ET FH FV GJ EU FI FW GK EV FJ FX GL EW FK FY GM EX FL FZ GN EY FM GA GP EZ FN GB GQ FA FO GC GR FB FP GD GS FC FQ GE GT FD FR GF GU 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. SAE Specification No. J1362. V11-T2-84 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com Rockers Symbols Library 2.14 NGR, SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols 1 2 Inscription Catalog Number Suffix GV Inscription Catalog Number Suffix HM Inscription Catalog Number Suffix Inscription JD Catalog Number Suffix JT 2 2 2 GW HN JE 2 JU 2 GY HP JF 2 JV 2 HA HQ JG 2 JW 2 HB HR JH 2 JX 2 HC HS JJ 2 JY 2 HD HT JK 2 JZ 2 HE HU JL 2 KA 2 HF HV JM 2 KB 2 LUZ HG HW JN KC HH HY JP KD HJ JA JQ KE HK JB JR KF HL JC JS KG 2 2 PASILLO 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. SAE Specification No. J1362. Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com 2 V11-T2-85 2.14 Rockers Symbols Library 2 NGR, SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols 1 2 2 Inscription Catalog Number Suffix Inscription Catalog Number Suffix Inscription KV KH 2 Catalog Number Suffix LJ EXIT 2 KI KW KJ KX 2 2 EXH BRK LK LL 24V. CHARGER 2 2 KK KY KL KZ KM LA KN LB LP LC LQ LD LR KQ LE LS KR LF LT 2 2 2 2 2 2 AQUA HOT HEAT EXCHGR AIR COMPSR LM LN LO DIAG 2 2 KO 2 2 KP 2 2 CRUISE SELECT TEST ALARMS 2 2 PA 2 AUX HYD OVERHEAT 2 KT 2 LH VIDEO 2 KU 2 LI ENTER 2 2 LG KS 2 1 2 G-AUX START CNTR A/C REAR A/C LU LV LW Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. SAE Specification No. J1362. V11-T2-86 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com Rockers Symbols Library 2.14 NGR Only Symbols 1 2 Inscription Catalog Number Suffix LX Inscription Catalog Number Suffix ML Inscription Catalog Number Suffix Inscription NB Catalog Number Suffix NP LY MM NC 2 NQ 2 CODE LZ MN ND 2 NR POSITION 2 LIGHT UPPER WARN LOWER WARN COMPT LIGHTS WORK LIGHTS FAST IDLE MIRROR HEAT GEN PTO MA MO NE 2 NS 2 MB MP NF 2 NT 2 MC MS NG 2 NU 2 MD MT NH 2 NV 2 ME MU NI 2 NW 2 MF MV NJ 2 NX 2 MG MW NK NY MH MX NL NZ MI MY NM PA MJ MZ NN PB MK NA NO PC 2 2 2 2 2 WIGWAG SIREN BRAKE LEFT SCENE 1 2 2 2 DIAG MASTER WARN 2 2 2 2 2 2 Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. SAE Specification No. J1362. Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com 2 V11-T2-87 2.14 Rockers Symbols Library 2 NGR Only Symbols 1 2 2 Inscription Catalog Number Suffix Inscription Catalog Number Suffix PD PS PE PT PF Inscription Catalog Number Suffix Inscription Catalog Number Suffix RG RW RH RX PU RI RY PG PV RJ RZ PH PW RK SA PI PX RL SB 2 2 2 2 CHECK ENGINE 2 2 2 2 2 2 D 2 2 PY PJ RM SC H 2 2 PK PZ RN SD PL RA RP SE PM RB RQ SF PN RC RS SG PP RD RT SH RE RU SJ RF RV SK 2 2 ABS CODE 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 PQ 2 2 PR 2 OVER LOAD DRIVE AXLE 2 2 1 2 Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. SAE Specification No. J1362. V11-T2-88 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com Rockers Symbols Library 2.14 NGR Only Symbols 1 2 Inscription Catalog Number Suffix SL Inscription Catalog Number Suffix TA Inscription Catalog Number Suffix Inscription TQ Catalog Number Suffix UE 2 2 2 SM TB TR 2 UF 2 SN TC TS 2 UG Mode 2 SP TD TT 2 UH 2 SQ TE TU 2 UK 2 SR TF TV 2 UL 2 SS TG TW 2 UM 2 ST TH TX 2 UN 2 SU TJ TY 2 UP 2 SV TK TZ UR SW TL UA US SX TM UB UT SY TN UC UU SZ TP UD UV 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. SAE Specification No. J1362. Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com 2 V11-T2-89 2.14 Rockers Symbols Library 2 NGR Only Symbols 1 2 2 Inscription Catalog Number Suffix Inscription Catalog Number Suffix Inscription Catalog Number Suffix Inscription Catalog Number Suffix UW VM WC WT UX VN WD WU UY VP WE WV UZ VR WF WW VA VS WG WX VB VT WH WY VC VU WJ WZ VD VV WK XA VE VW WL XB VF VX WM XC VG VY WN XD VH VZ WP XE VK WA WR XF VL WB WS XG 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. SAE Specification No. J1362. V11-T2-90 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com Rockers Symbols Library 2.14 NGR Only Symbols 1 2 Inscription Catalog Number Suffix XH Inscription Catalog Number Suffix XY Inscription Catalog Number Suffix Inscription YN Catalog Number Suffix ZC 2 2 2 XJ XZ YP 2 ZD 2 XK YA YQ 2 ZE 2 XL YB YR 2 ZF 2 XM YC YS 2 ZG 2 XN YD YT 2 ZH 2 XP YE YU 2 ZJ 2 XR YF YV 2 ZK 2 XS YG YW 2 ZL 2 XT YH YX ZM XU YJ YY ZN XV YK YZ ZP XW YL ZA ZR XX YM ZB ZS 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. SAE Specification No. J1362. Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com 2 V11-T2-91 2.14 Rockers Symbols Library 2 NGR Only Symbols 1 2 2 Inscription Catalog Number Suffix Inscription Catalog Number Suffix Inscription Catalog Number Suffix Inscription Catalog Number Suffix ZT H1 Y1 N2 ZU J1 Z1 P2 ZV K1 A2 R2 ZW L1 B2 S2 ZX M1 C2 T2 ZY N1 D2 U2 ZZ P1 E2 V2 A1 R1 F2 W2 B1 S1 G2 X2 C1 T1 H2 Y2 D1 U1 J2 Z2 E1 V1 K2 A3 F1 W1 L2 B3 G1 X1 M2 C3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. SAE Specification No. J1362. V11-T2-92 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com Rockers Symbols Library 2.14 NGR Only Symbols 1 2 Inscription Catalog Number Suffix D3 Inscription Catalog Number Suffix T3 Inscription Catalog Number Suffix Inscription H4 Catalog Number Suffix Y4 2 2 2 E3 U3 J4 2 Z4 2 F3 V3 K4 2 A5 2 G3 W3 L4 2 B5 2 H3 X3 M4 2 C5 2 J3 Y3 N4 2 D5 2 K3 Z3 P4 2 E5 2 L3 A4 R4 2 F5 2 M3 B4 S4 2 G5 2 N3 C4 T4 H5 P3 D4 U4 J5 Q3 E4 V4 K5 R3 F4 W4 L5 S3 G4 X4 M5 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. SAE Specification No. J1362. Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com 2 V11-T2-93 2.14 Rockers Symbols Library 2 NGR Only Symbols 1 2 2 Inscription Catalog Number Suffix Inscription Catalog Number Suffix Inscription Catalog Number Suffix Inscription Catalog Number Suffix N5 C6 S6 G7 P5 D6D6 T6 H7 Q5 E6 U6 J7 R5 F6 V6 K7 S5 G6 W6 L7 T5 H6 X6 M7 U5 J6 Y6 N7 V5 K6 Z6 P7 W5 L6 A7 Q7 X5 M6 B7 R7 Y5 N6 C7 S7 Z5 P6 D7 T7 A6 Q6 E7 U7 B6 R6 F7 V7 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. SAE Specification No. J1362. V11-T2-94 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com Rockers Symbols Library 2.14 NGR Only Symbols 1 2 Inscription Catalog Number Suffix W7 Inscription Catalog Number Suffix L8 Inscription Catalog Number Suffix Inscription A9 Catalog Number Suffix Q9 2 2 2 X7 M8 B9 2 R9 2 Y7 N8 C9 2 S9 2 Z7 P8 D9 2 T9 2 A8 Q8 E9 2 U9 2 B8 R8 F9 2 V9 2 C8 S8 G9 2 W9 2 D8 T8 H9 2 X9 2 E8 U8 J9 2 Y9 2 F8 V8 K9 Z9 G8 W8 L9 1A H8 X8 M9 1B J8 Y8 N9 1C K8 Z8 P9 1D 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. SAE Specification No. J1362. Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com V11-T2-95 2.14 Rockers Symbols Library 2 NGR Only Symbols 1 2 2 Inscription Catalog Number Suffix Inscription Catalog Number Suffix Inscription Catalog Number Suffix Inscription Catalog Number Suffix 1E 1L 1S 1Y 1F 1M 1T 1Z 1G 1N 1U 2A 1H 1P 1V 2B 1J 1Q 1W 2C 1K 1R 1X 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. SAE Specification No. J1362. V11-T2-96 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com Rockers Symbols Library 2.14 SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols 1 2 Catalog Number Suffix Inscription Inscription Catalog Number Suffix Inscription MM LX Catalog Number Suffix Inscription NB Catalog Number Suffix NR MN LY NC 2 NS SHDN OVRD HI RPM LOW RPM 2 MP MA ND 2 NT EXHST BRK MB 2 2 SET/CST 2 2 2 MQ NE 2 NU 2 MC MR NF 2 NV 2 MS MD NG 2 NW 2 TEST MT ME NH 2 NX 2 P MU MF P MG MH MV NJ F N MW 2 NY 2 NK 2 NZ 2 NL O3 2 AUX WARN 2 MI MX NM PA MJ MY NN PB MK MZ NP PC ML NA NQ PD 2 2 2 2 OVER LOAD 2 2 2 RSM/ACC 1 2 2 Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. SAE Specification No. J1362. Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com 2 V11-T2-97 2.14 Rockers Symbols Library 2 SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols 1 2 2 Inscription Catalog Number Suffix Inscription Catalog Number Suffix Inscription Catalog Number Suffix Inscription Catalog Number Suffix PT QH QX PF PU QJ QY PG PV QK PH PW QL PI PX QM PE 2 AUTO 2 2 2 2 AUTO 2 2 2 2 SET ACCEL RESUME DECEL QZ RA RB CTIS 2 PJ PY QN RC PK PZ QP RD 2 2 WINCH 2 2 QA PL QQ RE CRANE 2 2 QB QR QC QS QD QT RH PQ QE QU RJ PR QF QV RK PS QG QW RL PM 2 AUTO 2 PN AUTO 2 n/min 2 PP AUTO MODE MAN MODE RF RG AUTO 2 n/min 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. SAE Specification No. J1362. V11-T2-98 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com Rockers Symbols Library 2.14 SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols 1 2 Inscription Catalog Number Suffix Inscription Catalog Number Suffix SB RM Inscription Catalog Number Suffix Inscription SR Catalog Number Suffix TF 2 2 2 SC RN SS 2 TG 2 SD RP ST 2 TH 2 RQ SE SU 2 TJ 2 RR SF SG RS SV RPM CTRL SW 2 TK 2 2 TL 2 SH RT SX 2 TM 2 SJ RU SY 2 TN 2 ENG DIAG RV SK SZ 2 TP 2 RW SL TA RX SM TB TR RY SN TC TS RZ SP TD TT SA SQ TE TU 2 TQ 2 2 CHEM ALARM 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. SAE Specification No. J1362. Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com 2 V11-T2-99 2.14 Rockers Symbols Library 2 SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols 1 2 2 Inscription Catalog Number Suffix Catalog Number Suffix Inscription Inscription Catalog Number Suffix Inscription Catalog Number Suffix TV UK UZ VP TW UL VA VQ TX UM VB VR TY UN VC VS TZ UP VD UA UQ VE VU UB UR VF VV UC US VG VW UD UT VH VX UU VJ VY UV VK VZ UG UW VL WA UH UX VM WB UY VN WC 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 FAULT 2 VT OK 2 2 2 P 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 UE F 2 2 UF LH 2 2 2 AUTO 2 2 UJ 2 RH 2 2 1 2 Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. SAE Specification No. J1362. V11-T2-100 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com Rockers Symbols Library 2.14 SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols 1 2 Inscription Catalog Number Suffix WD Inscription Catalog Number Suffix WT Inscription Catalog Number Suffix Inscription XJ Catalog Number Suffix YA 2 2 2 WE WU XL 2 YB 2 WF WV XM 2 YC 2 WG WX XN 2 YD 2 SET/RES WH WY XP 2 YE 2 WJ WZ XQ 2 YF 2 WK XA XR 2 YG 2 WL XB XS 2 YH 2 WM XC XT 2 YJ 2 2 WN XD XU YK WP XE XV YL WQ XF XW YM WR XG XY YN WS XH XZ YP 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. SAE Specification No. J1362. Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com 2 V11-T2-101 2.14 Rockers Symbols Library 2 SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols 1 2 2 Inscription Catalog Number Suffix Inscription Catalog Number Suffix Inscription Catalog Number Suffix Inscription Catalog Number Suffix YQ ZE ZV K1 YR ZF ZW L1 YS ZG ZX M1 YT ZH ZY N1 YU ZJ ZZ P1 YV ZK A1 R1 YW ZL B1 S1 YX ZM C1 T1 YY ZN D1 U1 YZ ZP E1 V1 ZA ZR F1 W1 G1 X1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 RPM 2 2 ZB ZS ZC ZT H1 Y1 ZD ZU J1 Z1 RPM 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. SAE Specification No. J1362. V11-T2-102 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com Rockers Symbols Library 2.14 SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols 1 2 Inscription Catalog Number Suffix A2 Inscription Catalog Number Suffix R2 Inscription Catalog Number Suffix Inscription G3 Catalog Number Suffix U3 2 2 2 B2 S2 H3 2 V3 2 C2 T2 I3 W3 2 2 D2 U2 J3 2 X3 2 E2 V2 K3 2 Y3 2 F2 W2 L3 2 Z3 2 G2 X2 M3 2 A4 2 H2 Y2 N3 2 B4 2 J2 Z2 O3 2 C4 2 K2 A3 P3 D4 L2 B3 Q3 E4 M2 C3 R3 F4 N2 D3 S3 G4 P2 F3 T3 H4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. SAE Specification No. J1362. Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com 2 V11-T2-103 2.14 Rockers Symbols Library 2 SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols 1 2 2 Inscription Catalog Number Suffix Inscription Catalog Number Suffix Inscription Catalog Number Suffix Inscription Catalog Number Suffix I4 P4 V4 B5 J4 Q4 W4 C5 K4 R4 X4 D5 L4 S4 Y4 X5 M4 T4 Z4 X6 N4 U4 A5 X7 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 O4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. SAE Specification No. J1362. V11-T2-104 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com Special Devices High Capacity Switch 3.1 High Capacity Switches Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2 3.3 Keylock V11-T3-2 V11-T3-2 V11-T3-2 V11-T3-3 V11-T3-3 V11-T3-4 V11-T3-4 Keylock Switches, General Purpose/Heavy Duty--AC/DC Rated Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4 V11-T3-2 Panelboard Switches Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Panel Board Switch V11-T3-2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V11-T3-5 V11-T3-5 V11-T3-6 V11-T3-7 V11-T3-7 V11-T3-8 Locking Rocker Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 V11-T3-9 V11-T3-9 V11-T3-9 V11-T3-10 V11-T3-10 V11-T3-10 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Locking Rocker 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--November 2012 www.eaton.com V11-T3-1 3.1 3 Special Devices High Capacity Switches Contents High Capacity Switch Description 3 High Capacity Switches 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Product Description Technical Data and Specifications The heavy duty high capacity switch, Catalog Number 7818K1 is ideal for exceptionally high-power applications, for heavy-duty motor loads and for use in welding equipment or similar industrial applications. High Capacity Switches By combining innovative design and quality materials, this switch is designed to carry the specified maximum inrush current for 10 milliseconds for a minimum of 20,000 ON/OFF cycles. Terminal types Screw--brass (Catalog Number 11-6074-4) supplied. Furnish unassembled Mounting means Molded flush mounting bracket, high impact polycarbonate, 3.312 in (84.12 mm), center-to-center spacing and 2.375 in (60.33 mm) spacing for self-tapping screws Lever Nylon Standards and Certifications Dimensions UL(R) to Standard 508, File E147754 Description Specification Circuits 2PST, maintained Contact mechanism Quick-make/quick-break snap acting butt contact Make: 200A peak inrush at 125 Vac for 10 ms for 20,000 cycles minimum Break: 20A at 125 Vac for 20,000 cycles minimum Contact material 10% silver cadmium oxide composite Base Molded thermoset material Dielectric withstand 2200V rms minimum Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 7818K1 3 3 3 3.812 (96.82) 3.281 (83.34) Mtg. Product Selection 3 2.250 (57.15) Max. 3 3 3 0.781 (19.84) 1.250 (31.75) 3 3 1.406 (35.71) Max. High Capacity Switch Description Catalog Number 40A, 600 Vac 5 hp, 250 Vac 7818K1 V11-T3-2 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--November 2012 www.eaton.com Special Devices Panelboard Switches 3.2 Contents Panel Board Switches Description Panelboard Switches Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Page 3 V11-T3-4 V11-T3-4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Product Description This group of two-position power toggle switches is used by manufacturers in a wide variety of applications that require dependability and long service, such as welding equipment, commercial floor polishers, battery chargers, food processors and panelboards. 3 Standards and Certifications 3 UL Recognized CSA(R) Certified as noted 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--November 2012 www.eaton.com V11-T3-3 3.2 Special Devices Panelboard Switches 3 Product Selection 3 8980K1 Panelboard Switches Poles and Throw Mounting Terminals Catalog Number 60A, 250 Vac/Vdc 2 hp, 125-250 Vac/Vdc 1 2PST N/A N/A 8980K1 2 30A, 250 Vac/Vdc 30A, 125V "T" 2 hp, 120-240 Vac 1P double break Frame plate Center bus 8980K2 30A, 250 Vac/Vdc 20A, 600 Vac 2 hp, 120-600 Vac 2PST Panel type strap Screw 8980K5 30A, 250 Vac/Vdc 20A, 600 Vac 2 hp, 120-600 Vac Three-phase 3PST Panel type Screw 8980K6 3 30A, 250 Vac/Vdc 2 hp, 120-240 Vac 1 hp, 480 Vac 2PST Panel type strap Screw 8980K14 3 3 30A, 250 Vac/Vdc 2 hp, 120-240 Vac 2PST Panel type strap Screw 8980K16 Rating 3 3 3 3 8980K5 3 3 3 3 3 Technical Data and Specifications Panelboard Switches Description Specification 3 Rating 10-60A; 120-600V See Product Selection table 3 Circuits 1PST, 2PST, 3PST 2 circuit, maintained Except for Catalog Number 8980K13, momentary 3 Contact mechanism Quick-make/quick-break wiping action Except for Catalog Number 8980K13, quick-make/quick-break butt contact 3 Contact material Movable--bronze; stationary--copper; Catalog Number 8980K13--silver Terminal types Screw or bus 3 Termination material Copper Mounting means Two-hole mounting--panel type flush 3 Dielectric withstand 1000 volts rms minimum Operating temperature range 0 to 150F (-17.8 to 65.6C) 3 3 Notes 1 For appliance use only; 32A, 480 Vac, 25A, 600 Vac. 2 CSA Certified. 3 Binding screws assembled. For binding screws provided unassembled, order Catalog Number 8980K30. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V11-T3-4 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--November 2012 www.eaton.com Special Devices Keylock Switches, General Purpose/Heavy Duty--AC/DC Rated 3.3 Contents General Purpose and Heavy Duty Keylocks Description Page Keylock Switches, General Purpose/Heavy Duty--AC/DC Rated Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T3-6 V11-T3-7 V11-T3-7 V11-T3-8 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Product Description Features General Purpose Termination Types Mounting Means General Purpose Solder lugs--Brass silverplated General Purpose Threaded bushing--0.468 in (11.89 mm) dia. Heavy Duty 7842 Series Screw terminals--Brass designed to accept #7-32 x 3/16 binding head screws Keyway--0.062-0.067 in wide x 0.035-0.370 deep (1.55-1.70 mm wide x 0.89-0.94 mm deep These keylock switches provide reliable performance in a space-saving design. They all use quick-make/ quick-break switching mechanisms, with wiping action blades for self-cleaning contacts. Heavy Duty These switches have a slowmake/slow-break switching mechanism with large butt type contacts. Their high current switching capability allows them to be used for locking switching circuits in power applications. Furnished unassembled 7846 Series Quick connect terminals-- Brass Hardware supplied-- 1 hexnut (Cat. No. 15-192) and 1 chamfered dress nut (Cat. No. 15-994-2) Furnished unassembled 3 Heavy Duty 7842 Series Slotted bushing--0.468 in (11.89 mm) dia. Hardware supplied-- 4 terminal screws and 1 hexnut Furnished unassembled 7846 Series Hardware supplied-- 2 hexnuts 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--November 2012 www.eaton.com V11-T3-5 3.3 3 Special Devices Keylock Switches, General Purpose/Heavy Duty--AC/DC Rated Product Selection General Purpose Keylock AC/DC Switches 3 Circuit with Key in ... (Keyway Down) CENTER Position RIGHT LEFT (Keyway) Position Position Key Removal Position Solder Lug Terminal Catalog Number 3 Rating 3 6A, 125 Vac/Vdc 3A, 250 Vac/Vdc 1PST -- -- OFF OFF ON ON CENTER CENTER and RIGHT 8928K492 8928K493 3 6A, 125 Vac/Vdc 1A, 250 Vac/Vdc 1PDT -- ON ON CENTER and RIGHT 8928K494 3 6A, 125 Vac/Vdc 1-1/2A, 250 Vdc 1PDT -- ON ON CENTER 8283K150 3 6A, 125 Vac/Vdc 3A, 250 Vdc 2PST -- -- OFF ON ON OFF CENTER CENTER 8370K150 8370K151 3 6A, 125 Vac/Vdc 3A, 250 Vac/Vdc 2PST -- OFF ON CENTER and RIGHT 8928K495 3 6A, 125 Vac/Vdc 3A, 250 Vdc 2PDT -- -- ON ON ON ON CENTER CENTER and RIGHT 8373K150 8373K151 3 Poles and Throw Heavy Duty Keylock AC Rated Switches 3 Rating 3 Circuit Action Key Removal Slotted Bushing Length Position Inches mm Type of Termination Key Style Catalog Number 2PST OFF-ON-OFF-ON OFF Quick Connect E (13-8173) 7846K1 1 7846 Type Series 20A, 120 Vac 20A, 240 Vac 1-1/2 hp, 120 Vac 2 hp, 240 Vac 3 3 0.50 12.7 Note 1 Not CSA Certified. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V11-T3-6 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--November 2012 www.eaton.com Special Devices Keylock Switches, General Purpose/Heavy Duty--AC/DC Rated 3.3 Accessories Keys for Locking Switches Additional keys may be ordered from the Key Selection table. Where Used 13-8171 Key styles shown match those listed for specific switches in the Product Selection tables. 3 Key Selection 13-5496 13-8173 3 Catalog Number General purpose and heavy duty series 13-5496 3 Security locking bracket 13-8171 3 7846K1 13-8173 3 3 3 Rotary Keylock Brackets-- Security Tumbler Type Key Selection This series of rotary keylock is designed for use in security applications. They provide a simple method of converting single- and two-pole toggle switches. For use with twoor three-position switches. Where Used 3 Catalog Number Key removable in counterclockwise position 3 8980P25 3 Key removable in clockwise 8980P27 position Key removable in either extreme position 3 8980P28 3 3 Technical Data and Specifications 3 Keylock Switches, General Purpose/Heavy Duty--AC/DC Rated Description General Purpose Heavy Duty 3 Circuits 1PST, 1PDT, 2PST, 2PDT Maintained action 2PST, 2-circuit maintained 3 3 Contact mechanism Quick-make/quick-break wiping action Slow-make/slow-break butt contact Contact material Movable--Bronze silver-plated Stationary--Brass silver-plated Movable--Silver cadmium oxide Stationary--Silver cadmium oxide 3 3 Rotary Keylock Brackets Description Specification Bushing 7/8 in dia., 24 threads/inch 3 3 Mounting hardware and keys 1 hexagon locknut Cat. No. 15-2528-2 1 bright chrome plated dress nut Cat. No. 15-2528-2 (furnished unassembled) 2 keys Cat. No. 13-8171 3 Lock bushing Diecast zinc Lock barrel and dress nut Chrome plated brass 3 Keys Brass 3 Finish 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--November 2012 www.eaton.com V11-T3-7 3.3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Keylock Switches, General Purpose/Heavy Duty--AC/DC Rated Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 8928K493--1PST/1PDT 8373K151--2PST/2PDT 0.196 (4.97) 0.198 (5.03) 0.200 (5.08) 0.516 (13.11) 0.196 (4.97) 0.198 (5.03) 0.200 (5.08) 0.516 (13.11) 18 18 18 0.471 (11.96) Dia. 0.473 (12.01) 0.056 (1.42) 0.068 (1.73) 0.056 (1.42) 0.068 (1.73) Mtg. Hole 3 3 Special Devices 15/32-32 Thds. Mtg. Hole Key Removable in Both Positions 0.061 (1.55) 0.063 (1.60) 3 0.545 (13.84) 0.841 (21.36) 3 3 1.375 (34.92) 0.687 (17.45) 1.080 (27.43) 0.750 (19.05) 0.960 (24.38) 1.080 (27.43) 3 Key Removable in Both Positions 15/32-32 Thds. 0.490 (12.45) 3 18 0.471 (11.96) Dia. 0.473 (12.01) 0.010 (0.25) 0.220 (5.59) 0.823 (20.90) 0.735 (18.67) 0.175 (4.44) 3 3 7842K2--2PST 3 3 3 3 3 7846K1--2PST Keyway 0.065 W x 0.032-0.035 D (1.65 W x 0.81-0.89 D) Keyway 0.080-0.085 W x 0.044-0.046 D (2.03-2.16 W x 1.12-1.17 D) 15/32-32 TPT 0.718 (18.24) 0.953 (24.21) 0.750 (19.05) 1.032 (26.21) 0.343 (8.71) 3 1.171 (29.74) 1.312 (33.32) 3 3 3 3 3 1.296 (32.92) 3 0.906 (23.01) 3 3 3 V11-T3-8 7/8-24 T.P.I. (22.23) 15/32-32 TPT 0.500 (12.70) 0.562 (14.27) 8980P27 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--November 2012 www.eaton.com Special Devices Locking Rockers 3.4 Contents Locking Rockers Description Page Locking Rockers Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Circuit Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T3-10 V11-T3-10 V11-T3-10 V11-T3-10 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Product Description This unique switch features a patented internal locking mechanism, which allows the switch to be locked in the OFF position to prevent unauthorized or accidental operation. The key to locking or unlocking the switch is a removable paddle rocker cap, which must be inserted in order to move the switch to the ON position. The switch can still be turned OFF. The locking rocker is ideally suited for such markets as portable tools, computers, lawn and garden equipment, marine and construction. 3 Standards and Certifications 3 UL Recognized CSA Certified RoHS Compliant 1 3 3 Note: Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative for selection information and optional features. Locking Rocker Switch DOWN Position Poles and Throw Base Circuit (See Page V11-T3-10) Catalog Number 3 3 Without Palm Guard Feature 3 1PST ON NONE OFF A 8166K27 1PDT ON NONE ON B 8166K28 2PST ON NONE OFF C 8166K25 2PDT ON NONE ON D 8166K26 3 ON NONE OFF A 8166K23 3 3 With Palm Guard Feature 20A, 125 Vac 20A, 250 Vac 1 hp, 125 Vac 2 hp, 250 Vac 3 3 Circuit with Rocker in ... UP CENTER Position Position 20A, 125 Vac 20A, 250 Vac 1 hp, 125 Vac 2 hp, 250 Vac 3 3 Product Selection Rating 2 3 1PST 1PDT ON NONE ON B 8166K24 2PST ON NONE OFF C 8166K21 2PDT ON NONE ON D 8166K22 3 3 Notes 1 Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for the most up-to-date list of verified part numbers. 2 Ratings listed for 125 Vac also apply at 28 Vdc. Also supplied with a 20A, 277 Vac rating as standard. 3 3 3 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--November 2012 www.eaton.com V11-T3-9 3.4 Special Devices Locking Rockers 3 Accessories 3 53-3021-2 Replacement Cap 3 Description Catalog Number Red paddle rocker replacement cap 53-3021-2 3 3 3 Technical Data and Specifications Circuit Diagrams 3 Locking Rocker Switch Locking Rocker Circuit Diagrams Description Specification Circuit Letter 3 Contact mechanism Butt action contact mechanism designed specifically for use on AC and low voltage DC applications 3 A 1PST Contact material Movable--Silver-plated copper w/cad-oxide contact face button Stationary--Copper w/cad-oxide contact face button 3 3 3 3 3 3 Terminal types 0.25 in spade terminals are standard Rocker material Custom styled, red thermoplastic rocker key with "REMOVE TO LOCK" across the top of the key in raised letters Dielectric 1000V rms minimum Recommended Panel Cutout Dimensions 0.650 (16.51) 0.440 (11.18) 0.250 (6.35) 0.745 (18.92) 3 1.450 (36.83) 0.960 (24.38) 0.680 (17.27) 0.830 (21.08) Locking Rocker Switch with Palm Guard 3 Recommended Panel Cutout Dimensions 0.960 (24.38) 0.744 (18.90) 0.225 (5.72) 0.650 (16.51) 1.700 (43.18) 1.190 (30.23) 1.080 (27.43) 3 3 1.190 (30.23) 1.700 (43.18) 1.080 (27.43) 3 3 1 2 3 Locking Rocker Switch without Palm Guard 3 3 B 1PDT Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3 3 2 3 Dimensions 3 3 Schematic 0.250 (6.35) 3 0.440 (11.18) 1.450 (36.83) 0.745 (18.92) 0.960 (24.38) 0.680 (17.27) 0.830 (21.08) 3 3 V11-T3-10 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--November 2012 www.eaton.com Circuit Letter Schematic C 2PST 2 3 D 2PDT 1 2 3 5 6 4 5 6 Toggle Switches Military 4.1 Introduction Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2 Illuminated AC Rated 4.4 4.7 X Series Toggles 4.9 V11-T4-10 V11-T4-10 V11-T4-12 V11-T4-16 V11-T4-16 V11-T4-20 V11-T4-21 V11-T4-21 V11-T4-25 V11-T4-25 V11-T4-26 V11-T4-27 V11-T4-29 V11-T4-29 Accessories Mounting Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-31 Decorator Facenuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-33 Panel Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-33 Replacement Terminal Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-33 Indicating Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-34 Technical Data Circuit Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 V11-T4-24 Heavy Duty Hesitation Switches Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8 V11-T4-9 X Series Toggles Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Purpose AC/DC Rated V11-T4-7 General Purpose Toggles--AC/DC Rated Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6 V11-T4-6 General Purpose Toggles--AC Rated Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 V11-T4-3 Illuminated AC Rated Toggles Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 4 Military Purpose Toggles Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3 V11-T4-2 V11-T4-35 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--November 2012 www.eaton.com V11-T4-1 4.1 4 Toggle Switches Introduction Contents Toggle Switches Description 4 Military Purpose Toggles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illuminated AC Rated Toggles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Purpose Toggles--AC Rated. . . . . . . . . . . General Purpose Toggles--AC/DC Rated. . . . . . . . X Series Toggles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heavy Duty Hesitation Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Product Selection Guide 4 Toggle Switches 4 Military Purpose Toggles Illuminated AC Rated Switches General Purpose Toggles-- AC Rated Product Selection Page V11-T4-3 Page V11-T4-9 Page V11-T4-20 Circuit Diagram Page V11-T4-35 -- Page V11-T4-35 Product Description Eaton's military purpose switches are designed to meet the requirements of MIL-S-83731 These illuminated switches are available only in single-pole circuitry. A two-pole base is utilized with single-pole housing the lamp. These AC rated toggle switches offer the widest selection of features and the design flexibility to meet a variety of applications. X Series Toggles Heavy Duty Hesitation Switches 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 General Purpose Toggles-- AC/DC Rated 4 4 4 4 4 4 Product Selection Page V11-T4-20 Page V11-T4-24 Page V11-T4-27 Circuit Diagram Page V11-T4-35 -- Page V11-T4-35 Product Description This line of switches employs a quickmake/quick-break contact mechanism. These switches are especially suited for use in small motor applications. Eaton's new, competitively priced, AC rated X Series toggles offer a standard high rating for both single- and two-pole applications. The most common application for this switch is to help prevent motor damage resulting from the high current generation by counter EMF of the armature at the time of reversing. 4 4 V11-T4-2 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--November 2012 www.eaton.com V11-T4-3 V11-T4-9 V11-T4-11 V11-T4-20 V11-T4-24 V11-T4-27 V11-T4-31 V11-T4-35 Toggle Switches Military Purpose Toggles 4.2 Contents Military Purpose Toggles Page 4 V11-T4-6 V11-T4-7 4 Description Military Purpose Toggles Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Product Description Eaton's military purpose switches are designed to meet the requirements of MIL-S-83731. Sealed Switches have a silicone rubber lever seal assembled between the lever and the bushing to resist the entrance of contaminants such as dust, sand or water into the contact structure. The switch mechanisms are completely enclosed to resist the entrance of contaminants into the switch. All metal parts are plated to resist corrosion. The heavy duty switches are offered in both standard toggle lever and lever lock versions. Circuit designations are stamped on the side of each switch. 4 Standards and Certifications 4 MIL-S-83731 4 4 4 4 4 Product Selection 4 AC/DC Rated (Medium Duty) MIL-S-83731 Circuit with Toggle in ... UP Position Current Ratings CENTER Position Poles and Throw DOWN Position (Keyway) 4 Military Solder Lug Terminals Base Circuit See Page V11-T4-35 Dimension "A" Inches (mm) Dimension "B" Inches (mm) MIL-S-83731 with Sealed Lever Catalog Number Single-Pole See A below 1PST ON ON OFF NONE NONE NONE OFF MOM. OFF MOM. ON A -- 0.906 (23.01) MS25098-22 MS25098-29 MS25098-30 8261K22 8261K29 8261K30 See A below 1PDT ON ON NONE NONE ON MOM. ON B 0.937 (23.80) -- MS25098-23 MS25098-26 8261K23 8261K26 Two-Pole See B below 2PST ON ON OFF NONE NONE NONE OFF MOM. OFF MOM. ON C -- 0.906 (23.01) MS25100-22 MS25100-29 MS25100-30 8262K22 8262K29 8262K30 See C below 2PDT ON ON NONE NONE ON MOM. ON D 0.937 (23.80) -- MS25100-23 MS25100-26 8262K23 8262K26 Current Ratings Current Capacity in Amperes per Pole = 125 Vac, 60 Hz Part Number A AII MS25098 B MS25100-22, 29, 30 C MS25100-23, 26 Resistive Load Inductive Load 3.0 3.0 1.0 1.5 1.5 1.0 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--November 2012 www.eaton.com 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 V11-T4-3 4.2 Toggle Switches Military Purpose Toggles AC Rated (Heavy Duty) MIL-S-83731 with Lever Seal 4 Circuit with Toggle in ... UP Position 4 Poles and Throw 4 Current Ratings 4 Single-Pole 4 4 4 4 4 CENTER Position DOWN Position (Keyway) Base Circuit See Page V11-T4-35 Bushing Length "A" Inches (mm) Lever Length "B" Inches (mm) Screw Terminals with Sealed Lever MS Part Number Catalog Number See A below See B below 1PST ON ON ON ON NONE OFF NONE OFF NONE MOM. OFF OFF NONE OFF NONE MOM. OFF NONE MOM. ON MOM. ON A 0.468 (11.89) 0.687 (17.45) MS35058-22 MS35058-24 MS35058-29 MS35058-25 MS35058-28 MS35058-30 8801K22 8801K23 8813K17 8813K18 8811K18 8811K17 See A below See B below 1PDT ON ON ON MOM. ON ON OFF NONE NONE OFF OFF ON ON MOM. ON MOM. ON MOM. ON B 0.468 (11.89) 0.687 (17.45) MS35058-21 MS35058-23 MS35058-26 MS35058-27 MS35058-31 8800K16 8810K15 8804K13 8812K14 8809K16 See C below See D below 2PST ON ON ON ON NONE OFF NONE OFF NONE MOM. OFF OFF NONE OFF NONE MOM. OFF NONE MOM. ON MOM. ON C 0.468 (11.89) 0.687 (17.45) MS35059-22 MS35059-24 MS35059-29 MS35059-25 MS35059-28 MS35059-30 8822K20 8822K21 8828K13 8828K12 8826K14 8826K15 See C below See D below 2PDT ON ON ON MOM. ON ON OFF NONE NONE OFF OFF ON ON MOM. ON MOM. ON MOM. ON D 0.468 (11.89) 0.687 (17.45) MS35059-21 MS35059-23 MS35059-26 MS35059-27 MS35059-31 8820K16 8824K14 8830K13 8834K5 8832K6 See E below 1P3T in a 2P base ON 1 ON 1 MOM. ON 1 ON 1 ON 1 MOM. ON 1 ON 2 ON 2 ON 2 ON 3 ON 3 ON 3 ON 4 MOM. ON 4 MOM. ON 4 ON 4 MOM. ON 4 MOM. ON 4 See Page V11-T4-35 0.468 (11.89) 0.687 (17.45) MS25201-4 MS25201-5 MS25201-6 MS25201-7 MS25201-8 MS25201-9 8860K4 8860K5 8860K6 8860K7 5 8860K8 5 8860K9 5 See F below See G below 4PST ON ON ON NONE OFF NONE OFF MOM. OFF OFF NONE OFF NONE NONE MOM. ON MOM. ON E 0.468 (11.89) 0.687 (17.45) -- MS25068-24 MS25068-25 MS25068-28 -- 7660K12 7660K13 7668K7 7666K9 7666K6 See F below See G below 4PDT ON ON ON MOM. ON ON OFF NONE NONE OFF OFF ON ON MOM. ON MOM. ON MOM. ON F 0.468 (11.89) 0.687 (17.45) MS25068-21 MS25068-23 MS25068-26 MS25068-27 MS25068-31 7662K7 7664K5 7674K5 7672K5 7670K6 Two-Pole 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Four-Pole 4 4 4 4 4 Current Ratings Current Capacity in Amperes per Pole 28 Vdc 115 Vac, 60 Hz Switch Type of Operation Lamp Load Resistive Load Inductive Load Lamp Load Resistive Load Inductive Load Lamp Load Resistive Load Inductive Load MS35058 MS35058 MS35059 MS35059 MS25201 MS25068 MS25068 Maintained Momentary Maintained Momentary ON-ON-ON Maintained Momentary 7 5 7 5 5 5 4 25 20 20 18 18 20 18 15 10 15 10 10 12 10 -- -- -- -- 2 -- -- 10 10 20 11 11 -- -- 10 7 -- -- 8 -- -- 3 -- 4 -- 2 4 2 10 -- 20 -- 11 20 11 10 -- 15 -- 8 15 5 4 4 A B C D E F G 4 4 4 115 Vac, 400 Hz Notes 1 Across terminals 2-3 and 5-6. 2 Across terminals 1-2 and 5-6. 3 Across terminals 2-3 and 4-5. 4 Across terminals 1-2 and 4-5. 5 For "INDEPENDENT ON-ON-ON" circuit arrangement, see Page V11-T4-35. 4 4 4 4 V11-T4-4 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--November 2012 www.eaton.com 4.2 Toggle Switches Military Purpose Toggles AC Rated (Heavy Duty) MIL-S-83731 Lever Lock with Lever Seal Circuit with Toggle in ... UP Position Current Ratings CENTER Position DOWN Position Poles and Throw Base Circuit See (Keyway) Page V11-T4-35 Lever Lock Bushing Style 1 4 Screw Terminals with Sealed Lever Bushing Length "A" Inches (mm) Lever Lock Length "B" Inches (mm) 4 MS Part Number Catalog Number Single-Pole 4 4 See A below 1PST ON ON ON NONE NONE OFF OFF OFF NONE A 3 4 5 0.562 (14.27) 1.000 (25.40) MS25125-C2 MS25125-E2 MS25125-J4 8857K47 8857K48 8857K49 See A below 1PDT ON ON ON OFF NONE NONE ON B 2 3 4 0.562 (14.27) 1.000 (25.40) MS25125-B1 MS25125-C3 MS25125-E3 8857K40 8857K45 8857K44 4 ON ON ON OFF OFF NONE C 1 2 4 0.562 (14.27) 1.000 (25.40) MS25126-A1 MS25126-B1 MS25126-E3 8858K39 8858K40 8858K44 4 ON NONE F 4 0.562 (14.27) 1.000 (25.40) MS25127-E3 8859K44 ON ON Two-Pole See B below 2PDT ON ON ON Four-Pole See C below 4PDT ON Indicates direction against which lever is locked. Switch 4 4 4 4 Current Ratings A MS25125 B MS25126 C MS25127 4 Current Capacity in Amperes per Pole 28 Vdc 115 Vac, 60 Hz Type of Operation Lamp Load Resistive Load Inductive Load Lamp Load Resistive Load Inductive Load Lamp Load Resistive Load Inductive Load Maintained Maintained Maintained 5 7 5 20 20 20 15 15 15 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 3 4 4 10 20 20 10 15 15 115 Vac, 400 Hz 4 4 4 4 Note 1 See illustrations below for lever lock bushing styles. 4 Lever Lock Bushing Styles Style 1 Style 2 Style 3 Style 4 4 Style 5 4 4 Locked in Three Positions Locked in Center Positions Locked in Keyway Side Locked out of Center Position 4 Locked in Center and Side Opposite Keyway 4 These illustrations are for pictoral representation only--keyway on right-hand side. 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--November 2012 www.eaton.com V11-T4-5 4.2 Toggle Switches Military Purpose Toggles AC Rated (Heavy Duty) Military with Unsealed Lever 4 Circuit with Toggle in ... UP CENTER DOWN Position Position Position 4 4 Current Ratings 4 Single-Pole 4 4 Poles and Throw 4 NONE NONE NONE OFF MOM. OFF MOM. ON A 0.468 (11.89) 0.688 (17.45) 7300K38 7304K38 7303K38 7300K36 7304K36 7303K36 See A below 1PDT ON ON ON MOM. ON ON OFF NONE NONE OFF OFF ON ON MOM. ON MOM. ON MOM. ON B 0.468 (11.89) 0.688 (17.45) 7301K38 7302K38 7307K38 7306K38 7305K38 7301K36 7302K36 7307K36 7306K36 7305K36 See C below See D below 2PST ON ON OFF NONE NONE NONE OFF MOM. OFF MOM. ON C 0.468 (11.89) 0.688 (17.45) 7310K38 7314K38 7313K38 7310K36 7314K36 7313K36 See C below 2PDT ON ON ON MOM. ON ON OFF NONE NONE OFF OFF ON ON MOM. ON MOM. ON MOM. ON D 0.468 (11.89) 0.688 (17.45) 7311K38 7312K38 7317K38 7316K38 7315K38 7311K36 7312K36 7317K36 7316K36 7315K36 See D below Current Ratings 4 4 Type of Operation 4 Single-Pole A Maintained B Momentary Two-Pole C Maintained D Momentary 4 4 4 5 4 20 15 15 10 15 15 7 5 30 20 15 10 25 15 Horsepower 250 Vac, 60 Hz Resistive Inductive Load Load Horsepower -- -- -- -- 6 6 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 9 6 -- -- -- -- Description Specification Ratings See Product Selection tables Circuits 1PST, 1PDT, 2PST, 2PDT, 1P3T (ON-ON-ON), 4PST and 4PDT; maintained and momentary action Contact action Heavy duty--Slow-make/slow-break butt contact Medium duty--Quick-make/quick-break, wiping action Contact material Heavy duty: Movable--silver-plated copper with fine or coin silver contact face button Stationary--copper with fine or coin silver contact face button Medium duty: Movable--copper silver-plated Stationary--bronze silver-plated Terminal types Heavy duty MIL-S-83731 types: Screw terminals--brass designed to accept #6-32 x 6.35 mm (0.250 in) pan head (Catalog Number 11-1893) screws and Si bronze #6 helical lockwasher (Catalog Number 16-1096). Furnished unassembled. Terminal screws are tin dipped to facilitate soldering if required Heavy duty JAN-S-23 types: Screw terminals--brass designed to accept #6-32 x 4.78 mm (0.188 in) binding head (Catalog Number 811-2) screws. Furnished unassembled Solder lug terminals--tintillate plated brass Medium duty MIL-S-83731 types: Solder lugs--brass silver-plated furnished with 0.094 in (2.39 mm) dia. hole Base material Thermoset molding material Mounting means Threaded bushing--0.468 in (11.89 mm) dia., 32 threads/inch Keyway--0.068 x 0.035 in (1.73 x 0.89 mm) deep; provides anti-rotation feature Hardware supplied: MIL-S-83731 types-- 2 hexagon facenuts (Catalog Number 15-966-6), 1 locking ring (Catalog Number 29-761) and 1 internal tooth lockwasher (Catalog Number 16-886). Furnished unassembled JAN-S-23 types--2 hexagon facenuts (Catalog Number 15-966-6). Furnished unassembled 4 4 125 Vac, 60 Hz Resistive Inductive Load Load Military Purpose Switches 4 4 Current Capacity in Amperes per Pole 30 Vdc Lamp Resistive Inductive Load Load Load Technical Data and Specifications 4 4 Screw Terminals Catalog Number ON ON OFF 4 4 Solder Lug Terminals Catalog Number Two-Pole 4 4 Lever Length "B" Inches (mm) 1PST See B below 4 4 Bushing Length "A" Inches (mm) See A below See B below 4 4 (Keyway) Base Circuit See Page V11-T4-35 4 4 Dielectric 1000V minimum 4 Operating temperature range 0 to 150F (-17.8 to 65.6C) V11-T4-6 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--November 2012 www.eaton.com 4.2 Toggle Switches Military Purpose Toggles Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 4 AC/DC Rated (Medium Duty) MIL-83731 Switches 4 1PDT Maintained Action (Solder Lug) 0.070 (1.78) 14 0.687 (17.45) 0.680 (17.27) 14 0.687 (17.45) 0.041 (1.01) 15/32-32NS-2A 0.468 (11.89) Dim. A 0.937 (23.80) 0.070 (1.78) 14 0.680 (17.27) 14 1 1.250 (31.75) 2 3 (Ref.) Dim. A 0.937 (23.80) 4 5 6 (Ref.) 1 2 3 (Ref.) 0.080 (2.03) Dia. End Terminal 0.080 (2.03) Dia. End Terminal 0.090 (2.29) Dia. Center Terminal 1.250 (31.75) B 15/32-32 Thds. 0.620 (15.75) 4 A 1.310 (33.27) #6-32 x 0.250 (6.35) Pan Head Screws 4 1.060 (26.92) 1.040 (26.42) 0.750 (19.05) 4 1.310 (33.27) 1.120 (28.45) 15/32-32 Thds. 4 4 #6-32 x 0.250 (6.35) Long Pan Head Screws Keyway 0.030 (0.76) Deep 0.060 (1.52) Wide B 4 4 Four-Pole Maintained and Momentary Action 15/32-32 Thds. 1.430 (36.32) Keyway 0.030 (0.76) Deep 0.060 (1.52) Wide 4 4 B 4 A A 1.200 (30.48) 4 4 B A Two-Pole Momentary Action and 3 ON Circuits 4 4 0.750 (19.05) #6-32 x 0.180 (4.57) Long Pan Head Screws 4 4 Two-Pole Maintained Action Keyway 0.030 (0.76) Deep 0.060 (1.52) Wide 15/32-32 Thds. 4 4 AC Rated (Heavy Duty) MIL-83731 Switches with Lever Seal Keyway 0.030 (0.76) Deep 0.060 (1.52) Wide 4 4 Dim. B 0.906 (23.01) 0.090 (2.29) Dia. Center Terminal Single-Pole Maintained and Momentary Action 4 4 0.041 (1.01) 15/32-32NS-2A 0.468 (11.89) Dim. B 0.906 (23.01) 4 2PDT Maintained Action (Solder Lug) 4 1.320 (33.53) 4 1.250 (31.75) 4 4 #6-32 x 0.250 (6.35) Long Pan Head Screws Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--November 2012 www.eaton.com 4 V11-T4-7 4.2 4 4 4 4 AC Rated (Heavy Duty) MIL-83731 Lever Lock Switches with Lever Seal AC Rated (Heavy Duty) Single-Pole 1PDT Maintained Action 4 28 Keyway 0.030 (0.76) Deep 0.060 (1.52) Wide 14 15/32-32 Thds. 1.120 (28.45) B 0.620 (15.75) 0.620 (15.75) 1.140 (28.96) 1.120 (28.45) Keyway 0.030-0.040 D x 0.060-0.070 W (0.76-1.02 D x 1.52-1.78 W) 60 #6-32 x 0.180 (4.57) Long Binding Head Screw Two-Pole 4 2PDT Maintained Action Keyway 0.030 (0.76) Deep 0.060 (1.52) Wide 4 28 14 0.750 (19.05) 4 B 15/32-32 Thds. B 4 0.900 (22.86) Keyway 0.030-0.040 D x 0.060-0.070 W (0.76-1.02 D x 1.52-1.78 W) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 A A 4 4 1.040 (26.42) #6-32 Screws 4 4 15/32-32 Thds. A A 4 4 B 15/32 Dia. 4 4 Military Purpose Toggles Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 4 4 Toggle Switches 1.250 (31.75) 1.310 (33.27) 0.760 (19.30) 0.030 (0.76) Ref. 0.270 (6.86) 0.040 (1.02) #6-32 Screws 0.180 (4.57) Four-Pole 2PDT Momentary Action Keyway 0.030 (0.76) Deep 0.060 (1.52) Wide 36 18 0.750 (19.05) 0.800 (20.32) B 15/32-32 Thds. B Keyway 0.030-0.040 D x 0.060-0.070 W (0.76-1.02 D x 1.52-1.78 W) A A 1.310 (33.27) 1.310 (33.27) 4 4 1.590 (40.39) 0.910 (23.11) #6-32 Screws 0.300 (7.62) 4 V11-T4-8 0.030 (0.76) Ref. Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--November 2012 www.eaton.com 4.3 Toggle Switches Illuminated AC Rated Toggles Contents Illuminated AC Rated Toggles Page 4 V11-T4-10 V11-T4-10 4 Description Illuminated AC Rated Switches Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Product Description These illuminated toggles are available only in singlepole circuitry. A two-pole base is utilized with singlepole housing the lamp. On single-throw circuits, the lamp is wired to operate in conjunction with the switch. 4 On double-throw circuits, the lamp is independent of the switch. On the sealed versions, a silicone rubber seal is fitted to the paddle lever to provide a moistureand dust-resistant seal between the lever and bushing. 4 4 4 4 4 Catalog Number Selection 4 How To Order--Illuminated AC Rated Toggles Example: Circuit with Toggle in ... UP CENTER Position Position Rating Poles and Throw Standard 15A, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac 3/4 hp, 250 Vac 1PST Sealed 15A, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac 3/4 hp, 250 Vac 1PST 1PDT ON NONE 7071K21 DOWN Position (Keyway) Base Catalog Number Circuit Number See Page V11-T4-35 OFF 7071K21 G G 1 52 4 4 Code letters and/or numbers-- add to base circuit number. Lever Color G = Green T = Red A = Amber Bulb Voltage 4 1 = 14V 4 Terminal Type ON ON MOM. ON NONE OFF OFF OFF ON MOM. ON 7073K21 7073K20 7073K25 G 4 52 = 0.250 in spade 4 4 H 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--November 2012 www.eaton.com V11-T4-9 4.3 4 4 Toggle Switches Illuminated AC Rated Toggles Technical Data and Specifications Illuminated AC Rated Toggles Description Specification 4 Ratings See Catalog Number Selection Circuits 1PST and 1PDT; maintained and momentary action 4 Contact material Movable--silver-plated copper Stationary--silver-plated copper 4 Terminal types Spade--brass Base material Colored thermoplastic paddle lever 4 4 4 Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Illuminated 0.210 (5.33) Dia. 4 4 0.070 (1.78) 1.310 (33.27) 28 14 0.270 (6.86) 0.750 (19.05) 0.650 (16.51) 4 0.470 (11.94) 4 4 0.910 (23.11) 1.430 (36.32) 4 A 4 0.250 (6.35) Keyway 0.030 (0.76) 0.070 (1.78) Wide Deep x 0.040 (1.02) 0.080 (2.03) Quick Connect 0.440 (11.18) Type "A" Dim. 0.030 (0.76) Ref. 0.030 (0.76) 1.310 (33.27) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 V11-T4-10 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--November 2012 www.eaton.com Toggle Switches General Purpose Toggles--AC Rated 4.4 Contents General Purpose Toggles Description Page General Purpose Toggles--AC Rated Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-12 V11-T4-16 V11-T4-16 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Product Description Features These AC rated toggle switches offer the widest selection of features and the design flexibility to meet a variety of applications. The optional features shown below may not be available on all toggle models. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. 7500, 7600, 7700 and 7900 Series 3-independent ON Circuit (2PDT or 4PDT only, see Page V11-T4-14) Short (11/32 in) bushing Tall (15/32 in) bushing White nylon designer lever, see Dimensions on Page V11-T4-16 Black nylon designer lever, see Dimensions on Page V11-T4-16 Hardware-- furnished assembled Reversing jumpers (not for use with 3-independent ON circuit) Short (15/32 in) bat lever Tall (11/16 in) bat lever (not available with short bushing) Rotate keyway 180 Lever seal Omit one pole (2P, 3P, 4P only. Not for use with 3-independent ON circuit) 4 Options 7800 Series Only 3-independent ON circuit (2PDT or 4PDT only, see Page V11-T4-14) Hardware-- furnished assembled Reversing jumpers (Not for use with 3-independent ON circuit) Rotate keyway 180 Silicone lever seal (1P and 2P only) Omit one pole (2P, 3P, 4P only. Not for use with 3-independent ON circuit) Combi-Term Option This is an extension of our AC rated general purpose toggle switch. The "Combi-Term" design allows the user the option of screw terminals, 0.25 in quick connects or solder termination all on the same switch. The special clips and screws are provided in a poly bag with the switch. Circuits 1PST, 1PDT, 2PST, 2PDT, 3PST, 3PDT, 4PST and 4PDT Maintained and momentary Standards and Certifications 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 UL(R) Recognized CSA(R) Certified (except as noted) RoHS Compliant 1 4 4 Note 1 Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for the most up-to-date list of verified part numbers. 4 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--November 2012 www.eaton.com V11-T4-11 4.4 4 Toggle Switches General Purpose Toggles--AC Rated Product Selection 4 AC Rated Toggle Switches--Single-Pole 4 Circuit with Toggle in ... UP Position 4 4 Rating 6A, 125 Vac 3A, 250 Vac CENTER Position Poles and Throw DOWN Position Catalog Number (Keyway) Base Circuit See Page V11-T4-35 OFF A ON NONE 1PDT ON OFF ON B 1PDT ON NONE ON B 1PDT ON MOM. ON NONE OFF MOM. ON MOM. ON B 1PST OFF NONE MOM. ON 1PST OFF NONE MOM. ON 1PDT MOM. ON ON OFF NONE 1PDT ON MOM. ON 15A, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac 3/4 hp, 250 Vac 1/2 hp, 125V Vac 1PST 15A, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac 1/2 hp, 125 Vac 3/4 hp, 250 Vac Screw Terminals 0.250 in Spade Terminals 0.344 (8.74) 0.469 (11.91) 0.563 (14.30) 0.563 (14.30) 7580K7 7580K6 7580K5 7580K4 7580K9 7580K8 0.469 (11.91) 0.563 (14.30) 7581K6 7581K4 7581K8 0.469 (11.91) 0.563 (14.30) 7582K6 7582K4 7582K8 0.469 (11.91) 0.563 (14.30) 7585K6 7587K6 7585K4 7587K4 7585K8 7587K8 A 0.469 (11.91) 0.563 (14.30) 7506K3 7506K4 7506K6 A 0.469 (11.91) 0.688 (17.48) 7506K38 7506K36 7506K40 MOM. ON MOM. ON B 0.469 (11.91) 0.563 (14.30) 7509K4 7510K6 7509K5 7510K7 7509K7 7510K9 OFF OFF MOM. ON MOM. ON B 0.469 (11.91) 0.688 (17.48) 7508K38 7509K38 7508K36 7509K36 7508K40 7509K40 ON NONE OFF A 0.344 (8.74) 0.469 (11.91) 0.563 (14.30) 0.563 (14.30) 7501K12 7501K13 7500K13 1 7500K14 1 7501K14 7501K15 1PDT ON OFF ON B 0.469 (11.91) 0.563 (14.30) 7503K13 1 7502K13 7503K15 1PDT ON NONE ON B 0.469 (11.91) 0.563 (14.30) 7505K4 7504K4 1 7505K6 20A, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac 1/2 hp, 125 Vac 3/4 hp, 250 Vac 1PST ON NONE OFF A 0.469 (11.91) 0.688 (17.48) 7546K38 7546K36 7546K40 4 30A, 125 Vac 25A, 250 Vac 2 1PST ON NONE OFF A 0.344 (8.74) 0.563 (14.30) -- 7576K2 -- 4 Notes 1 Also 4.2A L at 125 Vac rating. 2 Single-pole switch in two-pole base. 4 1PST Bushing Lever Length "A" Length "B" Solder Inches (mm) Inches (mm) Lugs 4 4 10A, 250 Vac 1/2 hp, 250 Vac 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 V11-T4-12 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--November 2012 www.eaton.com 4.4 Toggle Switches General Purpose Toggles--AC Rated AC Rated Toggle Switches--Two-Pole Circuit with Toggle in ... UP Position Rating CENTER Position Poles and Throw DOWN Position 4 Catalog Number (Keyway) Base Circuit See Page V11-T4-35 Bushing Lever Length "A" Length "B" Solder Inches (mm) Inches (mm) Lugs 0.250 in Screw CombiSpade Terminals Terminals Term 4 4 4 6A, 125 Vac 3A, 250 Vac 2A, 277 Vac 2.5A, L at 125 Vac 2PST ON NONE OFF C 0.469 (11.91) 0.563 (14.30) 7590K6 7590K4 7590K8 -- 6A, 125 Vac 3A, 250 Vac 2.5A, L at 125 Vac 2PDT ON OFF ON D 0.469 (11.91) 0.563 (14.30) 7591K6 7591K4 7591K8 -- 2PDT ON NONE ON D 0.469 (11.91) 0.563 (14.30) 7592K6 7592K4 7592K8 -- 4 6A, 125 Vac 3A, 250 Vac 2PDT MOM. ON OFF MOM. ON D 0.469 (11.91) 0.563 (14.30) 7597K6 7597K4 7597K8 -- 2PDT ON ON OFF 7530 0.469 (11.91) 0.563 (14.30) 7530K1 7530K3 7530K2 -- 4 10A 250 Vac, 15A 125 Vac, 1/4 hp 125-250 Vac 2PDT ON ON ON 7555 0.469 (11.91) 0.563 (14.30) 7555K12 7555K11 7555K13 -- 15A, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac 3/4 hp, 250 Vac 1/2 hp, 125 Vac 2PST ON NONE OFF C 0.344 (8.74) 0.469 (11.91) 0.563 (14.30) 0.563 (14.30) 7561K5 7561K4 7560K6 7560K5 7561K7 7561K6 -- 4 4 4 4 4 15A, 125 Vac 2PDT 10A, 250 Vac 3/4 hp, 125-250 Vac ON OFF ON D 0.344 (8.74) 0.469 (11.91) 0.563 (14.30) 0.563 (14.30) 7563K5 7563K4 7562K5 7562K4 7563K7 7563K6 -- 15A, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac 3/4 hp, 250 Vac 2PDT ON NONE ON D 0.469 (11.91) 0.563 (14.30) 7565K5 7564K6 7565K7 -- 15A, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac 1/2 hp, 250 Vac 2PST OFF NONE MOM. ON C 0.469 (11.91) 0.563 (14.30) 7566K4 7566K5 7566K7 -- 2PDT ON MOM. ON ON OFF OFF NONE MOM. ON MOM. ON MOM. ON D 0.469 (11.91) 0.563 (14.30) 7568K3 1 7569K1 7570K4 7568K2 1 7569K2 7570K5 7568K4 1 7569K3 7570K7 -- -- -- 2PDT MOM. ON OFF MOM. ON D 0.469 (11.91) 0.688 (17.48) 7569K38 7569K36 7569K40 -- 20A, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac 3/4 hp, 250 Vac 1/2 hp, 125 Vac 2PST ON NONE OFF C 0.469 (11.91) 0.688 (17.48) 7630K38 7630K36 7630K40 -- 2PDT ON NONE ON D 0.469 (11.91) 0.688 (17.48) 7632K38 7632K36 7632K40 -- 4 Section A 10A 250 Vac; 15A 125 Vac, 3/4 hp 250 Vac, 4.2A L 125 Vac; Section B 10A 250 Vac, 15A 125 Vac, 1/4 hp 250 Vac 2PDT OFF 1 ON 2 ON 7571 0.469 (11.91) 0.563 (14.30) 7571K2 7571K4 7571K6 -- 4 20A, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac 1 hp, 120-240 Vac 2PST ON NONE OFF C 0.469 (11.91) 0.688 (17.48) 7803K11 2PDT ON ON MOM. ON OFF NONE OFF ON ON MOM. ON D 0.469 (11.91) 0.688 (17.48) 7803K12 7803K32 7803K22 3 7803K42 7803K13 7803K33 7803K23 3 7803K43 7803K17 2 7803K37 2 7803K27 2 7803K47 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 7803K31 7803K21 2 7803K41 2 Notes 1 Also 1/2 hp at 125-250 Vac Rating. 2 Not CSA Certified. 3 Also 7.5A, 277 Vac, 3/4 hp, 120-240-277 Vac. 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--November 2012 www.eaton.com V11-T4-13 4.4 Toggle Switches General Purpose Toggles--AC Rated AC Rated Toggle Switches--Three-Pole 4 Circuit with Toggle in ... 4 UP Position 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 DOWN Position Catalog Number (Keyway) Base Circuit See Page V11-T4-35 15A, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac 3/4 hp, 250 Vac 1 hp, 3 Ph 125-600 Vac 1 hp, 1 and 2 Ph 125-480 Vac 3PST ON NONE OFF E 0.469 (11.91) 0.688 (17.48) 7700K1 7700K2 7700K3 -- 3PDT ON ON OFF NONE ON ON F 0.469 (11.91) 0.688 (17.48) 7701K1 7702K1 7701K2 7702K2 7701K3 7702K3 -- -- 15A, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac 3/4 hp, 250 Vac 3PDT MOM. ON MOM. ON OFF NONE ON ON F 0.469 (11.91) 0.688 (17.48) 7704K1 7705K1 7704K2 7705K2 7704K3 7705K3 -- -- 20A, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac 1 hp, 120 Vac 1, 2 and 3 Ph 3PDT ON OFF ON F 0.469 (11.91) 0.688 (17.48) 7804K12 7804K32 2 7804K22 2 7804K42 2 Rating 4 CENTER Position Poles and Throw Bushing Lever Length "A" Length "B" Solder Inches (mm) Inches (mm) Lugs 0.250 in Screw Spade CombiTerminals Terminals Term 24 AC Rated Toggle Switches--Four-Pole 4 Circuit with Toggle in ... UP Position 4 CENTER Position DOWN Position Catalog Number 4 Rating (Keyway) Base Circuit See Page V11-T4-35 4 15A, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac 3/4 hp, 250 Vac 4PST ON NONE OFF E 0.469 (11.91) 0.688 (17.48) 7691K14 7690K8 -- -- 4PDT ON ON OFF NONE ON ON F 0.469 (11.91) 0.688 (17.48) 7693K2 7695K5 7692K13 7694K4 -- -- -- -- 20A, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac 3/4 hp, 250 Vac 1/2 hp, 125 Vac 4PST ON NONE OFF E 0.469 (11.91) 0.688 (17.48) 7933K38 7933K36 7933K40 -- 4PDT ON ON OFF NONE ON ON F 0.469 (11.91) 0.688 (17.48) 7934K38 7935K38 7934K36 7935K36 7934K40 7935K40 -- -- 20A, 125 Vac 4PDT 10A, 250 Vac 1 hp, 125-240 Vac 2 and 3 Ph ON OFF ON F 0.469 (11.91) 0.688 (17.48) 7805K12 2 7805K32 2 7805K22 2 7805K42 2 4 4 4 4 Poles and Throw Bushing Lever Length "A" Length "B" Solder Inches (mm) Inches (mm) Lugs 0.250 in Screw Spade CombiTerminals Terminals Term Notes 1 Also 1/2 hp at 125-250 Vac Rating. 2 Not CSA Certified. 3 Also 7.5A, 277 Vac, 3/4 hp, 120-240-277 Vac. 4 1 hp at 240-480 Vac single- or two-phase and 240-600 Vac three-phase. 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 V11-T4-14 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--November 2012 www.eaton.com Toggle Switches General Purpose Toggles--AC Rated 4.4 AC Rated Sealed 1 Toggle Switches--Single-Pole Circuit with Toggle in ... UP Position Rating CENTER Position Poles and Throw 4 Catalog Number DOWN Position (Keyway) Base Circuit See Page V11-T4-35 Bushing Length "A" Inches (mm) Lever Length "B" Inches (mm) Solder Lugs Screw Terminals 0.250 in Spade Terminals 10A, 250 Vac 1/2 hp, 250 Vac 1PST OFF NONE MOM. ON A 0.469 (11.91) 0.563 (14.30) -- 7506K20 7506K21 1PDT MOM. ON ON ON OFF NONE OFF MOM. ON MOM. ON MOM. ON B 0.469 (11.91) 0.563 (14.30) -- -- -- 7509K20 7510K20 7508K20 7509K21 7510K21 7508K21 15A, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac 3/4 hp, 250 Vac 1/2 hp, 125V-250 Vac 1PST ON NONE OFF A 0.469 (11.91) 0.563 (14.30) 7501K22 7500K20 2 7501K21 15A, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac 1/2 hp, 125 Vac 3/4 hp, 250 Vac 1PDT ON OFF ON B 0.469 (11.91) 0.563 (14.30) -- 7502K20 7503K21 1PDT ON NONE ON B 0.469 (11.91) 0.563 (14.30) -- 7504K20 2 7505K21 4 4 4 4 4 4 Circuit with Toggle in ... UP Position CENTER Position Poles and Throw ON NONE Catalog Number DOWN Position 4 (Keyway) Base Circuit See Page V11-T4-35 Bushing Length "A" Inches (mm) Lever Length "B" Inches (mm) Solder Lugs Screw Terminals 0.250 in Spade Terminals OFF C 0.469 (11.91) 0.563 (14.30) -- 7560K20 7561K21 15A, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac 3/4 hp, 250 Vac 1/2 hp, 125 Vac 2PST 15A, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac 3/4 hp, 125-250 Vac 2PDT ON OFF ON D 0.469 (11.91) 0.563 (14.30) -- 7562K20 7563K21 15A, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac 3/4 hp, 250 Vac 2PDT ON NONE ON D 0.469 (11.91) 0.563 (14.30) -- 7564K20 7565K21 15A, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac 1/2 hp, 250 Vac 2PST OFF NONE MOM. ON C 0.469 (11.91) 0.563 (14.30) -- 7566K20 7566K21 2PDT ON MOM. ON ON OFF OFF NONE MOM. ON MOM. ON MOM. ON D 0.469 (11.91) 0.563 (14.30) -- -- -- 7568K20 2 7569K20 7570K20 7568K21 2 7569K21 7570K21 4 4 4 Circuit with Toggle in ... UP Position CENTER Position Poles and Throw 4 4 4 4 4 Catalog Number DOWN Position 4 4 AC Rated Special Circuit Toggle Switches--Two-Pole Rating 4 4 AC Rated Sealed 1 Toggle Switches--Two-Pole Rating 4 (Keyway) Base Circuit See Page V11-T4-35 Bushing Length "A" Inches (mm) Lever Length "B" Inches (mm) Solder Lugs Screw Terminals 0.250 in Spade Terminals 15A, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac 3/4 hp, 125-250 Vac 2PDT 2-3, 5-6 OFF 2-6, 5-3 D 0.469 (11.91) 0.563 (14.30) 7563K24 7562K23 7563K25 15A, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac 3/4 hp, 250 Vac 2PDT 2-3, 5-6 NONE 2-6, 5-3 D 0.469 (11.91) 0.563 (14.30) 7565K24 7564K23 7565K25 4 4 4 4 4 Notes 1 Seal is lever seal only and is dust and splash resistant. Panel seal is available, Part Number 32-341. 2 Also 1/2 hp at 125-250 Vac Rating. 4 4 4 4 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--November 2012 www.eaton.com V11-T4-15 4.4 Toggle Switches General Purpose Toggles--AC Rated 4 Technical Data and Specifications 4 General Purpose Toggles--AC Rated Description Specification 4 Ratings See Product Selection tables; Switch ratings at 125 Vac also apply to 28 Vdc 4 Contact mechanism Slow-make/slow-brake butt contact Terminal types Screw terminals--brass designed to accept #6-32x 3/16 binding head (Cat. No. 811-2) screws Furnished unassembled Solder lug terminals--tintillate-plated brass Spade terminals--combi-term--brass Base material Thermoset molding material Mounting means Threaded bushing--0.468 in (11.89 mm) dia., 32 threads/in Keyway--0.068 x 0.035 in (1.73 x 0.89 mm) deep, provides anti-rotation feature Hardware supplied--1 hexagon locknut (Cat. No. 15-192) and 1 bright nickel-plated knurled facenut (Cat. No. 15-124F1), except 7700-7705, which have bright nickel hexagon facenut (Cat. No. 15-966-2) Furnished unassembled Finish Bright nickel-plated toggle lever and bushing 4 4 4 4 4 4 Dielectric withstand 1000V rms minimum Operating temperature range 0 to 150F (-17.8 to 65.6C) 4 Contact Material 4 7500, 7600, 7700 and 7900 Series Switches 3 to 6 Silver-plated copper Silver-plated copper 4 10 to 20 Silver-plated copper with silver buttons Silver-plated copper with silver buttons 4 20 to 30 Silver-plated copper with cad oxide buttons Copper with cad oxide buttons 7800 Series Switches 3 to 6 Silver-plated copper Silver-plated copper 10 to 20 Copper with silver buttons Copper with silver buttons 4 Ampere Movable Stationary 4 4 Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 4 7500, 7600, 7700 and 7900 Series 4 1PST Maintained and Momentary (Screw Terminals) 4 4 B 4 A 0.625 (15.87) 0.300 (7.62) 4 4 1.125 (28.57) 15/32-32 Thd. 0.469 (11.91) 0.469 (11.91) 4 1PDT Maintained and Momentary (Spade Terminals) Keyway 0.068-0.075 W x 0.035-0.040 D (1.72-1.90) W x 0.88-1.02 D) 15/32-32 Thd. 0.469 (11.91) 0.469 (11.91) B 0.625 (15.87) 1.047 (26.59) 1.218 (30.93) Keyway 0.068-0.075 W x 0.035-0.040 D (1.72-1.90) W x 0.88-1.02 D) 4 4 4 4 4 V11-T4-16 A Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--November 2012 www.eaton.com 1.100 (27.95) 0.440 (11.17) 0.031 (0.78) Ref. 4.4 Toggle Switches General Purpose Toggles--AC Rated Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 4 7500, 7600, 7700 and 7900 Series, continued 2PDT Maintained (Solder Lugs) 4 2PDT Maintained (Spade Terminals) 4 28 28 15/32-32 Thd. 0.469 (11.91) 14 14 15/32-32 Thd. 0.469 (11.91) B 1.312 (33.32) A 4 B 1.312 (33.32) 0.469 (11.91) A 0.750 (19.05) 0.740 (18.79) 0.750 (19.05) 1.031 (26.18) 0.469 (11.91) Keyway 0.068-0.075 W x 0.035-0.040 D (1.72-1.90) W x 0.88-1.02 D) 0.270 (6.85) 0.440 (11.17) 36 15/32-32 Thd. 0.469 (11.91) B 0.270 (6.86) 1.047 (26.59) Keyway 0.068-0.075 W x 0.035-0.040 D (1.72-1.90) W x 0.88-1.02 D) 0.562 (14.27) 1.312 (33.32) 0.469 (11.91) 0.750 0.797 (19.05) (20.24) 1.125 (28.57) Keyway 0.068-0.075 W x 0.035-0.040 D (1.72-1.90) W x 0.88-1.02 D) 2PDT Maintained (Screw Terminals) 0.910 (23.11) 0.300 (7.62) 2PDT Momentary (Spade Terminals) 15/32-32 Thd. 0.469 (11.91) B A 1.062 (26.97) 0.300 (7.62) 4 0.910 (23.11) Keyway 0.068-0.075 W x 0.035-0.040 D (1.72-1.90) W x 0.88-1.02 D) 0.440 (11.18) 0.031 (0.78) Ref. Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--November 2012 www.eaton.com 4 4 4 4 0.469 (11.91) 0.750 (19.05) Keyway 0.068-0.075 W x 0.035-0.040 D (1.72-1.90) W x 0.88-1.02 D) 4 4 0.562 (14.27) 1.312 (33.32) 0.469 (11.91) 4 4 18 14 0.797 (20.24) 4 4 36 1.312 (33.32) 4 4 0.031 (0.78) Ref. 28 0.750 (19.05) 0.740 (18.79) 4 4 A 0.625 (15.87) 4 4 18 0.469 (11.91) 4 4 2PDT Momentary (Screw Terminals) 15/32-32 Thd. 0.469 (11.91) 4 4 Keyway 0.068-0.075 W x 0.035-0.040 D (1.72-1.90) W x 0.88-1.02 D) 1PDT Maintained and Momentary (Solder Lugs) 15/32-32 Thd. 0.469 (11.91) 1.200 (30.48) 4 4 4 4 4 V11-T4-17 4.4 4 4 7500, 7600, 7700 and 7900 Series, continued 3PDT Maintained and Momentary (Solder Lugs) 31 15.5 4 15/32-32 Thd. 0.469 (11.91) 1.312 (33.32) 0.562 (14.27) 0.031 (0.78) Ref. 0.688 (17.47) 0.469 (11.91) 1.265 (32.13) 1.437 1.546 (36.49) (39.26) 0.469 (11.91) 0.750 (19.05) 1.333 (33.85) Max. 0.031 (0.78) Ref. 0.300 (7.62) 0.910 (23.11) Keyway 0.068-0.075 W x 0.035-0.040 D (1.72-1.90) W x 0.88-1.02 D) 4PDT Maintained and Momentary (Solder Lugs) 0.031 (0.78) Ref. 0.270 (6.85) Keyway 0.068-0.075 W x 0.035-0.040 D (1.72-1.90) W x 0.88-1.02 D) 0.688 (17.47) 0.469 (11.91) 15/32-32 Thd. 0.469 (11.91) 3PDT Maintained and Momentary (Screw Terminals) 4 15.5 15/32-32 Thd. 0.469 (11.91) 4 1.333 (33.85) Max. 0.688 0.469 (17.47) (11.91) 0.965 (24.51) 4 0.300 (7.62) 4 1.225 (31.11) 1.437 1.546 (36.49) (39.26) 31 4 4 Keyway 0.068-0.075 W x 0.035-0.040 D (1.72-1.90) W x 0.88-1.02 D) 15/32-32 Thd. 0.469 (11.91) 4 4 1.437 (36.49) Keyway 0.068-0.075 W x 0.035-0.040 D (1.72-1.90) W x 0.88-1.02 D) 18 4 4 0.469 (11.91) 4PDT Maintained and Momentary (Screw Terminals) 36 4 4 0.440 (11.17) 2PDT Momentary (Solder Lugs) 4 0.688 (17.47) 0.965 (24.51) 0.031 (0.78) Ref. 0.270 (6.85) 4 4 15/32-32 Thd. 0.469 (11.91) Keyway 0.068-0.075 W x 0.035-0.040 D (1.72-1.90) W x 0.88-1.02 D) 4 4 1.333 (33.85) Max. 1.437 (36.49) 0.965 (24.51) 4 15.5 1.333 (33.85) Max. 0.688 0.469 (17.47) (11.91) 15/32-32 Thd. 0.469 (11.91) 4 4 3PDT Maintained and Momentary (Spade Terminals) 31 4 4 General Purpose Toggles--AC Rated Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 4 4 Toggle Switches 1.333 (33.85) Max. 1.437 (36.49) Keyway 0.068-0.075 W x 0.035-0.040 D (1.72-1.90) W x 0.88-1.02 D) 4PDT Maintained and Momentary (Spade Terminals) Keyway 0.068-0.075 W x 0.035-0.040 D (1.72-1.90) W x 0.88-1.02 D) 0.688 (17.47) 0.469 (11.91) 0.031 (0.78) Ref. 1.437 1.546 (36.49) (39.26) 4 15/32-32 Thd. 0.469 (11.91) 1.405 (35.68) 0.440 (11.17) 1.333 (33.85) Max. 4 4 V11-T4-18 0.270 (6.85) 0.031 (0.78) Ref. Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--November 2012 www.eaton.com 0.031 (0.78) Ref. Toggle Switches General Purpose Toggles--AC Rated 4.4 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 4 7800 Series 2PDT Maintained (Screw Terminals) Keyway 0.080-0.085 W x 0.040-0.047 D (2.03-2.16) W x 1.02-1.19 D) 0.671 (17.04) 4 4PDT Maintained (Screw Terminals) 4 Keyway 0.080-0.085 W x 0.040-0.047 D (2.03-2.16) W x 1.02-1.19 D) 4 0.687 (17.45) 15/32-32 (11.91 TPI) 4 0.469 (11.91) TPI (15/32-32) 0.469 (11.91) 0.469 (11.91) 0.812 (20.62) 4 4 0.812 (20.62) 1.312 0.234 (33.32) (5.94) 0.750 (19.05) 4 0.234 (5.54) 4 1.437 (36.50) 1.296 (32.92) 4 2PDT Maintained (Combi-Terminals) 4 Keyway 0.080-0.085 W x 0.040-0.047 D (2.03-2.16) W x 1.02-1.19 D) Keyway 0.080-0.085 W x 0.040-0.047 D (2.03-2.16) W x 1.02-1.19 D) 0.671 (17.04) 4 3PDT Maintained (0.25 in Spade Terminals) 4 0.687 (17.45) 15/32-32 (11.91 TPI) 4 0.469 (11.91) TPI (15/32-32) 0.469 (11.91) 0.469 (11.91) 0.812 (20.62) 4 4 0.812 (20.62) 4 0.440 (11.17) 0.375 (9.53) 1.312 (33.32) 0.750 (19.05) 1.296 (32.92) 0.031 (0.78) Ref. 4 1.437 (36.50) 4 3PDT Maintained (Screw Terminals) 4 Combi-Term Termination Options Keyway 0.080-0.085 W x 0.040-0.047 D (2.03-2.16) W x 1.02-1.19 D) 0.687 (17.45) 4 4 0.469 (11.91) TPI (15/32-32) 0.469 (11.91) 4 4 0.812 (20.62) 0.218 (5.54) Solder 1.296 (32.92) Quick Connect 4 Screw 4 1.437 (36.50) 4 4 4 4 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--November 2012 www.eaton.com V11-T4-19 4.5 4 Toggle Switches General Purpose Toggles--AC/DC Rated Contents General Purpose Toggles Description 4 Page General Purpose Toggles--AC/DC Rated Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 V11-T4-21 V11-T4-21 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Product Description This line of switches employs a quick-make/quick-break contact mechanism. The resultant high-speed movement eliminates the "teasing" of the switch and reduces the pitting of the Options contact surfaces due to arcing. Self-cleaning and wiping contact action assures positive contact on switch operation. These switches are especially suited for use in small motor applications. Standards and Certifications Lever--11/16 in Lever seal Mounting hardware; furnished assembled Other lead lengths Note 1 Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for the most up-to-date list of verified part numbers. 4 4 UL Recognized CSA Certified RoHS Compliant 1 Product Selection 4 AC/DC Rated Toggle Switches--Single-Pole 4 4 Rating Poles and Throw 3A, 250 Vdc 1PST 6A, 125 Vac/Vdc 1PST 3A, 250 Vdc 4 4 1PDT Circuit with Toggle in ... UP Position CENTER Position DOWN Position Base Circuit See Page V11-T4-35 Bushing Length "B" Inches (mm) Lever Length "A" Inches (mm) Catalog Number Solder Lugs Screw Terminals Wire Leads ON NONE OFF A 0.344 (8.74) 0.500 (12.70) 8280K115 8295K107 8290K115 ON ON MOM. ON NONE NONE NONE OFF OFF OFF A 0.344 (8.74) 0.469 (11.91) 0.469 (11.91) 0.500 (12.70) 0.500 (12.70) 0.500 (12.70) 8381K107 8381K108 8928K478 8396K107 8396K108 -- 8391K107 8391K108 -- ON NONE ON B 0.469 (11.91) 0.500 (12.70) 8928K479 -- -- Base Circuit See Page V11-T4-35 Bushing Length "B" Inches (mm) Lever Length "A" Inches (mm) Catalog Number Solder Lugs Screw Terminals Wire Leads 4 4 AC/DC Rated Toggle Switches--Two-Pole 4 Rating 4 7A, 125V 3A, 250 Vdc 4 4 Poles and Throw Circuit with Toggle in ... UP Position CENTER Position DOWN Position 2PST ON MOM. ON NONE NONE OFF OFF C 0.469 (11.91) 0.469 (11.91) 0.500 (12.70) 0.500 (12.70) 8370K107 8928K481 1 8372K107 8928K482 1 8371K107 -- 2PDT ON ON NONE NONE ON ON D 0.344 (8.74) 0.469 (11.91) 0.500 (12.70) 0.500 (12.70) 8373K108 8373K107 8375K108 8375K107 8374K108 8374K107 Note 1 Rating: 6A, 125 Vac/Vdc and 3A, 250 Vdc. 4 4 V11-T4-20 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--November 2012 www.eaton.com 4.5 Toggle Switches General Purpose Toggles--AC/DC Rated Technical Data and Specifications 4 General Purpose Toggles--AC/DC Rated 4 Description Specification Ratings See Product Selection table; Switch ratings at 125 Vac also apply to 28 Vdc Circuits 1PST, 1PDT, 2PST, 2PDT Maintained and momentary toggle action Contact mechanism Quick-make/quick-break wiping action Contact material Bronze silver-plated Terminal types Screw terminals--brass designed to accept #5-40 x 5/32 in (Cat. No. 11-26) screws Furnished unassembled Solder lug terminals--brass silver-plated with 0.085-0.090 in (2.16-2.29 mm) dia. hole Integrated wire leads--18 gauge, 6 in long and skinned 3/4 in Special wire leads lengths beyond 6 in are available at additional charge 4 4 4 4 4 Base material Thermoset molding material Mounting means Threaded bushing--0.468 in (11.89 mm) dia., 32 threads/inch Keyway--0.068 x 0.035 in (1.73 x.89 mm) deep, provides anti-rotation feature Hardware supplied--1 hexagon locknut (Cat. No. 15-192) and 1 bright nickel-plated knurled facenut (Cat. No. 15-124F1) Furnished unassembled Finish Bright nickel-plated toggle lever and bushing Operating temperature range 0 to 150F (-17.8 to 65.6C) 4 4 4 4 Dimensions 4 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 8280K115 1PST Maintained (Solder Lug) 8290K115 1PST Maintained (Wire Lead) Keyway 0.035 (0.88) Deep 0.068 (1.72) Wide Keyway 0.035 (0.88) Deep 0.068 (1.72) Wide 0.500 (12.70) 8295K107 1PST Maintained (Screw Terminals) Keyway 0.035 (0.88) Deep 0.068 (1.72) Wide 0.500 (12.70) 0.532 (13.51) 0.245 (6.22) Dia. 0.239 (6.07) 1.093 (27.78) 0.245 (6.22) Dia. 0.239 (6.07) D 15/32 Dia.- 32 Thds. BC A B B C C 0.200 (5.08) 0.562 (14.28) 0.046 (1.19) 0.562 (14.28) 0.968 (24.60) 1.250 (31.75) #5/40 x 5/32 Lg. Binding Head Screw Standard 6.000 (152.40) Long Wire Leads 4 A 4 B 0.046 (1.19) 0.562 (14.28) 0.968 (24.60) 0.968 (24.60) 0.090 (2.28) 0.085 (2.15) Dia. Hole 15/32 Dia.- 32 Thds. A A 4 4 D 15/32 Dia.- 32 Thds. 4 4 0.245 (6.22) Dia. 0.239 (6.07) D D 15/32 Dia.- 32 Thds. 4 0.671 (17.06) 1.000 (25.40) 0.245 (6.22) Dia. 0.239 (6.07) 4 Keyway 0.035 (0.88) Deep 0.068 (1.72) Wide 0.500 (12.70) 1.000 (25.40) 1.000 (25.40) 4 8381K107 and K108 1PST Maintained (Solder Lug) C 0.687 (17.46) 4 4 0.090 (2.28) 0.085 (2.15) Dia. Hole 0.203 (5.15) 4 4 4 "A" Lever Dim. "B" Bushing Dim. "C" Overall Dim. "D" Throw Dim. "A" Lever Dim. "B" Bushing Dim. "C" Overall Dim. "D" Throw Dim. "A" Lever Dim. "B" Bushing Dim. "C" Overall Dim. "D" Throw Dim. "A" Lever Dim. "B" Bushing Dim. "C" Overall Dim. "D" Throw Dim. 0.500 (12.70) 0.344 (8.74) 1.411 (35.84) 29-1/2 0.500 (12.70) 0.344 (8.74) 1.406 (35.71) 29-1/2 0.500 (12.70) 0.344 (8.74) 1.406 (35.71) 29-1/2 0.500 (12.70) 0.344 (8.74) 1.531 (38.89) 29-1/2 4 0.500 (12.70) 0.469 (11.91) 1.656 (42.06) 25-1/2 4 4 4 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--November 2012 www.eaton.com V11-T4-21 4.5 4 4 8391K107 and K108 1PST Maintained (Wire Lead) C 15/32 Dia.- 32 Thds. 15/32 Dia.- 32 Thds. A 0.685 (17.39) B A B C C 0.687 (17.46) 1.093 (27.78) 0.950 (24.13) Standard 6.000 (152.40) Long Wire Leads 4 4 D A B 4 4 0.242 (6.14) Dia. D 15/32 Dia.- 32 Thds. 4 1.156 (29.36) 0.245 (6.22) Dia. 0.239 (6.07) 4 4 0.690 (17.52) 1.390 (35.32) D 4 Keyway 0.035 (0.88) Deep 0.068 (1.72) Wide 0.671 (17.06) 0.240 (6.09) 4 8928K478 1PST Momentary (Solder Lug) Keyway 0.035 (0.88) Deep 0.068 (1.72) Wide 0.664 (16.86) 4 4 8396K107 and K108 1PST Maintained (Screw Terminals) Keyway 0.035 (0.88) Deep 0.068 (1.72) Wide 4 4 General Purpose Toggles--AC/DC Rated Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 4 4 Toggle Switches 1.093 (27.78) 0.085 (2.15) Dia. Hole #5/40 x 5/32 Lg. Binding Head Screw "A" Lever Dim. "B" Bushing Dim. "C" Overall Dim. "D" Throw Dim. "A" Lever Dim. "B" Bushing Dim. "C" Overall Dim. "D" Throw Dim. "A" Lever Dim. "B" Bushing Dim. "C" Overall Dim. "D" Throw Dim. 0.500 (12.70) 0.344 (8.74) 1.531 (38.89) 29-1/2 0.500 (12.70) 0.344 (8.74) 1.531 (38.89) 29-1/2 0.500 (12.70) 0.344 (8.74) 1.980 (50.29) 29-1/2 0.500 (12.70) 0.469 (11.91) 1.656 (42.06) 25-1/2 0.500 (12.70) 0.469 (11.91) 1.656 (42.06) 25-1/2 0.500 (12.70) 0.469 (11.91) 1.656 (42.06) 25-1/2 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 V11-T4-22 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--November 2012 www.eaton.com Toggle Switches General Purpose Toggles--AC/DC Rated 8370 and 8373K107 and K108 2PST/2PDT Maintained (Solder Lug) 8371 and 8374K107 and K108 1PST Maintained (Wire Lead) 8373 and 8375K107 and K108 2PST/2PDT Maintained (Screw Terminals) 4 Keyway 0.035 (0.88) Deep 0.068 (1.72) Wide 4 Keyway 0.035 (0.88) Deep 0.068 (1.72) Wide Keyway 0.035 (0.88) Deep 0.068 (1.72) Wide 0.687 (17.46) 0.245 (6.22) Dia. 0.239 (6.07) 4 4 1.156 (29.37) 1.656 (42.07) 1.156 (29.36) 0.245 (6.22) Dia. 0.239 (6.07) 4 0.687 (17.46) 0.687 (17.46) 1.156 (29.36) 4.5 4 4 These Terminals Omitted on Single-Throw Switches D D 15/32 Dia.- 32 Thds. 15/32 Dia.32 Thds. D A B B C 0.640 (16.27) 4 0.245 (6.22) Dia. 0.239 (6.07) A 4 C 15/32 Dia.- 32 Thds. 1.080 (27.43) B C 0.873 (22.17) 0.830 (21.08) 1.000 (25.40) 0.090 (2.28) 0.085 (2.15) Dia. Hole 0.281 Double-Throw (7.14) Two Solder Lugs Omitted for Single-Throw 4 A 4 0.640 (16.27) 4 1.093 (27.78) #5/40 x 5/32 Lg. Binding Head Screw 4 0.343 (8.73) 4 Single-Throw "A" Lever Dim. "B" Bushing Dim. "C" Overall Dim. "D" Throw Dim. "A" Lever Dim. "B" Bushing Dim. "C" Overall Dim. "D" Throw Dim. "A" Lever Dim. "B" Bushing Dim. "C" Overall Dim. "D" Throw Dim. 0.500 (12.70) 0.344 (8.74) 1.694 (43.03) 29-1/2 0.500 (12.70) 0.344 (8.74) 1.484 (37.69) 29-1/2 0.500 (12.70) 0.344 (8.74) 1.484 (37.69) 29-1/2 0.500 (12.70) 0.469 (11.91) 1.820 (46.23) 25-1/2 0.500 (12.70) 0.469 (11.91) 1.515 (38.48) 25-1/2 0.500 (12.70) 0.469 (11.91) 1.609 (40.87) 25-1/2 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--November 2012 www.eaton.com V11-T4-23 4.6 4 Toggle Switches X Series Toggles Contents X Series Toggles Description 4 Page X Series Toggles Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 4 V11-T4-25 V11-T4-25 V11-T4-25 V11-T4-26 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Product Description Eaton's new, competitively priced, AC rated X Series toggles offer a standard high rating for both single- and two-pole applications. The new X Series toggle line offers a wide range of switching circuits, functions and accessories. Ratings for single- and two-pole include 20A at 125 Vac and 10A at 277 Vac to handle more severe inductive, motor and lamp loads. In addition, X Series toggles have a high standard horsepower rating of 1-1/2 hp, 125-250 Vac for two-pole applications. Application Description The easy-to-install toggles also have an industrystandard 0.48 in diameter mounting hole. For added convenience and delivery support, select industrystandard switch circuit part numbers are available from stock. With so many features, X Series toggles can be used in a variety of applications. Commercial and industrial equipment Household appliances Industrial machinery and automation Medical equipment Military communications and surveillance Rail systems Signaling and communications Test and lab equipment Telecommunications, cable and broadcasting 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 V11-T4-24 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--November 2012 www.eaton.com Standards and Certifications UL Recognized component for Canada File E2702 RoHS Compliant 1 Note 1 Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for the most up-to-date list of verified part numbers. 4.6 Toggle Switches X Series Toggles Product Selection 4 Single-Pole 1 4 Circuit with Toggle in ... Poles and Throw UP Position CENTER Position DOWN Position 2 Terminal Type--Catalog Number 0.250 in Spade Screw Solder Lugs 1PST ON NONE OFF XTD1A1A2 XTD1A2A2 XTD1A3A2 1PST ON 3 NONE OFF XTD1F1A2 XTD1F2A2 XTD1F3A2 1PDT ON OFF ON XTD2B1A XTD2B2A XTD2B3A 1PDT ON NONE ON XTD2C1A XTD2C2A XTD2C3A 1PDT ON NONE ON 3 XTD2D1A XTD2D2A XTD2D3A OFF ON 3 XTD2E1A XTD2E2A XTD2E3A OFF ON 3 XTD2G1A XTD2G2A XTD2G3A 1PDT ON 1PDT ON 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 Two-Pole 4 Circuit with Toggle in ... 4 DOWN Position 2 Terminal Type--Catalog Number 0.250 in Spade Screw Solder Lugs NONE OFF XTD3A1A2 XTD3A2A2 XTD3A3A2 NONE OFF XTD3F1A2 XTD3F2A2 XTD3F3A2 ON OFF ON XTD4B1A XTD4B2A XTD4B3A 2PDT ON NONE ON XTD4C1A XTD4C2A XTD4C3A 2PDT ON NONE ON 3 XTD4D1A XTD4D2A XTD4D3A 2PDT ON 3 OFF ON 3 XTD4E1A XTD4E2A XTD4E3A 2PDT ON OFF ON 3 XTD4G1A XTD4G2A XTD4G3A Poles and Throw UP Position CENTER Position 2PST ON 2PST ON 3 2PDT 4 4 4 4 4 Notes 1 Ratings: 20A at 125 Vac, 10A at 277 Vac, 3/4 hp, 125-250 Vac; recommended up to 15A at 28 Vdc. 2 Keyway position. 3 Indicates momentary position. 4 Ratings: 20A at 125 Vac, 10A at 277 Vac, 1-1/2 hp, 125-250 Vac; recommended up to 15A at 28 Vdc. 4 4 Accessories 4 See Accessories on Page V11-T4-31. 4 Technical Data and Specifications 4 X Series Toggles Description Specification Single-pole rating 20A, 125 Vac; 10A, 277 Vac; 3/4 hp 125-250 Vac; Recommended up to 15A at 28Vdc Two-pole rating 20A, 125 Vac; 10A, 277 Vac; 1-1/2 hp 125-250 Vac; Recommended up to 15A at 28Vdc Available circuits 1PST, 1PDT, 2PST, 2PDT Terminal types Brass screw, brass solder lugs, brass nickel-plated 0.250 in spade Hardware included Zinc nickel-plated knurl nut, zinc nickel-plated hex nut Mounting means Threaded bushing 12.0 +0.1, -0 mm; 16.5 +1, -1 mm Keyway 1.8 mm located in DOWN position Base material Thermoset molding material Finish Bright nickel-plated toggle lever and bushing Contact mechanism Slow-make/slow-break butt contact Contact resistance 50 ohm maximum Dielectric strength AC 1500V, 1 minute Operating temperature 32 to 149F (0 to 65C) Insulation resistance DC 500V 100M ohm minute Seal level rating IP40 Packaging Sealed in polybag labeled with part number 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--November 2012 www.eaton.com V11-T4-25 4.6 4 4 Toggle Switches X Series Toggles Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Single-Pole Two-Pole 4 Keyway 4 0.629 0.012 (16.00 0.30) 1.299 0.019 (33.00 0.50) o0.236 0.012 (o6.0 0.30) 4 B 4 C 4 4 4 4 0.063 0.004 (1.60 0.10) 0.433 0.003 (11.00 0.10) C D 3 2 1 6 5 4 15/32-32 NS-2A 4 4 o0.236 0.007 (o6.00 0.20) B D 4 o0.472 +0.003/-0.000 (o12.00 +0.10/-0.00) A A 4 4 Mounting Hole 0.748 0.019 (19.00 0.50) 1.125 0.012 (28.60 0.30) 4 4 Keyway A 0.649 0.039 (16.50 1.00) A 0.649 0.039 (16.50 1.00) B 0.468 0.012 (11.90 0.30) B 0.468 0.012 (11.90 0.30) C 0.677 0.019 (17.20 0.50) C 0.740 0.019 (18.80 0.50) D 0.452 0.019 (11.50 0.50) D 0.452 0.019 (11.50 0.50) 15/32-32 NS-2A 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 V11-T4-26 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--November 2012 www.eaton.com Toggle Switches Heavy Duty Hesitation Switches 4.7 Contents Heavy Duty Hesitation Switches Description Page Heavy Duty Hesitation Switches Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-28 V11-T4-29 V11-T4-29 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Product Description One-Hole Panel Mount These heavy duty toggle switches are available in either two- or three-position. The three-position switches offer a unique positive center stop feature, which assures that the lever cannot be thrown from one side through the center OFF position without stopping. This design feature is a major factor in their widespread acceptance for motor reversing and speed control applications. Flush Mount The most common application for the switch is to help prevent motor damage resulting from the high current generation by counter EMF of the armature at the time of reversing. This type of device is referred to within the industry as an antiplugging, hesitation, positive stop or positive off switch. Typical applications include bench tools, coach and truck (electric lift) and X-ray equipment. These three-position switches also offer the positive center stop feature where the lever cannot be thrown from one side through the center OFF position without stopping. The high ratings of this series allow it to be used with a broad range of heavy duty applications. Copper contacts and brass screw terminals are standard. 4 Standards and Certifications UL Recognized (except where noted) CSA Certified (where noted) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--November 2012 www.eaton.com V11-T4-27 4.7 4 Toggle Switches Heavy Duty Hesitation Switches Product Selection Heavy Duty Hesitation Switches--One-Hole Panel Mount 4 Circuit with Toggle in ... 4 UP Position 4 4 4 4 4 DOWN Position Catalog Number (Keyway) Base Circuit See Page V11-T4-35 15A, 125 Vac 1 10A, 250 Vac 3/4 hp, 250 Vac 2PDT ON OFF ON D 0.468 (11.89) 0.687 (17.45) Bat 7992K11 7992K10 7992K12 15A, 125 Vac 1 10A, 250 Vac 3/4 hp, 250 Vac 3PDT ON OFF ON F 0.468 (11.89) 0.687 (17.45) Bat 7991K11 7991K10 7991K12 15A, 125 Vac 1 10A, 250 Vac 3/4 hp, 250 Vac 4PDT ON OFF ON F 0.468 (11.89) 0.687 (17.45) Bat 7990K11 7990K10 7990K12 Rating 4 CENTER Position Poles and Throw 2 Bushing Length "A" Inches (mm) Lever Length "B" Inches (mm) Lever Type Solder Screw Terminals Lugs 0.250 in Spade Terminals Heavy Duty Hesitation Switches--Flush Mount 4 Circuit with Toggle in ... UP Position 4 DOWN Position (Keyway) Lever Type Termination Type Catalog Number NONE OFF ON ON Square Square Screw Screw 7810K1 7810K2 34 ON OFF ON Square Screw 7811K5 35 3PDT ON OFF ON Square Screw 7812K2 4PDT ON OFF ON Square Screw 7813K2 4 Rating 4 20A, 125 Vac/Vdc 10A, 250 Vac/Vdc 2PDT ON ON 4 30A, 125 Vac/Vdc 20A, 250 Vac/Vdc 2PDT 4 CENTER Position Poles and Throw Notes 1 Listed rating for 125 Vac also applies at 28 Vdc. 2 Supplied in a four-pole base. 3 CSA Certified. 4 Also rated 5A, 600 Vac; 1-1/2 hp, 250 Vdc; 2 hp, 240 Vac. 5 Also rated 2 hp, 250 Vac/Vdc. 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 V11-T4-28 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--November 2012 www.eaton.com Toggle Switches Heavy Duty Hesitation Switches 4.7 Technical Data and Specifications 4 Heavy Duty Hesitation Switches 4 Description Specification Ratings See Product Selection tables; Switch ratings at 125 Vac also apply to 28 Vdc Circuits 2PDT, 3PDT, 4PDT; maintained action Contact mechanism One-hole panel mount 4 4 AC rated devices--slow-make/Slow-break butt contact AC/DC rated devices--Quick-make/quick-break wiping contacts Flush mount 4 Quick-make/quick-break wiping contacts Contact material One-hole panel mount 4 AC rated devices: Movable--silver-plated copper with fine or coin silver contact face button Stationary--copper with fine or coin silver contact face button AC/DC rated devices: Movable--copper Stationary--bronze Flush mount Terminal types Mounting means One-hole panel mount Flush mount 4 4 Movable--copper Stationary--copper 4 Screw terminals--brass 4 AC rated devices: Threaded bushing--0.468 in (11.89 mm) dia., 32 threads/in Keyway--0.068 x 0.035 in (1.73 x 0.89 mm) deep, provide anti-rotation feature Hardware supplied-- 1 hexagon locknut (Catalog Number 15-192) and 1 hex facenut (Catalog Number 15-966-6) Furnished unassembled 4 4 4 Flush mounting panel tabs Dielectric withstand 1000V rms minimum Operating temperature range 0 to 150F (-17.8 to 65.6C) 4 4 Dimensions 4 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) One-Hole Panel Mount 4 7990K10--4PDT 4 32 0.430 (10.92) 4 15/32-32 Thds. 0.690 (17.53) 1.450 (36.83) Max. 1.550 (39.37) Max. 4 0.470 (11.94) 0.070 (1.78) 1.320 (33.53) 4 0.300 (7.62) 4 0.970 (24.64) 4 4 4 6-32 x 0.188 (4.77) Binding Head Screw 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--November 2012 www.eaton.com V11-T4-29 4.7 4 4 Heavy Duty Hesitation Switches Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Flush Mount 7810K2--2PDT 4 7811K2--2PDT 3.781 (96.04) 4 4 Toggle Switches 3.781 (96.04) 3.281 (83.34) 3.281 (83.34) 0.968 (24.59) 1.312 (33.34) 4 4 1.593 (40.46) 4 4 3.781 (96.04) 1.859 (47.22) 1.593 (40.46) 4 2.937 (74.60) 4 4 7813K2--4PDT 4 3.781 (96.04) 4 3.281 (83.34) 4 3.281 (83.34) 1.312 (33.34) 4 4 1.890 (48.01) 4 4 4 2.937 (74.60) 0.406 (10.31) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 V11-T4-30 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--November 2012 www.eaton.com 1.812 (46.02) Toggle Switches Accessories 4.8 Mounting Hardware 4 Product Description One-Hole Mounting Switches All bushing mounted switches are furnished with two mounting nuts. One nut is mounted behind the panel to prevent the bushing sleeve from being distorted if the front panel is overtightened 4 4 Eaton accepts no responsibility for damage to switches mounted without the backup nuts. 4 4 4 4 Product Selection 4 Mounting Hardware for One-Hole Mounting Switches--Mounting Nuts 1 Size Description Material Thickness Dim. "A" in Inches (mm) 3/8-27 Hexagon locknut Nickel-plated brass 0.125 (3.18) Inside Diameter Dim "B" in Inches (mm) OD or Dimension Across Flats Dim. "C" in Inches (mm) Dimension Across Corners Dim. "D" in Inches (mm) Catalog Number -- 0.562 (14.27) 0.625 (15.88) 15-2526-2 3/8-24 Bright nickel-plated brass 11/32-32 Nickel-plated brass 0.063 (1.60) -- 0.473 (12.01) 0.531 (13.49) 15-1525-2 Zinc-chromate treated 0.075 (1.91) -- 0.625 (15.88) -- 15-192 Bright nickel-plated brass 0.078 (1.98) -- 0.546 (13.87) 0.625 (15.88) 15-2525-58 Zinc-chromate treated 0.188 (4.76) 0.783 (19.89) 1.125 (25.80) -- 15-2528-2 Nickel-plated brass 0.078 (1.98) -- 0.562 (14.27) 0.656 (16.66) 15-966-2 0.562 (14.27) -- 15-124F1 15/32-32 Hexagon locknut Hexagon facenut -- Semi-lustre nickel-plated brass Knurled facenut Bright nickel-plated brass -- 0.066 (1.68) Black cupric oxide-plated brass Chamfered dress nut 15-1525-6 -- 19-966-6 -- 15-124F5 Brass nickel-plated brass 0.109 (2.77) -- -- 0.625 (15.88) -- 15-90 Bright nickel-plated brass 0.151 (3.84) 0.312 (7.92) 0.687 (17.45) -- 15-994-2 Standard knurl nut with shoulder Nickel-plated brass 0.109 (2.77) -- 0.593 (15.06) -- 15-2534-14 Dress nut Satin chrome-plated brass 0.125 (3.18) -- 0.562 (14.27) -- 15-2523-4 Black nylon 0.187 (4.75) 0.390 (9.91) 0.640 (16.26) -- 15-1048-3 Knurled dress nut Chrome-plated brass 0.187 (4.75) 0.312 (7.92) 0.640 (16.26) -- 15-189-5 3/4-32 Hexagon facenut Nickel-plated steel 0.093 (2.36) -- 0.937 (23.80) 1.078 (27.38) 15-1043 #8-40 Hexagon locknut with facenut Nickel-plated steel 0.060 (1.52) -- 0.245 (6.22) 0.216 (5.49) 15-1047 Note 1 Hardware items are sold for use with Eaton switches only. Minimum ordering quantity on all items is 100. 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--November 2012 www.eaton.com V11-T4-31 4.8 4 4 4 4 4 Toggle Switches Accessories Mounting Washers and Locking Ring 1 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Size Description Material Thickness Dim. "A" For 15/32 bushing Locking ring Zinc-plated steel 0.040 (1.02) Inside Diameter Dim "B" OD or Dimension Across Flats Dim. "C" Dimension Across Corners Dim. "D" Catalog Number 0.475 (12.07) 0.718 (18.24) -- 29-761-5 Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 4 Mounting Hardware 4 Hexagon Locknuts or Facenuts Knurled Nut with Shoulder Knurled Facenut Chamfered Dress Nut Catalog No. 15-994-2 Knurled Dress Nut Catalog No. 15-189-5 4 4 4 4 4 B C C A A Knurled Dress Nut Catalog No. 15-1048-3 Dress Nut Catalog No. 15-2523-4 4 Internal Tooth Lockwasher Plain Washer Locking Ring 0.063 (1.60) B B 0.475 (12.07) 0.043 (1.09) B B 0.109 (2.77) 4 4 A A 4 4 C C C A 4 4 B D C C A C A C A A Note 1 Hardware items are sold for use with Eaton switches only. 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 V11-T4-32 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--November 2012 www.eaton.com 0.031 (0.79) 0.031 (0.79) 0.050 (1.27) 0.719 (18.26) Toggle Switches Accessories Decorator Facenuts Product Selection 1 Replacement Terminal Screws 4 Product Selection 4 Type Color Catalog Number Screw Size Catalog Number 2 Knurled facenuts Bright black Bright clear 15-1048-3 15-1048-7 #5-40 x 1/8 in 11-1117 11-26 Bright black Bright clear 15-1049-3 15-1049-7 #5-40 x 5/32 in #5-40 x 3/16 in binding head 811-7206 #5-40 x 1/4 in binding head 811-14 Beveled facenuts 811-2 #6-32 x 1/4 in binding head 811-161 #6-32 x 1/4 in binding head 811-7248 Catalog Number 15-1048 #6-32 x 1/4 in pan head, brass 11-1893 #6-32 x 3/8 in binding head 811-129 #8-32 x 3/16 in binding head 11-1618 #8-32 x 1/4 in 11-1369 #8-32 x 1/4 in 811-408-2 #8-32 x 3/8 in binding head 11-1766 #8-32 x 3/8 in binding head 11-6074-4 #6-32 x 7/32 in binding head 11-6085-2 0.438 (11.13) Dia. Hole 0.438 (11.13) Dia. Hole 0.625 (15.88) Dia. 0.625 (15.88) Dia. 0.060 (1.63) 20 Prevents moisture and contaminants from entering panel enclosure Behind panel mounting Stainless-steel cup washer ensures proper seating of silicone rubber seal Seal withstands 20 psi water pressure Cat. No. 32-341 0.072 0.082 0.467 Dia. 0.472 0.427 0.432 Silicone Rubber 4 4 4 4 4 4 Prevents moisture and contaminants from entering lever to bushing enclosure Front panel mounting Threaded mounting nut ensures proper assembly of silicon rubber boot Brass nut: 15/32-32 NS-2A Black color SW1RY3030 Dimensions--32-341 1/16-Inch Lettering (located on angular surface) 4 Toggle Boot Panel Seal 4 4 #6-32 x 3/16 in binding head Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Catalog Number 15-1049 4.8 Product Selection Mounting Description Color Catalog Number Front panel mounting Molded in brass mounting nut (15/32-32 NS-2A) ensures proper assembly of silicon rubber boot Black SW1RY3030 0.670 Dia. 0.650 Thickness of brushing seal is reduced to 0.080 when mounted to panel 0.030 (0.80) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 0.940 (24.00) 0.120 (3.00) Cupwasher Stainless Steel 4 4 Dimensions--15/32-32 NS-2A 0.105 0.120 4 4 0.660 (16.70) 4 4 O0.643 (O16.34) 4 O0.330 (O8.40) 4 Inner Thread 15/32-32 NS-2A 4 Notes 1 Decorator facenuts for 15/32 in bushing switches, 15/32-32 thread. 2 Hardware items are sold for use with Eaton switches only. 4 4 4 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--November 2012 www.eaton.com V11-T4-33 4.8 4 Toggle Switches Accessories Indicating Plates Product Selection--Indicating Plates for 15/32-Inch Bushing Mounted Switches 4 4 4 Keyway Location Marking Opposite Keyway Keyway Side Material Finish Catalog Number Keyway on bottom ON OFF 0.032 in steel Plain 30-5632 Statuary bronze 30-5632-3 Burnished nickel 30-5632-4 0.032 in brass Black cupric oxide 1 30-2899-3 0.032 in steel Statuary bronze 30-5632-7 Burnished nickel 30-5632-6 Burnished nickel 30-5632-11 4 4 RAD 4 RUN START HOT COLD 30-5632-15 4 HI LOW 30-5632-16 4 ON STOP FOR REV 4 AUTO TEST 30-2899-6 PUSH START 30-2899-7 4 RUN TEST BLANK BLANK 0.032 in steel Burnished nickel 30-5632-8 ON OFF 0.032 in steel Burnished nickel 30-5632-13 OFF ON 4 Keyway on side 4 Keyway on top 4 4 4 Keyway on top PHO 0.032 in steel 30-5632-17 0.032 in steel Burnished nickel 30-2899-2 30-2899-9 30-2899-8 T B OFF ON 0.032 in steel Burnished nickel 30-5632-12 30-5632-14 SET RUN 30-2899-10 BLANK RESET O I I O 30-2899-12 0.032 in steel Burnished nickel 30-5632-23 30-5632-19 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches Indicating Plate ON 1 16 15 Dia. 32 1 32 OFF 1 11 32 5 Dia. 8 Note 1 White lettering. 4 4 4 4 V11-T4-34 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--November 2012 www.eaton.com 4.9 Toggle Switches Technical Data SinglePole TwoPole FourPole 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Terminal Identification Toggle Circuit Diagrams When specified on order, switches will have the terminals identified as shown in the illustration at right. Terminal markings will be ink-stamped on the side of the switch case and unused terminal positions will not be identified. Circuit Letter All views are rear of switch with keyway or at down as applicable. Terminal numbers 2, 2 and 5 and 5 and 8 are considered inboard terminals for single-, two- and four-pole switches respectively. All others are considered outboard. 10 11 12 "Three Independent" ON-ON-ON Circuit Diagram For switch modified with "Three Independent" ON-ON-ON special circuit. External jumpers are required. User to connect wiring per instructions given below. ON-ON-ON Special Circuit Connection Points Connect common to terminals 2 Connect circuit "A" to terminals 6 Connect circuit "B" to terminals 4 Connect circuit "C" to terminals 1 A 1PST B 1PDT C 2PST D 2PDT No. of Poles Circuit A 1 PDT 1 3 6 4 4 4 4 L 2PST 4 5 6 2 5 8 11 3 6 9 12 7 10 8 11 9 12 1 4 2 5 3 6 G3 1PST 4 M 2PST 2 4 4 1 3 4 2 4 4 1 3 4 N6 2PDT 4 4 4 P 1PDT 2 CENTER Position (Maintained) Circuit B DOWN Position (Keyway) H4 1PDT 2 3 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 4 5 6 4 5 6 Circuit Diagrams 4 6 4 Circuit C 1 Q7 2 Circuit 6 B A C C 4 NC NO H G NC NO 4 4 Toggle Switch Type Special General Purpose Toggle Circuits Circuit Number Isolated terminal--does not make contact with lever 4 4 Center terminal and switch lever A Bulb 4 Momentary contact B 7571 A B 7555 4 Toggle Switch Legend Contact terminal--will make contact with switch lever 7530 4 Legends Legend Schematic 4 K 1PDT 3 UP Position 4 4 1 2 3 E 4PST 1 1 J 1PST 5 6 2 3 4 Schematic I 2 Circuit 5 1 2 3 Circuit with Lever in ... 3 ON Independent Circuit Letter 2 3 F 4PDT 2 Single-Pole Schematic 4 Denotes mechanical contact portion Notes 1 Poles 11 and 12 may be eliminated for three-pole devices. 2 Poles 10, 11 and 12 may be eliminated for three-pole devices. 3 Dependent lamp. 4 Independent lamp. 5 Two circuit--indicates a special type of double-throw switch in which the two circuits being controlled may be independent of each other. 6 For 206 Series, an additional lamp is available. 7 Available in 1PDT or 2PDT. 4 4 4 4 A 4 B 4 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--November 2012 www.eaton.com V11-T4-35 Dimmers and Wipers Slide Control 5.1 Paddle and Slide Controls Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2 Paddle Control V11-T5-2 V11-T5-2 V11-T5-3 V11-T5-3 5 5 5 Rotary Wipers Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 V11-T5-4 V11-T5-4 V11-T5-4 V11-T5-4 V11-T5-4 V11-T5-5 V11-T5-6 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Rotary Wiper 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--November 2012 www.eaton.com V11-T5-1 5.1 5 Dimmers and Wipers Paddle and Slide Controls Contents Paddle and Slide Controls Description 5 Page Paddle and Slide Controls Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 V11-T5-3 V11-T5-3 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Product Description Eaton's unique family of dimmer and wiper controls are field proven to be the market's most dependable controls. Although originally designed for the heavy truck market, applications in various other types of vehicles exist. Paddle and slide versions are available and both have the look, feel and durability associated with our controls. Bezels and actuators are molded in a soft matte finish. Illuminated and non-illuminated versions are available. Board-mounted LEDs located behind a laseretched panel provide illumination. Customized light panel lettering and custom pad printed bezels are also available. Both dimmer and wiper controls are designed to complement the NGR family of switches. Note: Specific frame options are available that allow product to mount in NGR gang mount system. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. 5 Catalog Number Selection 5 How To Order--Paddle and Slide Controls 5 To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers. Example: 5 5 5 Control Type D = Dimmer W = Wiper Actuator Type P = Paddle S = Slide 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Application Voltage 12 = 12V 24 = 24V D Amperage Rating and Voltage 1 3 4 5 6 8 10 W = 3A, 24V = 4A, 12V = 5A, 24V = 6A, 12V = 8A, 12V = 10A, 12V = Wiper P 24 Bezel Print Style A = Style A B = Style B C = Style C D = Style D 5 C A Connector Type Packard No. A = 12020398 B = 12015345 C = 174930-1 D = 12034295 E = Leads only D G Connector and Leads Only Detail Dimmer connector Dimmer and wiper connector Dimmer connector Wiper connector Dimmer only Bezel Print Style 4 PANEL B R I G H T D I M Code A WIPER W I P E R O F F W A S H PANEL 0 1 2 Code B Code C Code D Notes 1 Amperage ratings for dimmers only. 2 Maximum dwell time describes the average time constant for delayed wiper activation. 3 Maximum nominal dwell. 4 Custom pad print available for bezel or button. V11-T5-2 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--November 2012 www.eaton.com Circuit Board 2 D = Dimmer L = 18 sec. 3 S = 10 sec. 3 G Y R X LED Color = Green = Yellow = Red = Nonilluminated 5.1 Dimmers and Wipers Paddle and Slide Controls Technical Data and Specifications 5 Paddle and Slide Controls Description Specification 5 Ratings (dimmer only) 4, 6, 8, 10A at 14 Vdc 3, 5A at 28 Vdc 5 Mechanical life 100,000 operations, maximum Operating temperature range -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C) 5 Base material High-grade thermoplastic molding material Mounting means Snap-in mounting with plastic bezel Mounting hole Rectangular panel cutout: 1.734 x 0.867 in (44.00 x 22.00 mm) 5 Panel thickness Paddle 0.030 to 0.190 in (0.762 x 4.80 mm) 5 Slide 5 0.030 to 0.080 in (0.762 x 2.03 mm) Approximate weight 5 1.5 oz 5 Dimensions 5 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Paddle Control 1.960 (49.78) R 0.156 Typ (R 3.96) 5 B R I G H T D I M Lettering to be white. Lettering style to be Helvetica Swiff Condensed 14 pt. WIPER PANEL W I P E R O F F 1.024 (26.01) 5 Slide Control 0.675 1.024 (17.15) (26.01) 5 W A S H 0.448 (11.38) 1.663 (42.24) Symbol and lettering to be stamped in white. "WIPER" and "WASH" lettering style to be 12 pt. Univers 59. OFF lettering to be 10 pt. Univers 59. Custom lettering is also available. 0.100 (2.54) 50 5 0.214 (5.44) 1.332 (33.83) 1.582 (40.18) 5 Blue 0.454 (11.53) 0.100 (2.54) 5 0.800 (20.32) 1.019 0.020 (25.88 0.51) 1.718 (43.64) 5 R 0.080 Typ (R 2.03) R 0.090 Typ (R 2.29) 0.857 (21.79) 2 Places 0.745 (18.92) 5 Black 1.965 (49.91) See Detail A 5 0.778 (19.76) Travel 5 5 0.867 0.005 (22.02 0.13) 5 Black 0.320 (8.13) White Blue Yellow Terminal Identification: Positive (+) (blue wire) Negative (-) (black wire) Load (yellow wire) Positive (+) LED light (blue wire) Washer (white wire) washer only Negative (-) LED light (black wire) 1.650 (41.91) 5 1.734 0.005 (44.04 0.127) 5 2.680 (68.07) 1.302 (33.07) Yellow 5 Panel Opening Blue 5 0.964 (24.49) Ref 5 Black Terminal Identification: Positive (+) (blue wire) Negative (-) (black wire) Load (yellow wire) Positive (+) LED light (blue wire) Open position Negative (-) LED light (black wire) Detail A Typ 2 Plcs 5 C of Pivot Point 5 5 5 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--November 2012 www.eaton.com V11-T5-3 5.2 5 Dimmers and Wipers Rotary Wipers Contents Rotary Wiper Description 5 Page Rotary Wipers Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 V11-T5-5 V11-T5-6 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Product Description Features The rotary wiper has been designed to be a highly durable rotary wiper control for the transportation industry. The RW200 series wiper has four wiper control 5 positions via a rotating knob: Off, Intermittent, Continuous Low Speed and Continuous High Speed. The device has a washer function that operates the washer pump and wiper while the knob is depressed. Options Load Dump Protection The switch will withstand a 120V load dump per SAE J1455 Reverse Voltage Protection The device will not be damaged when exposed to 12 Vdc for 5 minutes 5 5 Product Selection 5 To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers. 5 Rotary Wiper Code Numbers and Letters 5 Series Code Voltage Code 5 12064752 5 5 Packard Connectors 12977042 RW RW 12 Vdc 6294544 and 2977048 5 12A 12B 200 6288538 5 Code 12C 12D Bushing Length in Inches (mm) Code Catalog Number 0.261 (6.63) A RW20012AA 0.424 (10.77) B RW20012AB 0.261 (6.63) A RW20012BA 0.424 (10.77) B RW20012BB 0.261 (6.63) A RW20012CA 0.424 (10.77) B RW20012CB 0.261 (6.63) A RW20012DA 0.424 (10.77) B RW20012DB 5 5 5 5 5 V11-T5-4 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--November 2012 www.eaton.com Variable bushing length Variable spindle length Choice of connectors Pad printing on knob Standards and Certifications Meets SAE standards J1455, J1944 and J1988. Dimmers and Wipers Rotary Wipers 5.2 Technical Data and Specifications 5 Rotary Wipers 5 Description Specification Operating voltage range 9 Vdc to 16 Vdc Continuous load rating 17A from -40 to 73F (-40 to 23C) Derated to 5A at 185F (85C) Wiper electromechanical life 50,000 cycles Electrical cycle life 250,000 cycles in the Intermittent position 300,000 cycles combined in the Low and High positions Operating temperature -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C) Humidity rating Device will operate properly at 98% humidity between -40 and 100F (-40 and 38C) Mechanical shock The switch will withstand a 3 ft drop on concrete 5 Vibration The device will operate properly while being exposed to 133 hours of 1G rms vibration along all three axes, sweeping from 5 Hz to 1500 Hz at one octave per minute 5 5 5 5 5 5 Connector Drawings 5 5 5 5 12064752 12977042 5 6288538 5 5 5 5 2977048 6294544 Circuit Continuity Wire Terminations Switch Position Circuit Continuity Wire Color Switch Connections Off Open Yellow Motor low speed terminal Intermittent Yellow--Red and brown White Motor high speed terminal Low speed Yellow Blue Motor park terminal High speed White Black Ground Brown Brown Washer pump Red--Positive Red +12 Vdc (positive) Washer 5 5 5 5 5 5 Black--Negative 5 5 5 5 5 5 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--November 2012 www.eaton.com V11-T5-5 5.2 5 5 Dimmers and Wipers Rotary Wipers Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) RW200 Series 5 5 Off/Park 20 5 Washer (Push In) 5 WIPER WASHER 5 70 1.176 +0.010 -0.025 (29.87 +0.25 -0.64) Dia. Fastest Intermittent Speed 20 Continuous Low Speed 20 Ref Continuous Fast Speed 5 0.248 (6.30) Dia. EATON 5 Slowest Intermittent Speed 2.188 (55.57) 0.370 (9.40) Flats 2.188 (55.57) View B 5 1.358 (34.50) 5 0.609 +0.010 -0.015 (15.47 +0.25 -0.38) 5 0.424 (10.77) 3.029 +0.006 -0.010 (76.94 +0.15 -0.25) 0.099 (2.51) 5 2.230 (56.64) 1.805 (45.84) 5 5 5 Yellow Lead 5 Blue Lead 3.335 (84.71) Approx. 5 Black Lead 5 White Lead Red Lead Brown Lead 4.505 (114.43) Approx. 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 V11-T5-6 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--November 2012 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons AC Rated Pushbuttons 6.1 AC Rated Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2 XP Series Sealed Pushbuttons 6.3 V11-T6-2 V11-T6-2 V11-T6-3 V11-T6-4 V11-T6-5 V11-T6-8 V11-T6-8 V11-T6-8 V11-T6-9 V11-T6-10 V11-T6-11 V11-T6-12 V11-T6-13 V11-T6-14 V11-T6-16 V11-T6-17 V11-T6-18 V11-T6-18 V11-T6-18 V11-T6-19 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 XP Series Sealed Pushbutton Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Application Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 6 Illuminated AC/DC Rated Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Series 206/208, 220 and 221/224, 231/234 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Series 580/581/586 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Series 770/775 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Series 860 and 861/845, 810/815, 820/825 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illuminated and Non-Illuminated Pushbutton Caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lamp Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illuminated AC/DC Rated Pushbuttons V11-T6-2 V11-T6-21 V11-T6-21 V11-T6-21 V11-T6-21 V11-T6-22 V11-T6-22 V11-T6-23 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--August 2014 www.eaton.com V11-T6-1 6.1 6 Pushbuttons AC Rated Contents AC Rated Description 6 Page AC Rated Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 6 V11-T6-3 V11-T6-4 V11-T6-5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Product Description Features These general-purpose, AC rated, pushbutton switches offer a wide variety of configurations, button styles and termination types. The 7835 and 7836 light-duty series pushbutton switches are AC only. They feature slow-make/slow-break butttype contacts with a light operating pressure that is particularly suited to instrumentation applications. Circuits 1PST, 1PDT, 2PDT Momentary action Terminal Types Screw terminals, brass (furnished unassembled) 8410/8411 Series - #5-40 x 3/16 in (Cat. No. 811-7206) 8406/8440 Series - #5-40 x 5/32 in screws (Cat. No. 11-26) Solder lug, brass silverplated 6 6 6 6 8448 Series - #6-32 x 3/16 in binding head screws (Cat. No. 811-2) Hardware supplied One hexagon locknut (Cat. No. 15-192) and one bright nickel-plated knurled facenut (Cat. No. 15-124F1) 8411/8418 Series has a bright nickel-plated hexagon facenut (Cat. No. 15-966-2) All hardware is furnished unassembled Other mounting types are flush, nest and snap-in 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 V11-T6-2 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--August 2014 www.eaton.com Standards and Certifications 1 UL(R) Recognized CSA(R) Certified RoHS 2 Notes 1 Except where noted. 2 Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for the most up-to-date list of verified part numbers. Pushbuttons AC Rated 6.1 Product Selection 6 Non-Illuminated 6 Light-Duty, Momentary Contact Flush Mounted Flush Rating Poles and Throw Contacts Circuit Number 1 Button Construction Color NC A Nylon Black Button Extension Dimensions "B" in Inches (mm) Typical Max. Operating Force Mounting or Bushing Length Dimensions Catalog "A" in Inches (mm) Number 0.468 (11.89) 0.7 lbs 3 Flush 8406K1 0.453 (11.50) 0.7 lbs 3 Flush 8410K1 6 6 Screw Terminals 1/4 A, 250 Vac/Vdc 1PST 3/4 A, 125 Vac/Vdc Snap-in 6 6 Snap-in Mounted Rating Poles and Throw Color Typical Max. Operating Force Mounting or Bushing Length Dimensions Catalog "A" in Inches (mm) Number Nylon White 0.375 (9.53) -- Snap-in 8423K1 5 Nylon White 0.375 (9.53) -- Snap-in 8424K1 5 Button Construction NC A NO A Contacts 6 Button Extension Dimensions "B" in Inches (mm) Circuit Number 1 6 Spade Terminals (0.250 in) 3/4 A, 125 Vac/Vdc 1PST 1/4 A, 250 Vac/Vdc Bushing 6 Bushing Mounted Rating Poles and Throw Contacts 6 Color Button Extension Dimensions "B" in Inches (mm) Typical Max. Operating Force Mounting or Bushing Length Dimensions Catalog "A" in Inches (mm) Number Nylon Black 0.250 (6.35) 1.5 lbs 3 0.250 (6.35) 8411K5 6 Nylon Black 0.406 (10.31) 1.5 lbs 3 0.468 (11.89) 8411K8 Metal -- 0.296 (7.52) 2.5 lbs 0.468 (11.89) 8440K2 5 6 A Metal -- 0.312 (7.92) -- 0.562 (14.27) 7835K11A 6 A Nylon (snap-on) Black -- -- 0.562 (14.27) 7835K11C Red -- -- 0.562 (14.27) 7835K11D A Metal -- 0.312 (7.92) -- 0.562 (14.27) 7836K11A 6 A Nylon (snap-on) Black -- -- 0.562 (14.27) 7836K11C 6 Red -- -- 0.562 (14.27) 7836K11D 6 6 0.406 (10.31) 1.5 lbs 3 0.468 (11.89) 8411K7 0.375 (9.53) 1.5 lbs 4 0.468 (11.89) 8411K12 6 Button Circuit Number 1 Construction 6 Solder Lugs 3/4 A, 125 Vac/Vdc 1PST 1/4 A, 250 Vac/Vdc NC 3/4 A, 125 Vac/Vdc 1PST 1/4 A, 250 Vac/Vdc NC 5 A, 12 Vdc, 3 A, 125 Vac 2 1PST NO 3 A, 125 Vac 1 A, 250 Vac 1/10 hp, 125 Vac 1PST NC 3 A, 125 Vac 1 A, 250 Vac 1/10 hp, 125 Vac 1PST NO A A A Screw Terminals 3/4 A, 125 Vac/Vdc 1PST 1/4 A, 250 Vac/Vdc 5 A, 12 Vdc, 3 A, 125 Vac 2 3 A, 125 Vac 1 A, 250 Vac 1/10 hp, 125 Vac 1PST NC A NO NO A Nylon Black NO NC 1PST NO 0.296 (7.52) 2.5 lbs 0.468 (11.89) 8440K3 Metal -- 0.312 (7.92) -- 0.562 (14.27) 7836K13A 0.312 (7.92) -- 0.562 (14.27) 7835K12A Metal -- 0.312 (7.92) -- 0.562 (14.27) 7836K12A Spade Terminals (0.250 in) 1PST 1/4 A, 250 Vac/Vdc 3/4 A, 125 Vac/Vdc 1PST 3 A, 125 Vac 1PST NO A NC A NO NC NO A Nylon Nylon Nylon Red Black Black 4 0.250 (6.35) 1.5 lbs 0.406 (10.31) 1.5 lbs 3 0.250 (6.35) 8411K13 0.468 (11.89) 8411K10 6 6 5 6 6 0.375 (9.53) 1.5 lbs 4 0.468 (11.89) 8411K11 5 0.250 (6.35) 1.5 lbs 0.250 (6.35) 8418K1 5 0.406 (10.31) 1.5 lbs 0.468 (11.89) 8418K12 5 Notes 1 For circuit number detail, see table on Page V11-T6-18. 2 UL and CSA Listing not applicable. 3 To change operating pressure, refer to your local Eaton Sales Representative. 4 Operating pressure cannot be changed. 5 Combination spade and solder lug terminal. 6 Items are normally in distributor stock. 7 Standard length is 6 in (152.40 mm), stripped 0.625 in (15.88 mm). Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--August 2014 www.eaton.com 6 6 -- A 6 6 Metal Wire Leads 7 3/4 A, 125 Vac 1 A, 250 Vac 1/10 hp, 125 Vac 6 5 A 1PST 6 6 6 6 6 6 V11-T6-3 6.1 6 6 Pushbuttons AC Rated Non-Illuminated Medium-Duty, Momentary Contact One-Hole 6 One-Hole Mounted Poles and Throw Rating 6 15 A, 125 Vac 1PST 10 A, 250 Vac 1/3 hp, 125-250 Vac 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 15 A, 125 Vac, NO 10 A, 125 Vac, NC 10 A, 250 Vac, NO 5 A, 250 Vac, NC 1/2 hp, 250 Vac 1/4 hp, 125 Vac 1PDT NO A Metal -- B Metal B 15 A, 125 Vac 10 A, 250 Vac 2PST NO 15 A, 125 Vac 1PST 10 A, 250 Vac 1/3 hp, 125-250 Vac NO 15 A, 125 Vac, NO 10 A, 125 Vac, NC 10 A, 250 Vac, NO 5 A, 250 Vac, NC 1/2 hp, 250 Vac 1/4 hp, 125 Vac 1PDT NO, NC 15 A, 125 Vac 10 A, 250 Vac 2PST Technical Data and Specifications 6 AC Rated 0.9 lbs 0.687 (17.45) 8444K3 0.250 (6.35) 0.9 lbs 0.343 (8.71) 8444K4 -- 0.531 (13.49) 2.0 lbs 0.687 (17.45) 8434K2 Bakelite Black 0.531 (13.49) 2.0 lbs 0.687 (17.45) 8435K2 C Metal -- 0.250 (6.35) -- 0.343 (8.71) 8448K2 2 A Metal -- 0.531 (13.49) 0.9 lbs 0.687 (17.45) 8444K2 B Metal -- 0.531 (13.49) 2.0 lbs 0.687 (17.45) 8434K1 B Bakelite Black 0.531 (13.49) 2.0 lbs 0.687 (17.45) 8435K1 NO C Metal -- 0.250 (6.35) -- 0.343 (8.71) 8448K1 2 Description Specification Ratings See Product Selection tables on Page V11-T6-3 and the table above. Contact material 3-6 A rated Movable, silver-plated copper Stationary, silver-plated copper 10-15 A rated Movable, silver-plated copper with fine or coin silver contact face button Stationary, copper with fine or coin silver contact face button Wire leads 6 18 gauge, 6 in (152 mm) long, skinned 0.75 in (19 mm) Lengths beyond 6 in (152 mm) are additional charge Mounting means--One-hole mount 6 Threaded bushing--0.468 in dia. 32 threads/inch (11.90 mm) Keyway--0.068 W x 0.035 D in (1.73 W x 0.89 D mm); provides anti-rotation feature Keyway on 7835/7836 Series is 0.080 W x 0.040 D in (2.03 W x 1.01 D mm) Operating temperature range 0 F to 150 F (-17.8 C to 65.6 C) 6 Mounting or Bushing Length Dimensions Catalog "A" in Inches (mm) Number 0.531 (13.49) 6 6 Typical Max. Operating Force NO, NC 6 6 Color Button Extension Dimensions "B" in Inches (mm) Spade Terminals (0.250 in) 6 6 Button Construction Screw Terminals 6 6 Contacts Circuit Number 1 Notes 1 For circuit number detail, see table on Page V11-T6-18. 2 UL and CSA Listing not applicable. 6 6 6 6 6 6 V11-T6-4 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--August 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons AC Rated 6.1 Dimensions 6 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 0.312 (7.92) 6 8410 7835K12A Keyway 0.080-0.085 W x 0.040-0.047 D (2.03-2.16 W x 1.02-1.19 D) 6 1.000 (25.40) 0.562 (14.27) 0.625 (15.88) 0.312 (7.92) 0.562 (14.27) 6 0.460 (11.68) Dia. 6 B 0.780 (19.81) 1.180 (29.97) 0.230 (5.84) Stroke 0.310 (7.87) 6 1.610 (40.89) 1.500 (38.10) 0.060 0.250 (1.52) (6.35) 1.100 (27.94) 1.060 (26.92) 0.090 (2.29) Dia. 2 Holes 0.060 (1.52) 6 8411K5 and 8411K13 0.250 (6.35) 0.150 (3.81) 2 Holes 6 0.650 (16.51) Dia. 1.060 (26.92) Dia. 0.310 (7.87) 6 0.290 (7.37) Dia. Button 1.120 (28.57) 8406 1.370 (34.80) 0.840 (21.34) 1.870 (47.50) 6 B 6.000 (152.40) 0.812 (20.62) 6 1.870 (47.50) 1.500 (38.10) 0.469 (11.89)-32 TPI 0.484 (12.29) 6 0.150 (3.81) Mounting Holes 0.343 (8.71) 6 6 1.250 (31.75) 6 0.650 (16.51) 0.670 (17.02) 1.000 (25.40) 6 6 0.250 (6.35) Spade Terminal Screw Type Terminal 6 6 8411K11 and 8411K12 8411K7 and 8411K8 0.460 (11.68) Dia. 0.310 (7.87) Dia. 0.040 (1.02) 0.180 (4.57) 6 0.070 (1.78) 0.260 (6.60) Stroke 6 B B 6 0.460 (11.68) 0.090 (2.29) 0.060 (1.52) 2.090 (53.09) 1.250 (31.75) 1.950 (49.53) 1.840 (46.74) 1.070 (27.18) 1.010 (25.65) 0.650 (16.51) 0.670 (17.02) 0.032 (0.76) Screw Type Terminals 2-#5/40 Binding Head Screw 0.340 (8.64) 0.032 (0.76) 0.340 (8.64) 6 6 0.650 (16.51) 0.670 (17.02) 6 Screw Type Terminals #5/40 x 0.188 (4.57) Large Binding Head Screw 6 6 6 6 6 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--August 2014 www.eaton.com V11-T6-5 6.1 6 6 6 6 6 6 AC Rated Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 8411K10 and 8418K12 0.310 (7.87) Dia. 8423 and 8424 0.340 (8.64) Stroke 0.040 (1.02) Max. Pre-Travel to Break Circuit 0.460 (11.68) 0.850 (21.59) Dia. 0.370 (9.40) Extension 0.030 (0.76) 0.670 (17.02) Dia. 0.370 0.300 (9.40) (7.62) 0.950 (24.13) 0.469 (11.91) 2.120 (53.85) 1.270 Dia. -32 (32.26) Threads per Inch 6 6 Pushbuttons 0.560 (14.22) Hex 1.350 (34.29) 0.850 (21.59) Dia. 0.340 (8.64) 0.240 (6.10) 0.340 (8.64) 0.740 (18.80) Dia. max. Note: Use 0.780 (19.81) dia. hole on 0.060 (1.52) thick panel. 0.250 (6.35) 6 6 6 8418K1 0.220 (5.59) Stroke 0.310 (7.87) and Extension Dia. 0.469 (11.89) Dia. -32 1.750 1.270 Threads (44.45) (32.26) per Inch 6 0.030 (0.76) 6 0.460 (11.68) Dia. 0.560 (14.22) Hex 0.250 (6.35) 0.700 (17.78) 0.230 (5.95) 0.300 (7.62) 0.340 (8.64) 0.670 (17.02) Dia. 0.520 (13.21) Stroke 0.620 (15.75) B 6 6 0.100 (2.54) 0.040 (1.02) 0.040 (1.02) Max. Pre-Travel to Break Circuit 6 6 8434K2 and 8435K2 0.030 (0.76) Ref 0.970 (24.64) 1.210 (30.73) 3-#6-32 x 3/16 LG Binding Head Screw 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 V11-T6-6 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--August 2014 www.eaton.com 0.040 (1.02) 0.070 (1.78) Keyway Pushbuttons AC Rated 6.1 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 8440 6 8448K1 0.460 (11.68) Dia. 0.230 (5.84) Dia. 0.030 (0.76) to 0.070 (1.78) Pre-Travel 0.030 (0.76) Button Depressed 0.290 (7.37) 0.460 (11.68) 6 0.090 (2.29) Button Travel to Make Contact 0.250 (6.35) Stroke 6 0.300 (7.62) Dia. 6 0.469 (11.91) Dia. -32 Threads per Inch 6 #15-32 Threads 0.340 (8.64) 0.680 (17.27) 0.460 (11.68) Dia. 1.200 (30.48) 1.310 (33.27) 0.620 (15.75) 0.040 (1.02) 0.070 (1.78) Keyway 6 6 0.750 (19.05) 6 6 8442 and 8444 (Screw Terminals) 0.090 (2.29) Button Travel to Make Contact 8448K2 0.469 (11.91) Dia. -32 Threads per Inch B 0.940 (23.88) 1.210 (30.99) 0.260 (6.60) 0.340 (8.64) 0.040 (1.02) 0.070 (1.78) Keyway 0.250 (6.35) Stroke 6 0.469 (11.91) Dia. -32 Threads per Inch 0.300 (7.62) Dia. 0.620 (15.75) A 6 0.090 (2.29) Button Travel to Make Contact 6 6 0.460 (11.68) Dia. 0.040 (1.02) 0.070 (1.78) Keyway 0.760 (19.30) 1.060 (26.92) 1.320 (33.53) 6 6 6 0.750 (19.05) 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--August 2014 www.eaton.com V11-T6-7 6.2 6 Pushbuttons Illuminated AC/DC Rated Contents Illuminated AC/DC Rated Description 6 Page Illuminated AC/DC Rated Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lamp Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Terminal Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 6 6 6 V11-T6-9 V11-T6-14 V11-T6-16 V11-T6-17 V11-T6-18 V11-T6-18 V11-T6-18 V11-T6-19 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Product Description Eaton offers a wide range of pushbutton switches for standard industry applications such as appliances, electronics, medical and test instrumentation, office equipment and many other commercial applications. A variety of options are available such as illuminated and non-illuminated versions, colored lens caps, lamp styles and mounting styles. 6 Each pushbutton series offers a matching indicator for a consistent look. See the Product Overview tables to quickly identify the required product. Then, refer to the Catalog Number Selection and Product Selection tables to determine the catalog number. 6 6 6 Product Selection Guide 6 General Purpose Pushbuttons and Indicators--Illuminated and Non-Illuminated Series 206/208 Page 220/221/224 Page 231/234 Page Standards and Certifications 1 UL Recognized CSA Certified RoHS 2 Notes 1 Except where noted. 2 Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for the most up-to-date list of verified part numbers. 580/581/586 Page 6 Pushbutton Selection--Switch V11-T6-9 V11-T6-9 V11-T6-9 V11-T6-10 6 Pushbutton Selection--Indicator V11-T6-9 V11-T6-9 V11-T6-9 V11-T6-10 6 Pushbutton Cap Selection V11-T6-13 V11-T6-13 V11-T6-13 V11-T6-13 6 Circuit Diagram Letter (See Page V11-T6-18) K, N K, N K, N J, L, M 6 Series 6 Pushbutton Selection--Switch V11-T6-11 V11-T6-12 V11-T6-12 V11-T6-12 6 Pushbutton Cap Selection V11-T6-11 V11-T6-12 V11-T6-12 V11-T6-12 6 Pushbutton Selection--Indicator V11-T6-13 V11-T6-13 V11-T6-13 V11-T6-13 6 Circuit Diagram Letter (See Page V11-T6-18) Q K, N K, N J, L 770/775 Page 810/815 Page 820/825 Page 6 V11-T6-8 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--August 2014 www.eaton.com 860/861/845 Page Pushbuttons Illuminated AC/DC Rated 6.2 Series 206/208, 220 and 221/224, 231/234 6 6 6 Catalog Number Selection 6 How To Order--Series 206/220 1 and 221 1/231 1, Switch 6 To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers. Example: Base Prefix 206 = 206 Series illuminated 220 = 220 Series non-illuminated 221 = 221 Series illuminated 231 = LED display 206 Product Type K = Switch Action 1 = Mom. 2 = Alt. Number of Poles 1 = 1PST 2 = 2PDT Contact Material 8 = Silver 9 = Gold 6 = 2PDT 2 K 1 1 9 Terminations 1 = Solder Mounting 3 0 = No barriers 1 = Vert. barriers 2 = Horiz. barriers 3 = Full barriers Pushbutton Style 220 and 221 C = Clear D = Deadfront F = Filtered M = Matte 1 2 D Full/Top Lens Color All Series 00 = Orange 01 = White 02 = Red 03 = Green 04 = Yellow 05 = Blue 10 = Amber 12 = Lunar white 13 = Light green 15 = Clear 20 = Gray 4 21 = Black 4 03 05 S Bottom Lens Color 206 Series Only 00 = Orange 01 = White 02 = Red 03 = Green 04 = Yellow 05 = Blue 10 = Amber 12 = Lunar white 13 = Light green 15 = Clear 20 = Gray 4 21 = Black 4 30 Pushbutton Height 206 A = 0.190 in (4.8 mm) full S = 0.190 in (4.8 mm) split 220 and 221/231 A = 0.190 in (4.8 mm) full 6 6 Lamp 206 7/220 and 221 6 Incandescent 5 Example: 30 28-3158 231 LED lamps 6 Example: 02 Red, 5 Vdc 6 6 6 6 6 6 231 M = Matte 6 How To Order--Series 208/224 1/234 1, Indicator 6 To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers. Example: Base Prefix 208 = 208 Series indicators 224 = 224 Series indicators 234 = 234 Series indicators Product Type L = Indicator Terminations 1 = Solder 208 L 1 2 Mounting 3 0 = No barriers 1 = Vert. barriers 2 = Horiz. barriers 3 = Full barriers Pushbutton Style 208/224 C = Clear D = Deadfront F = Filtered M = Matte D 03 Full/Top Lens Color All Series 00 = Orange 01 = White 02 = Red 03 = Green 04 = Yellow 05 = Blue 10 = Amber 12 = Lunar white 13 = Light green 15 = Clear 20 = Gray 4 21 = Black 4 05 S Bottom Lens Color 208 Series Only 00 = Orange 01 = White 02 = Red 03 = Green 04 = Yellow 05 = Blue 10 = Amber 12 = Lunar white 13 = Light green 15 = Clear 20 = Gray 4 21 = Black 4 30 6 6 Pushbutton Height 208 7 A = 0.190 in (4.8 mm) full S = 0.190 in (4.8 mm) split 224/234 A = 0.190 in (4.8 mm) full Lamp 208/224 Incandescent 5 Example: 30 28-3158 234 LED lamps 6 Example: 02 Red, 5 Vdc 6 6 6 6 6 6 234 M = Matte 6 6 Notes 1 Full cap style does not require a bottom lens code. 2 Pole one is silver, pole two is gold. 3 Refer to Page V11-T6-16 for barrier information. 4 Not available with lighted display. 5 Use two-digit item number, 30-37, from Incandescent Lamps table on Page V11-T6-14. 6 Use two-digit item number, 01-19, from LED Lamps table on Page V11-T6-15. 7 Accepts two bulbs. 6 6 6 6 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--August 2014 www.eaton.com V11-T6-9 6.2 Pushbuttons Illuminated AC/DC Rated Series 580/581/586 6 6 6 6 6 Catalog Number Selection 6 How To Order--Series 580/581, Switch 6 To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers. Example: 581 K 1 3 9 1 0 T 6 6 6 Base Prefix 580 = 580 Series non-illuminated 581 = 581 Series illuminated Product Type K = Switch 6 6 6 Mounting 1 0 = Chamfered bezel 1 = Flat bezel Pushbutton Style M = Matte T = Translucent Example: Base Prefix 586= 586 Series indicators Product Type L = Indicator 586 Terminations 1 = Solder L 1 0 T 03 Mounting 1 0 = Chamfered bezel 1 = Flat bezel Pushbutton Style M = Matte T = Translucent 6 6 6 Full/Top Lens Color 00 = Orange 01 = White 02 = Red 03 = Green 04 = Yellow 05 = Blue 12 = Lunar white 15 = Clear 20 = Gray 21 = Black 2 Pushbutton Height A = 0.270 in (6.9 mm) B = 0.330 in (8.4 mm) C = 0.440 in (11.2 mm) Lamp Incandescent 3 Example: 30 28-3158 To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers. 6 6 B 30 How To Order--Series 586, Indicator 6 6 1 = Solder Contact Material 5 = Silver plate 9 = Gold plate 6 6 Terminations Number of Poles 1 = 1PST NO 2 = 1PST NC 3 = 2PST NO 4 = 2PST NC 5 = 2PST NO/NC 6 6 Action 1 = Mom. 2 = Alt. 03 B 30 Full/Top Lens Color 00 = Orange 01 = White 02 = Red 03 = Green 04 = Yellow 05 = Blue 12 = Lunar white 15 = Clear 20 = Gray 21 = Black 2 Notes 1 Flush with bezel. 2 Not available with lighted display. 3 Use two-digit item number, 30-37, from Incandescent Lamps table on Page V11-T6-14. 6 6 6 6 6 6 V11-T6-10 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--August 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbutton Height A = 0.270 in (6.9 mm) B = 0.330 in (8.4 mm) C = 0.440 in (11.2 mm) Lamp Incandescent 3 Example: 30 28-3158 6.2 Pushbuttons Illuminated AC/DC Rated Series 770/775 6 6 6 6 Catalog Number Selection 6 How To Order--Series 770 1, Switch To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers. Example: Base Prefix 770 = 770 Series illuminated 770 Product Type K = Switch K 1 1 9 1 Action 1 = Mom. 2 = Alt. 1 M 03 Terminations 1 = Solder Number of Poles 1 = 1PDT 2 = 2PDT Mounting 2 0 = No barriers 1 = Vert. barriers Pushbutton Style Contact Material 8 = Silver 9 = Gold M = Matte 6 01 G 80 Full/Top Lens Color 00 = Orange 01 = White 02 = Red 03 = Green 04 = Yellow 05 = Blue Bottom Lens Color 00 = Orange 01 = White 02 = Red 03 = Green 04 = Yellow 05 = Blue Pushbutton Height F = 0.36 in (9.1 mm) full G = 0.27 in (6.9 mm) full H = 0.12 in (3.0 mm) full 2 3 S = 0.36 in (9.1 mm) split Lamp Incandescent 4 Neon 5 Example: 80 28-3157 Base Prefix 775 = 775 Series indicator Product Type L = Indicator Terminations 1 = Solder 1 1 2 Mounting 0 = No barriers 1 = Vert. barriers Pushbutton Style M = Matte M 03 Full/Top Lens Color 00 = Orange 01 = White 02 = Red 03 = Green 04 = Yellow 05 = Blue Bottom Lens Color 00 = Orange 01 = White 02 = Red 03 = Green 04 = Yellow 05 = Blue 01 G 6 6 6 6 6 To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers. 775 L 6 6 How To Order--Series 775 1, Indicator Example: 6 80 Pushbutton Height F = 0.36 in (9.1 mm) full G = 0.27 in (6.9 mm) full H = 0.12 in (3.0 mm) full 2 3 S = 0.36 in (9.1 mm) split 6 6 6 6 Lamp Incandescent 4 Neon 5 Example: 80 28-3157 6 6 6 6 6 6 Notes 1 Full or split cap style available. 2 Flush with bezel. 3 Not available with lighted display. 4 Use two-digit item number, 51-59, from Incandescent Lamps table on Page V11-T6-14. 5 Use two-digit item number, 80 or 81, from Neon Lamps table on Page V11-T6-15. 6 6 6 6 6 6 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--August 2014 www.eaton.com V11-T6-11 6.2 Pushbuttons Illuminated AC/DC Rated Series 860 and 861/845, 810/815, 820/825 6 6 6 6 6 Catalog Number Selection 6 How To Order--Series 860 and 861/810/820, Switch 1 6 To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers. Example: 6 6 6 6 6 6 Base Prefix 860= 860 Series non-illuminated 861= 861 Series illuminated 810= 810 Series illuminated 820= 820 Series illuminated Product Type 6 6 Action 1 = Mom. 2 = Alt. 6 6 6 1 Number of Poles 860 and 861 1 = 1PDT 3 = 2PST Mounting 3 Contact Material 8 = Silver 9 = Gold 6 = 2PDT/2PST 2 6 6 03 B 02 Pushbutton Height 860 and 861 A = 0.24 in (6.1 mm) B = 0.35 in (8.9 mm) C = 0.14 in (3.6 mm) 7 810/820 A = 0.33 in (8.4 mm) B = 0.44 in (11.2 mm) Full/Top Lens Color 00 = Orange 01 = White 02 = Red 03 = Green 04 = Yellow 05 = Blue 12 = Lunar white 15 = Clear 20 = Gray 21 = Black 4 Lamp 860 and 861 Incandescent 5 Example: 02 28-3154-2 810 Incandescent 5 LED 6 Example: 93 Red, 20 mA 820 Incandescent 5 Neon 8 LED 6 Example: 70 28-3156 To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers. Example: Base Prefix 845= 861 Series indicator 815= 810 Series indicator 825= 820 Series indicator Product Type L = Indicator Terminations 1 = Solder 845 L Mounting 3 845 0 = No barriers 1 = Vert. barriers 2 = Horiz. barriers 815/825 0 = No barriers 1 = Vert. barriers 1 2 D 03 B Full/Top Lens Color 00 = Orange 01 = White 02 = Red 03 = Green 04 = Yellow 05 = Blue 12 = Lunar white 15 = Clear 20 = Gray 21 = Black 4 30 Pushbutton Height 845 A = 0.24 in (6.1 mm) B = 0.35 in (8.9 mm) C = 0.14 in (3.6 mm) 7 815/825 A = 0.33 in (8.4 mm) B = 0.44 in (11.2 mm) Pushbutton Style C = Clear D = Deadfront F = Filtered M = Matte T = Translucent 6 6 D Pushbutton Style C = Clear D = Deadfront F = Filtered M = Matte T = Translucent 860 and 861 0 = No barriers 1 = Vert. barriers 2 = Horiz. barriers 810/820 0 = No barriers 1 = Vert. barriers 820 1 = 1PDT 2 = 2PDT NC 2 How To Order--Series 845/815/825, Indicator 1 6 6 9 1 Terminations 6 6 3 1 = Solder 810 1 = 1PDT 2 = 2PDT 6 6 K K = Switch 6 6 861 Notes 1 Full cap style does not require a bottom lens code. 2 Pole one is silver, pole two is gold. 3 Flush with bezel. 4 Not available with lighted display. 5 Use two-digit item number, 02-14, from Incandescent Lamps table on Page V11-T6-14. 6 Use two-digit item number, 93-97, from LED Lamps table on Page V11-T6-15. 7 Not available with lighted display. Available only on "M." 8 Use two-digit item number, 70, from Neon Lamps table on Page V11-T6-15. V11-T6-12 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--August 2014 www.eaton.com Lamp 815 Incandescent 5 LED 6 Example: 30 28-3158 825 Incandescent 5 LED 6 Neon 8 Example: 93 Red, 20 mA 845 Incandescent 5 Example: 37 28-3158-8 6.2 Pushbuttons Illuminated AC/DC Rated Illuminated and Non-Illuminated Pushbutton Caps 6 6 Series 206/220/231 and Series 580/770/810/820/849 6 6 6 6 Catalog Number Selection 6 How To Order--Series 206/220/231, Pushbutton Caps 6 To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers. Example: Base Prefix 206 = 2 lamp display (Series 206/208) 1 220 = Non-illuminated Series 220 and illuminated Series 221, 224 and 234 231 = LED display on Series 231 and 234 Product Type P = Pushbutton 206 P C 03 Display Legend/Style C = Clear cap and color insert, transmitted color D = Deadfront, smoky gray cap and color insert F = Filtered color, white cap and color insert 2 M = Matte, no insert, transmitted color 04 6 S Full/Top Lens Color 00 = Orange 01 = White 02 = Red 03 = Green 04 = Yellow 05 = Blue 10 = Amber 12 = Lunar white 13 = Light green 15 = Clear 20 = Gray 4 21 = Black 4 Bottom Lens Color 00 = Orange 01 = White 02 = Red 03 = Green 04 = Yellow 05 = Blue 10 = Amber 12 = Lunar white 13 = Light green 15 = Clear 20 = Gray 4 21 = Black 4 Cap Height 5 A = 0.19 in (4.8 mm), full S = 0.19 in (4.8 mm), split Base Prefix 580 = Series 580, 581, 586 6 770 = Series 770, 775 3 810 = Series 810, 815 820 = Series 820, 825 849 = Series 845, 860, 861 Product Type P = Pushbutton 6 6 6 6 To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers. 580 P 6 6 How To Order--Series 580/770/810/820/849, Pushbutton Caps Example: 6 C 03 Display Legend/Style C = Clear cap and color insert, transmitted color 7 D = Deadfront, smoky gray cap and color insert F = Filtered color, white cap and color insert 7 M = Matte, no insert, transmitted color T = Transmitted color, smooth surface, solid color 04 B Full/Top Lens Color 00 = Orange 01 = White 02 = Red 03 = Green 04 = Yellow 05 = Blue 10 = Amber 12 = Lunar white 15 = Clear 21 = Black 4 Bottom Lens Color 00 = Orange 01 = White 02 = Red 03 = Green 04 = Yellow 05 = Blue 10 = Amber 12 = Lunar white 15 = Clear 21 = Black 4 6 6 Cap Height 5 580 A = 0.27 in (6.9 mm) B = 0.33 in (8.4 mm) C = 0.44 in (11.2 mm) 770 F = Full, 0.36 in (9.1 mm) G = 0.27 in (6.9 mm) H = 0.12 in (3.0 mm) S = Split, 0.36 in (9.1 mm) 810/820 A = 0.33 in (8.4 mm) B = 0.44 in (11.2 mm) 849 A = 0.24 in (6.1 mm) B = 0.35 in (8.9 mm) C = 0.14 in (3.6 mm) Notes 1 For a high degree of illumination, a full cap may be used with two lamp devices. 2 Available only with colors red, green, yellow and blue. 3 Available in matte only. 4 Not available for lighted display. 5 Measured from panel of top of pushbutton cap. 6 Available in translucent and matte only. 7 For two lamps, two colored inserts with divider. 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--August 2014 www.eaton.com V11-T6-13 6.2 6 6 Pushbuttons Illuminated AC/DC Rated Lamp Selection Incandescent Lamps Bi-Pin Base for 800 Series 6 To Order Lamp Item Number 1 Separately ASA Lamp Number Designed Volts Design Amps Brightness (MSCP) 2 Brightness (Lumens) Lab Average Life (Hours) 3 6 02 7361 5 0.06 0.05 0.63 100,000 03 28-3154-3 7945 6 0.04 0.03 0.38 10,000 6 07 28-3154-7 7381 6.3 0.20 0.40 5.03 50,000 08 28-3154-8 7371 12 0.04 0.12 1.51 10,000 09 28-3154-9 7330 14 0.08 0.50 6.29 750 10 28-3154-10 7382 14 0.08 0.30 3.77 50,000 6 28-3154-2 6 11 28-3154-11 7370 18 0.04 0.15 1.89 10,000 12 28-3154-12 7327 28 0.04 0.34 4.27 7,000 6 13 28-3154-13 7387 28 0.04 0.30 3.77 25,000 14 28-3154-14 7876 28 0.06 0.34 4.27 25,000 6 Midget Flange Base for 770 Series 6 To Order Lamp Item Number 1 Separately ASA Lamp Number Designed Volts Design Amps Brightness (MSCP) 2 Brightness (Lumens) Lab Average Life (Hours) 3 6 51 28-3155-2 345 6 0.04 0.03 0.38 10,000 54 28-3155-5 394 12 0.04 0.12 1.51 10,000 6 55 28-3155-6 330 14 0.08 0.50 6.29 750 56 28-3155-7 382 14 0.08 0.30 3.77 50,000 6 57 28-3155-8 370 18 0.04 0.15 1.89 10,000 58 28-3155-9 327 28 0.04 0.34 4.27 7,000 6 59 28-3155-10 387 28 0.04 0.30 3.77 25,000 6 Subminiature Wedge Base for 200 and 500 Series To Order Lamp Item Number 1 Separately ASA Lamp Number Designed Volts Design Amps Brightness (MSCP) 2 Brightness (Lumens) Lab Average Life (Hours) 3 30 28-3158 56 5 0.115 0.15 1.89 20,000 6 31 28-3158-2 79 6 0.20 0.60 7.92 1,000 32 28-3158-3 84 6.3 0.04 0.03 0.38 20,000 6 33 28-3158-4 86 6.3 0.20 0.40 5.03 20,000 34 28-3158-5 18 14 0.04 0.13 1.63 5,000 6 35 28-3158-6 73 14 0.08 0.30 3.77 15,000 36 28-3158-7 85 28 0.04 0.30 3.77 7,000 6 37 28-3158-8 17 28 0.06 0.65 8.17 5,000 6 6 6 Notes 1 Use this two-digit number for installation in switches and indicators. 2 Standard tolerance for MSCP is 25%. 3 Average life is for AC operation. DC life will be approximately 50% less. Operating incandescent lamps at 5-10% below rated voltage will generally increase lamp life 200-400%. 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 V11-T6-14 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--August 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons Illuminated AC/DC Rated 6.2 Neon Lamps 1 6 T 1-3/4 Bi-Pin Base Neon Lamp for All 800 Series "Shorty" Switches and Indicators 2 External Resistance Required Ignition Voltage DC Average Useful Life (Hours) AC DC Bulb Size Lamp Length Lead Length 150 1.5 25,000 47K (1/4 W) 95 135 T-2 0.60 0.25 CLC Lamp Number Circuit Volts AC 70 7A1H 105-125 28-3156 6 Nominal Current MA Item To Order Lamp Number 3 Separately 6 6 T 1-3/4 Midget Flange Base Neon Lamps for All 700 Series Switches and Indicators 2 To Order Lamp Item Number 3 Separately CLC Lamp Number Circuit Volts AC DC Nominal Current MA Average Useful Life (Hours) 80 28-3157 A1H 105-125 150 1.5 25,000 35K (1/4 W) None 95 135 T-2 0.67 81 28-3157-2 C-24 105-125 150 4.2 8,000 None 35K 95 135 T-2 0.67 External Resistance Required Built-In Resistance AC DC Bulb Size Maximum Overall Length Ignition Voltage 6 6 LEDs for Series 231 through 235 Switches and Indicators Voltage 5 Vdc 6 5 Vdc Yellow Green 6 6 LEDs are sold installed only. Red 6 6 LED Lamps 4 Color 6 Without Diode Protection Item Number With Diode Protection Item Number 01 11 02 12 15 Vdc 03 13 Vdc 6 04 14 5 Vdc 05 15 15 Vdc 06 16 Vdc 6 07 17 5 Vdc 08 18 15 Vdc 09 19 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 T 1-3/4 Wire LEDs for All 800 Series Switches and Indicators Luminous Intensity (MCD) Item Number 3 Color Forward Current (MA) 5 Minimum 93 Red 20 95 Green 96 97 Typical Forward Voltage (V) Typical Diffused or Undiffused 6 80 160 1.7 Undiffused 20 80 160 1.7 Undiffused 6 Yellow 20 80 160 1.7 Undiffused Amber 20 80 160 1.7 Undiffused 6 6 Notes 1 Neon lamps are not recommended for use with colored caps or inserts, especially those colored green or blue. 2 Recommended external series resistor values shown for indicated average useful life are for lamp and resistor combinations used across 110-125 Vac, 1/4 W, 10% tolerance. 3 Use this two-digit number for installation in switches and indicators. 4 For use with clear or white cap only. 5 5 Vdc and 15 Vdc include internal current limiting resistor. Other voltages available--contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. 6 External current limiting required. User must include in circuit--to give current of 20 mA to LED. 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--August 2014 www.eaton.com V11-T6-15 6.2 6 6 Pushbuttons Illuminated AC/DC Rated Mounting Barriers Ordering Guide Catalog Number Example: 200B1 6 When switches are individually mounted, add 0.10 in (2.54 mm) per switch to the appropriate bezel dimension. When switches are gang mounted, add 0.05 in (1.27 mm) to the appropriate bezel dimension for each switch mounted plus an additional 0.05 in (1.27 mm) to compensate for gang mounting. 6 Series 200 and 300 Mounting Barriers 12 6 6 Product Series 200 Product Type Barrier Code B Barrier Type and Description End--Short Code 3 1 6 Center--Short 3 2 6 End--Long 4 3 6 Center--Long 4 4 Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Type 4 6 6 6 Legending All legend markings are pad printed in accordance with the limitations below. Standard markings are of condensed gothic type, 1/8 in high characters, with white letters on blue, red and green translucent pushbuttons and black letters on white, yellow, orange and all filtered pushbuttons. 6 Legending 6 Pushbutton Size Standard Pad Print Limitations 6 1/2 in square pushbuttons 2 lines, 4 characters per line 5/8 in square pushbuttons--full legend 3 lines, 6 characters per line 6 5/8 in square pushbuttons--split legend 2 lines, 6 characters per line 6 3/4 in square pushbuttons 3 lines, 7 characters per line 3/4 in x 1 in rectangular pushbutton--full legend 3 lines, 9 characters per line 3/4 in x 1 in rectangular pushbutton--split legend 2 lines, 9 characters per line 6 6 Accessories 6 These snap-on pushbutton caps are made of molded plastic for use with grooved style switches. They are ordered separately for user assembly. 6 Snap-On Pushbutton Caps--Standard 6 6 6 6 6 6 Button Diameter in Inches (mm) Catalog Number Black molded 0.625 (15.88) 53-3338 Red molded 0.625 (15.88) 53-3338-2 Description Notes 1 The full guard barrier is molded as an integral part of the switch body and is specified as a part of the complete switch catalog number. 2 An end barrier is attached to each side of housing. The center barrier is used between devices when gang mounting in a slot array. 3 For use with square devices and short side of rectangular devices. 4 For use with long side of rectangular devices. Use a center--long between switches if gang mounting. 6 6 6 V11-T6-16 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--August 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons Illuminated AC/DC Rated 6.2 Technical Data and Specifications 6 General Purpose Pushbuttons and Indicators--Illuminated and Non-Illuminated 6 Series 206/208 220/221/224 231/234 580/581/586 Ratings-- Silver Contacts Gold Contacts 5 A at 125 Vac or 250 Vac 0.1 A at 125 Vac/Vdc 5 A at 125 Vac or 250 Vdc 0.1 A at 125 Vac/Vdc 5 A at 125 Vac or 250 Vdc 0.1 A at 125 Vac/Vdc Silver or Gold: 1 A at 125 Vac Gold-plated contacts for low level Action Momentary Alternate with positive latch down Momentary Alternate with positive latch down Momentary Alternate with positive latch down Momentary Alternate with positive latch down Switch Circuitry Break before make 1PDT or 2PDT 2-independent lamp circuits Break before make 1PDT or 2PDT Break before make 1PDT or 2PDT Double break 1PST or 2PST 6 Termination Types 0.02 x 0.11 in (0.51 x 2.79 mm) 0.02 x 0.11 in (0.51 x 2.79 mm) 1 0.02 x 0.110 in (0.51 x 2.79 mm) 1 0.01 x 0.11 in (0.31 x 2.79 mm) 1 6 Pushbuttons 0.62 x 1.00 in (15.87 x 25.40 mm) Rectangular Full or horizontal split lens Plain, engraved or hot stamped 2 0.63 in (15.87 mm) Square Plain, engraved or hot stamped 2 0.63 in (15.87 mm) Square Plain, engraved or hot stamped 2 0.50 in (12.70 mm) Square 3 heights above panel E 3 Plain, engraved or hot stamped 2 Mounting Snap-in panel mounting Stainless steel retaining clips Panel thickness: 0.03 to 0.19 in (0.76 to 4.76 mm) Barrier mount available 4 Snap-in panel mounting Stainless steel retaining clips Panel thickness: 0.03 to 0.19 in (0.76 to 4.76 mm) Barrier mount available 4 Snap-in panel mounting Stainless steel retaining clips Panel thickness: 0.03 to 0.19 in (0.76 to 4.76 mm) Barrier mount available 4 Snap-in panel mounting Choice of two bezel styles: Chamfered or Flat Stainless steel retaining clips Panel thickness: 0.06 to 0.19 in (1.59 to 4.76 mm) Two T 1-3/4 wedge base lamps Incandescent Front relampable Lamp stationary to reduce mechanical shock to filament Two T 1-3/4 wedge base lamps Incandescent Front relampable Lamp stationary to reduce mechanical shock to filament One rectangular LED flush with cap Various voltages available Diode protection available Two T 1-3/4 wedge base lamps Incandescent Front relampable Lamp stationary to reduce mechanical shock to filament Pushbutton Travel 0.19 in (2.29 mm) 0.19 in (2.29 mm) 0.19 in (2.29 mm) 0.17 in (4.32) 6 Series 770/775 810/815 820/825 860/861/845 6 Ratings-- Silver Contacts Gold Contacts 10.5 A at 125 Vac or 250 Vac 0.25 A at 125 Vac or 30 Vdc 3 A at 125 Vac or 250 Vac 0.25 A at 125 Vac or 30 Vdc 3 A at 125 Vac or 250 Vac 0.25 A at 125 Vac or 30 Vdc 6 A at 125 Vac or 3 A at 250 Vac 0.25 A at 125 Vac or 30 Vdc Action Momentary Alternate with positive latch down Momentary Alternate with positive latch down Momentary Alternate with positive latch down Momentary Alternate with positive latch down Switch Circuitry 1PDT or 2PDT (2 circuit) 2-independent lamp circuits Break before make 1PDT or 2PDT Break before make 1PDT or 2PDT Double break 1PST or 2PST, NO Termination Types 0.02 x 0.125 in (0.25 x 3.18 mm) 1 Epoxy sealed 0.02 x 0.11 in (0.64 x 2.79 mm) 1 Epoxy sealed 0.02 x 0.11 in (0.64 x 2.79 mm) 1 Epoxy sealed 0.02 x 0.11 in (0.64 x 2.79 mm) 1 Pushbuttons 0.73 x 0.97 in (18.54 x 24.64 mm) Rectangular Plain, engraved or hot stamped 2 0.75 x 1 in (19.05 x 25.40 mm) Rectangular 2 heights above panel 3 5 styles Plain, engraved or hot stamped 2 0.75 in (19.05 mm) 0.62 in (15.87 mm) Square Horizontal split legend (indicator only) 3 heights above bezel 3 5 styles Plain, engraved or hot stamped 2 Panel mounting retained by molded sleeve and nut May be individually mounted or gang mounted in horizontal or vertical rows Panel thickness from 0.03 to 0.25 in (0.76 to 6.35 mm) Barrier mount available 4 Snap mount available Snap-in panel mounting Stainless steel retaining clips Panel thickness: 0.06 to 0.19 in (1.59 to 4.76 mm) Barrier mount available 4 Snap-in panel mounting Stainless steel retaining clips Panel thickness: 0.06 to 0.19 in (1.59 to 4.76 mm) Barrier mount available 4 Snap-in panel mounting Stainless steel retaining clips Panel thickness: 0.06 to 0.19 in (1.59 to 4.76 mm) Barrier mount available 4 Lamps Accepts two T 1-3/4 midget flange base lamps Incandescent or neon Front relampable One T 1-3/4 bi-pin base Incandescent, neon or LED Front relampable Lamp stationary to reduce mechanical shock to filament One T 1-3/4 bi-pin base Incandescent, neon or LED Front relampable Lamp stationary to reduce mechanical shock to filament One T 1-3/4 bi-pin base Incandescent, neon or LED Front relampable Lamp stationary to reduce mechanical shock to filament 6 Pushbutton Travel 0.22 in (5.59 mm) 0.22 in (5.59 mm) 0.22 in (5.59 mm) 0.22 in (5.59 mm) 6 Lamps Mounting Square 2 heights above panel 3 5 styles Plain, engraved or hot stamped 2 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Notes 1 Terminations are suitable for solder or female 110 connectors. Series 770: Solder only. 2 See Engraving and Hot Stamping table on Page V11-T6-16 for more information. 3 See Product Selection tables on Pages V11-T6-9-V11-T6-12 for more information. 4 See Series 200 and 300 Mounting Barriers table on Page V11-T6-16 for more information. Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--August 2014 www.eaton.com 6 6 6 V11-T6-17 6.2 6 6 SinglePole Pushbuttons Illuminated AC/DC Rated 1 2 3 6 6 6 TwoPole 1 2 3 4 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 FourPole Circuit Letter 6 All views are rear of switch with keyway or at down as applicable. Terminal numbers 2, 2 and 5 and 5 and 8 are considered inboard terminals for single-, two- and four-pole switches respectively. All others are considered outboard. Momentary contact C 2PST 2 3 D 2PDT 1 2 3 E 4PST 1 F 4PDT 2 Legend Rocker Switch Type Contact terminal--will make contact with switch lever Isolated terminal--does not make contact with lever Center terminal and switch lever Bulb Denotes mechanical contact portion Notes 1 Poles 11 and 12 may be eliminated for three-pole devices. 2 Poles 10, 11 and 12 may be eliminated for three-pole devices. 3 Dependent lamp. 4 Independent lamp. 5 Two circuit--indicates a special type of double-throw switch in which the two circuits being controlled may be independent of each other. 6 For 206 Series, an additional lamp is available. 7 Available in 1PDT or 2PDT. Schematic I 2 circuit 5 1 4 3 6 2 4 1 3 J 1PST 1 2 3 K 1PDT 5 6 L 2PST 4 5 6 2 5 8 11 3 6 9 12 7 10 8 11 9 12 1 4 2 5 3 6 G3 1PST 4 6 6 Pushbutton Legend Circuit Letter 2 3 B 1PDT 6 6 Schematic A 1PST 6 6 10 11 12 When specified on order, switches will have the terminals identified as shown in the illustration at right. Terminal markings will be ink-stamped on the side of the switch case and unused terminal positions will not be identified. Pushbutton Circuit Diagrams 6 6 7 8 9 4 5 6 Legends Circuit Diagrams 6 6 1 2 3 Terminal Identification M 2PST 2 4 1 3 6 N 2PDT P 1PDT 2 6 3 H4 1PDT 4 2 3 6 6 Q7 2 circuit B A C C NC NO H G NC NO 6 6 6 V11-T6-18 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--August 2014 www.eaton.com 6.2 Pushbuttons Illuminated AC/DC Rated Dimensions 6 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 1.400 (35.56) 0.312 (7.92) 0.190 (4.83) 0.890 (22.61) 0.310 (7.87) 0.705 + 0.005 (19.05 + 0.127/ - 0.000) 0.740 (18.80) 2 C NO NO 0.900 (22.86) 0.400 (10.16) 1.200 (30.48) 0.990 (25.15) B 0.400 (11.18) 1.133 (28.78) 0.625 0.010 (15.88 0.254) 0.400 (10.16) 1.140 + 0.005 (28.96 + 0.127/ - 0.000) 0.600 0.800 (15.24) (20.32) LEGEND LEGEND 0.625 + 0.010 (15.88 + 0.254/ - 0.000) 0.010 (0.254) Rad. Max. 0.685 (17.40) Typ. 1.400 (35.56) 0.312 (7.92) 6 0.500 (12.70) Typ. 6 6 0.125 (3.18) 0.190 (4.83) NC NC C NO 0.800 (20.32) Typ. 0.500 (12.70) LEGEND 0.550 (13.97) 1.190 (30.23) 0.750 + 0.005 (19.05 + 0.127/ - 0.000) 0.600 (15.24) Typ. 6 0.730 (18.54) 0.960 (24.38) 0.750 + 0.005 (19.05 + 0.127/ - 0.000) C NO 6 0.120 (3.05) 0.970 (24.64) 0.400 (10.16) 6 6 770 Series 220 Series 6 6 LEGEND C A 6 A = 0.270 (6.86) B = 0.330 (8.38) C = 0.440 (11.18) NC NC 0.740 (18.80) Typ. 6 580 Series 206 Series 6 2.200 (55.88) F-S = 0.360 (9.14) G = 0.270 (6.86) H = 0.120 (3.05) 1.110 0.005 (28.19 0.127) 6 6 Panel thickness 0.030 (0.762) to 0.250 (6.35) 6 0.875 0.005 (22.23 0.127) 6 6 0.940 (23.88) 0.400 (10.16) 0.740 (18.80) Typ. NC 0.750 + 0.005 (19.05 + 0.127/ - 0.000) 0.800 (20.32) Typ. NC C C NO NO 0.500 (12.70) LED 0.312 (7.92) 6 810 Series 231 Series 1.400 (35.56) 0.100 (2.54) 0.190 (4.83) 0.600 (15.24) Typ. 1.070 (27.18) 0.910 (23.11) C L 0.300 (7.62) 6 1.000 (25.40) 6 0.310 (7.87) 6 0.010 (0.254) Rad. Max. C L 6 LEGEND 0.750 (19.05) 0.750 + 0.005 (19.05 + 0.127/ - 0.000) 0.140 (3.56) 1.170 (29.72) A = 0.330 (8.38) B = 0.440 (11.18) 0.875 0.005 (22.23 0.127) 1.110 0.005 (28.19 0.127) 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--August 2014 www.eaton.com V11-T6-19 6.2 6 6 6 6 6 Illuminated AC/DC Rated Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 820 Series 0.160 (4.06) 860 Series 0.940 (23.88) Typ. 0.160 (4.06) 0.660 (16.76) 6 6 Pushbuttons 0.025 (0.64) 0.310 (7.87) A = 0.330 (8.38) B = 0.440 (11.18) 0.910 (23.11) 6 6 1.110 (28.19) 0.090 (2.29) LEGEND 0.280 (7.11) 0.750 (19.05) Typ. 0.010 (0.254) Rad. Max. 0.010 (0.254) Rad. Max. 0.875 + 0.005 (22.23 + 0.127/ - 0.000) 0.850 (21.59) Typ. 0.515 (13.08) LEGEND 0.280 (7.11) 0.840 (21.34) 0.250 (6.35) 0.875 + 0.005 (22.23 + 0.127/ - 0.000) 0.620 (15.75) Typ. 0.755 0.005 (19.18 0.127) 0.310 (7.87) 0.755 0.005 (19.18 0.127) 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 V11-T6-20 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--August 2014 www.eaton.com A = 0.240 (6.10) B = 0.350 (8.89) C = 0.140 (3.56) 1.000 (2.54) Pushbuttons XP Series Sealed Pushbutton 6.3 Contents XP Series Sealed Pushbutton Description Page XP Series Sealed Pushbutton Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-22 V11-T6-22 V11-T6-23 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Product Description Application Description Eaton's Vehicle Control business is pleased to offer our newest line of sealed pushbutton switches with multiple color options for ease of application identification. These pushbuttons are available in a standard circuit: OFF--ON (Momentary). Included with each switch is the necessary mounting hardware as well as a rubber panel seal gasket. Lawn and garden equipment Industrial and commercial equipment Fire trucks and safety vehicles Light recreational vehicles Features Mounting hardware included (packaged separately) 5/8 inch internal toothed lock-washer 5/8-24 UNEF-28 panel nut Rubber panel seal gasket 6 Standards and Certifications UL Recognition at 6 A, 125 Vac, and 3 A, 250 Vac RoHS Compliant 1 6 6 6 6 Note 1 Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for the most up-to-date list of verified part numbers. 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--August 2014 www.eaton.com V11-T6-21 6.3 Pushbuttons XP Series Sealed Pushbutton XP Series Sealed Pushbuttons 6 6 6 6 Catalog Number Selection 6 How To Order--XP Series Sealed Pushbuttons 6 To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate series and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers. Example: 6 Series 6 Circuit XP = XP Series H = SPST OFF-(ON) XP H N T 3 XX Frame Color Actuator Color G = Green N = Blue 1 T = Red V = Black Y = Yellow 1 N = Black 6 6 6 6 Mounting hardware included (packaged separately) Panel nut, internal toothed lockwasher, rubber panel seal gasket 1 Terminal 1 = Quick-connect spade 2 = Screw 3 = Solder lug Contact your local sales representative for price, MOQ and lead-time for yellow and blue version actuator colors. 6 6 6 Technical Data and Specifications 6 XP Series Sealed Pushbuttons 6 Description Specification Sealed level IP64 6 Ratings 3 A: 250 Vac; 6 A: 125 Vac; 10 A: 12 Vdc, 28 Vdc 6 Mechanical life 1,000,000 Electrical life 25,000 6 Termination Solder lugs, screw (M2 X 4), spade (0.189 inch quick-connect) Operating temperature -25 C to 85 C 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 V11-T6-22 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--August 2014 www.eaton.com Special Features XX = None Pushbuttons XP Series Sealed Pushbutton 6.3 Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in mm [Inches] 6 XP Series Sealed Pushbuttons 6 12.7 0.5 [0.500 0.020] 6 2.8 0.5 [0.111 0.020] O18.5 0.3 [0.728 0.012] 6 31.4 [1.236] 18.7 0.5 [0.736 0.020] O26.5 0.3 [1.043 0.012] 5.8 1.0 [0.229 0.039] 6 11.0 1.0 [0.433 0.039] 6 O2.25 0.20 [O0.089 0.008] 0.8 0.1 [0.031 0.004] 6 14.0 0.3 [0.551 0.012] 6 6 4.8 0.10 [0.189 0.004] Mounting Hole 6 6 Solder Lug Version 6 O16.4 0.1 [O0.647 0.004] 6 Thickness 1.5-5.0 mm 6 9.5 0.5 [0.374 0.020] 1.00 0.20 [0.039 0.007] 6 9.5 0.5 [0.374 0.020] 6 M2 x 4 6 Rubber Panel Seal Gasket 6 6 M2 Screw Terminal Version 6 Quick-Connect Version 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--August 2014 www.eaton.com V11-T6-23 Definitions 7.1 Switch Terminology 7 Glossary of Terms Term Definition One Pole (1P)--Single Pole (SP) A switch device that opens, closes or changes connections in a single conductor of an electrical circuit. Two Pole (2P)--Double Pole (DP) A switch device that opens, closes or changes connections in both conductors of the same circuit. Two Circuit (2 CIR.) A switch device that opens, closes or changes connections in a single conductor of two independent circuits. Single Throw (ST) A switch that opens, closes or completes a circuit at only one of the extreme positions of its actuator. Double Throw (DT) A switch that opens, closes or completes a circuit at both extreme positions of its actuator. Normally Open (NO) A momentary type switch in which one or more circuits are open when the switch actuator is at its normal or rest position. Normally Closed (NC) A momentary type switch in which one or more circuits are closed when the switch actuator is at its normal or rest position. 7 7 7 7 7 Actuator A lever, pushbutton, slide, trigger or other means to which an external force is applied to operate a switch mechanism. Alternate Action (Double Action Push) Push to make, then push to break a circuit. 7 Break-Before-Make A non-shorting switch mechanism that opens or breaks a connection in a conductor before closing or making a connection in another conductor. 7 Make-Before-Break A shorting switch mechanism that closes or makes a connection in a conductor before opening or breaking a previous connection in another conductor. 7 Life Expectancy The useful life cycle performance of a switch mechanism to open or close, make or break, an electrical circuit, based on statistical probability. 7 Operating Force The force that must be applied to the actuator to move it from the free position to the operating position. Operate Position The position of the actuator at which the circuit transfers. 7 Release Force In a momentary type switch, the value to which the force on the actuator must be reduced to allow the contacts to return to the normal or rest position. 7 Momentary Action Switches Momentary action switches turn a process ON and OFF when force is applied and then removed. The applied force can make the circuit change state and the removed force returns circuit to its original state. 7 Maintained Action Switches A type of device in which the switch or button physically keeps the circuit in the actuated position. Half-Throw Circuit A circuit where the actuator has only two positions (center and one extreme position) with a positive stop that prevents actuator movement to the opposite extreme position. 7 7 Approval Marks 1 Mark EN EC 7 7 Country/Region Definition U.S.A. UL(R) Recognized Listing Number: Switches--E24354 or File E1148, WOYR2 1609; Indicator--E70176, E2702 Canada UL Recognized Underwriters Laboratories Incorporated; Listing Numbers: E2702, E180275, E43960 and E147754 U.S.A. and Canada UL Recognized Underwriters Laboratories Incorporated; Listing Number: E2702 (but not all sections) Canada CSA(R)--Canadian Standards Associations (Certified) Listing Number: LR10538 or 45995, 9002 Class 6241 U.S.A. UL Listed Underwriters Laboratories Incorporated; Listing Number:E180275 7 Europe ENEC: European Norms Electrical Certification; Listing Number: E2702 (but not all sections) 7 -- Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Directive 2001/65/EU 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 Note 1 See specific product for specifications for applicable approvals. 7 7 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com V11-T7-1 7.2 7 7 7 7 7 Index 11-_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-33 28-3154_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-14 13-5496 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T3-7 28-3155_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-14 13-8171 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T3-7 28-3156 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-15 13-8173 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T3-6, 11-T3-7 28-3157_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-15 1500_-1507_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-46 28-3158_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-14 1500H_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-47 28-3425_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-67 15-1043_-15-1047_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-31 28-3426 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-78 15-1048-_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-31, 11-T4-33 28-5148_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-67 15-1049_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-33 28-5415_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-64 15-124F_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-31 28-5555_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-74 15-1525_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-31 28-5558 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-78 7 15-189-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-31 28-5637-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-78 15-192_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-31 28-5863_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-13 7 15-2523_-15-2528_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-31 28-5901_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-9 15-2534-14_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-31 28-5909_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-9 15-90 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-31 28-5940 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-78 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 15-966-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-31 29-761-5_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-32 15-994-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-31 2CAP_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-15 1600_-1607_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-50 2N_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-14 1600H_-1620H_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-53 30-2899-_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-34 1609_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-51, 11-T2-55 30-5632-_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-34 1620HX_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-53 32-2245 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-39 17-19263 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-79 32-341 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-33 17-19264 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-79 3CAP_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-15 17-19544-2_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-79 3N_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-14 17-21159 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-79 53-3318_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-79 17-21160 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-79 53-3338_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-16 7 17-21543 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-79 53-73 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T1-11 17-22145 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-42 580K_-581K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-10 7 17-22145_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-42 580P_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-13 7 17-22146 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-42 586L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-10 17-22152 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-42 61-40_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T1-11 17-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T1-11 6CAP_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-15 200B_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-16 6N_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-14 7 7 7 7 206K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-9 7071K_-7073K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-9 7 206P_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-13 7300K_-7317K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-6 208L_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-9 7500K_-7510K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-12, 11-T4-15 7 220K_-221K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-9 7530K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-13 220P_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-13 7546K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-12 7 7 7 224L_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-9 7555K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-12 231K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-9 7560K_-7569K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-13, 11-T4-15 231P_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-13 7570K_-7571K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-13, 11-T4-15 234L_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-9 7576K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-12 7 2500_-2507_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-46 7580K_-7587K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-12 2500H_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-47 7590K_-7597K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-13 7 25-13936_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-42 7630K_-7632K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-13 7 2600_-2607_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-50 7660K_-7668K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-4 2600H_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-53 7670K_-7674K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-4 V11-T7-2 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com Index 7.2 7690K_-7695K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T4-14 8440K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-3 7700K_-7705K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T4-14 8444K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-4 770K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T6-11 8448K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-4 770P_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T6-13 845L_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-12 775L_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T6-11 849P_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-13 7803K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T4-13 860K_-861K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-12 7804K_-7805K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T4-14 8800K_ -8860K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-4 7810K_-7813K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T4-28 8857K_-8859K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-5 7818K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T3-2 8928K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T3-6, 11-T4-20 7835K_-7836K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T6-3 8980K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T3-4 7842K_-7846K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T3-6 B1600_-B1607_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-52 7933K_-7935K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T4-14 B2600_-B2607_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-52 7990K_-7992K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T4-28 DP_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T5-2 8004K_-8005K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T2-68 DS_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T5-2 8006K _-8007K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T2-65 E30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T1-7 8055K_-8057K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T2-58 E32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T1-10 8064K_-8065K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T2-75 E321 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T1-11 810K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T6-12 E324 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T1-11 810P_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T6-13 E33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T1-14 8130K_-8138K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T2-57 eSM_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T1-7, 11-T1-10, 11-T1-11, 11-T1-13 8140K_-8148K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T2-57 eVu_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T1-17 8150K_-8155K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T2-57 MS25068_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-4 815L_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T6-12 MS25098_-MS25100_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-3 8166K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T3-9 MS25125_-MS25127_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-5 8179K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T2-44 MS25201_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-4 820K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T6-12 MS35058_-MS35059_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-4 820P_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T6-13 NGR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T2-8-11-T2-31 825L_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T6-12 NGR Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-14, 11-T2-15 8261K_-8262K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T4-3 NGR Rocker Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-11 8280K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T4-20 NGR Switch Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-10 8283K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T3-6 P1600_-P1607_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-50 8290K_-8295K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T4-20 P2600_-P2607_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T2-50 8370K_-8373K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T3-6 RW_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T5-4 8370K_-8375K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T4-20 SVR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T2-32-11-T2-42 8381K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T4-20 SW1RY_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-33 8391K_-8396K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T4-20 WP_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T5-2 8406K_-8411K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T6-3 WS_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T5-2 8418K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T6-3 XPHN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T6-22 8423K_-8424K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T6-3 XTD_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-T4-25 8434K_-8435K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-T6-4 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E--December 2015 www.eaton.com V11-T7-3